US20230148814A1 - Surface cleaning apparatus - Google Patents
Surface cleaning apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20230148814A1 US20230148814A1 US17/988,594 US202217988594A US2023148814A1 US 20230148814 A1 US20230148814 A1 US 20230148814A1 US 202217988594 A US202217988594 A US 202217988594A US 2023148814 A1 US2023148814 A1 US 2023148814A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- inlet
- surface cleaning
- cleaning apparatus
- air
- air treatment
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L—DOMESTIC WASHING OR CLEANING; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L5/00—Structural features of suction cleaners
- A47L5/12—Structural features of suction cleaners with power-driven air-pumps or air-compressors, e.g. driven by motor vehicle engine vacuum
- A47L5/22—Structural features of suction cleaners with power-driven air-pumps or air-compressors, e.g. driven by motor vehicle engine vacuum with rotary fans
- A47L5/24—Hand-supported suction cleaners
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L—DOMESTIC WASHING OR CLEANING; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L9/00—Details or accessories of suction cleaners, e.g. mechanical means for controlling the suction or for effecting pulsating action; Storing devices specially adapted to suction cleaners or parts thereof; Carrying-vehicles specially adapted for suction cleaners
- A47L9/10—Filters; Dust separators; Dust removal; Automatic exchange of filters
- A47L9/16—Arrangement or disposition of cyclones or other devices with centrifugal action
- A47L9/1691—Mounting or coupling means for cyclonic chamber or dust receptacles
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L—DOMESTIC WASHING OR CLEANING; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L9/00—Details or accessories of suction cleaners, e.g. mechanical means for controlling the suction or for effecting pulsating action; Storing devices specially adapted to suction cleaners or parts thereof; Carrying-vehicles specially adapted for suction cleaners
- A47L9/10—Filters; Dust separators; Dust removal; Automatic exchange of filters
- A47L9/106—Dust removal
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L—DOMESTIC WASHING OR CLEANING; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L9/00—Details or accessories of suction cleaners, e.g. mechanical means for controlling the suction or for effecting pulsating action; Storing devices specially adapted to suction cleaners or parts thereof; Carrying-vehicles specially adapted for suction cleaners
- A47L9/10—Filters; Dust separators; Dust removal; Automatic exchange of filters
- A47L9/12—Dry filters
- A47L9/125—Dry filters funnel-shaped
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L—DOMESTIC WASHING OR CLEANING; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L9/00—Details or accessories of suction cleaners, e.g. mechanical means for controlling the suction or for effecting pulsating action; Storing devices specially adapted to suction cleaners or parts thereof; Carrying-vehicles specially adapted for suction cleaners
- A47L9/10—Filters; Dust separators; Dust removal; Automatic exchange of filters
- A47L9/12—Dry filters
- A47L9/127—Dry filters tube- or sleeve-shaped
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L—DOMESTIC WASHING OR CLEANING; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L9/00—Details or accessories of suction cleaners, e.g. mechanical means for controlling the suction or for effecting pulsating action; Storing devices specially adapted to suction cleaners or parts thereof; Carrying-vehicles specially adapted for suction cleaners
- A47L9/10—Filters; Dust separators; Dust removal; Automatic exchange of filters
- A47L9/16—Arrangement or disposition of cyclones or other devices with centrifugal action
- A47L9/165—Construction of inlets
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L—DOMESTIC WASHING OR CLEANING; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L9/00—Details or accessories of suction cleaners, e.g. mechanical means for controlling the suction or for effecting pulsating action; Storing devices specially adapted to suction cleaners or parts thereof; Carrying-vehicles specially adapted for suction cleaners
- A47L9/10—Filters; Dust separators; Dust removal; Automatic exchange of filters
- A47L9/16—Arrangement or disposition of cyclones or other devices with centrifugal action
- A47L9/1658—Construction of outlets
- A47L9/1666—Construction of outlets with filtering means
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L—DOMESTIC WASHING OR CLEANING; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L9/00—Details or accessories of suction cleaners, e.g. mechanical means for controlling the suction or for effecting pulsating action; Storing devices specially adapted to suction cleaners or parts thereof; Carrying-vehicles specially adapted for suction cleaners
- A47L9/28—Installation of the electric equipment, e.g. adaptation or attachment to the suction cleaner; Controlling suction cleaners by electric means
- A47L9/2868—Arrangements for power supply of vacuum cleaners or the accessories thereof
- A47L9/2884—Details of arrangements of batteries or their installation
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L—DOMESTIC WASHING OR CLEANING; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47L9/00—Details or accessories of suction cleaners, e.g. mechanical means for controlling the suction or for effecting pulsating action; Storing devices specially adapted to suction cleaners or parts thereof; Carrying-vehicles specially adapted for suction cleaners
- A47L9/32—Handles
- A47L9/322—Handles for hand-supported suction cleaners
Definitions
- This disclosure relates generally to surface cleaning apparatus such as hand vacuum cleaners, upright vacuum cleaners, stick vacuum cleaners or canister vacuum cleaners, and, in particular, portable surface cleaning apparatus, such as hand vacuum cleaners.
- Various types of surface cleaning apparatus are known, including upright surface cleaning apparatus, canister surface cleaning apparatus, stick surface cleaning apparatus, central vacuum systems, and hand carriable surface cleaning apparatus such as hand vacuum cleaners. Further, various designs for cyclonic surface cleaning apparatus, including battery operated cyclonic hand vacuum cleaners are known in the art.
- a surface cleaning apparatus includes an air treatment assembly.
- a rib extends into a chamber of the assembly from a wall of the chamber, which may be a cyclone.
- the rib interrupts air flow, which may be cyclonic air flow, and encourages dirt accumulation adjacent the rib.
- the rib may be at one of the ends of the chamber, and optionally at an end at which an air outlet of the chamber is located.
- the rib may extend inwardly into the air treatment chamber from the air treatment chamber end wall (e.g., the outlet end wall).
- the rib may extend radially into the air treatment chamber from an air treatment chamber sidewall (e.g., radially inwardly) and/or axially from the air treatment chamber end wall.
- the air treatment chamber air outlet may comprise an air permeable portion through which the air flow path extends.
- the outlet may also include an air impermeable portion.
- the air permeable portion may be a porous portion comprising a porous material that extends inwardly from the air impermeable portion.
- the rib may extend co-extensively (i.e., with respect to a cyclone axis) along at least a portion of the cyclone chamber in which the impermeable portion of the outlet is provided.
- the air treatment inlet conduit extends into the air treatment chamber from an upstream opening to a downstream opening.
- the downstream opening may be a tangential opening into the chamber when the chamber is a cyclone chamber.
- the inlet may include an air permeable section (e.g., covered by porous material such as a mesh) that is discrete from the downstream opening of the inlet conduit.
- the bulk of air is directed through the downstream opening, which may be referred to as the primary opening.
- a lesser volume of air is allowed to pass through the air permeable section from the air treatment inlet conduit into the air treatment chamber.
- the downstream opening and the air permeable section provide alternate air exits which concurrently permit air flow therethrough.
- the air permeable section forms a secondary pathway between the air treatment inlet conduit and the air treatment chamber. This secondary pathway results in a reduction of the power required for the motor to produce a given air flow rate.
- the axial length of the downstream opening of the inlet conduit is variable.
- the axial length of the downstream opening may be varied to change the separation characteristics of the surface cleaning apparatus, such as to change backpressure or to change the ratio between an effective air inlet axial length and the chamber axial length.
- the ratio between the effective air inlet axial length and the chamber axial length affects the number of turns that air passing through the cyclone chamber is subject to, and so affects the efficiency of the surface cleaning apparatus.
- the axial length may be changed manually by a user or automatically, e.g., in response to, e.g., detecting that finer particles are being collected or that particles are making past the air treatment assembly of the surface cleaning apparatus.
- the air treatment inlet is selectively closeable by a closure member.
- a closure member When the closure member is in the open position, during operation of the surface cleaning apparatus, air flows through the air treatment inlet to the air treatment chamber. When the closure member is in the closed position, air flow through the air treatment inlet is inhibited.
- the closure member may be curved along at least one dimension with respect to a coordinate system defined by the apparatus longitudinal axis, the apparatus vertical axis, and the apparatus tangential axis. The closure member may therefore be referred to as a curved member.
- the closure member is curved with respect only to a single dimension, as exemplified. In other words, the closure member may be arcuate in shape.
- the closure member may pivot about a closure axis of rotation between an open position and a closed position.
- the closure member moves axially with respect to the air treatment member longitudinal axis and/or the inlet conduit axis.
- the closure member may be an end wall of the air treatment inlet.
- the inlet end wall may extend transverse to the flow direction.
- the inlet end wall may include a generally planar inlet end wall upstream face, which may extend generally perpendicular to the flow direction.
- the closure member may close a tangential inlet to the air treatment chamber. The closure member may be received against a sidewall of the air treatment inlet and translate axially to close the tangential inlet.
- the air treatment assembly has an assembly free volume that includes the chamber free volume within the chamber and an inlet free volume within the air treatment inlet.
- the chamber free volume is an open space within the air treatment chamber outside the air treatment inlet and the air treatment outlet.
- the inlet free volume is an open space within the air treatment inlet that would be included in the air flow path if the closure member was not included in the surface cleaning apparatus.
- the closure member in the open position may be at least partially removed from the assembly free volume.
- the closure member in the open position may be fully removed from the assembly free volume.
- This aspect reduces the extent to which the closure member inhibits air flow when in the open position and/or reduces turbulence caused by a significant discontinuity in the transverse cross sectional area of the air treatment inlet at a downstream edge of the closure member when the closure member is in the open position.
- the closure member is moveable between the open and closed positions, and, when in the open position may be at least partially received in a closure recess or partially moved into or through a closure passage.
- the recess may have a mouth or port through which it is open to the assembly free volume, and the closure member may close the port when the closure member is in the open position.
- the surface cleaning apparatus includes a driving member drivingly connected to the closure member.
- the closure member may move in a first direction from the open position to the closed position.
- the closure member may move in a second direction from the closed position to the open position.
- the driving member may be operable to move the closure member in at least one of the first and second directions.
- the driving member may be any suitable driving member.
- the driving member may include a closure member actuator, such as an electromechanical actuator.
- the driving member may include a manually moveable member.
- the driving member may include a suction-powered piston.
- the driving member may include an external conduit (e.g., a removable wand) removably insertable into the surface cleaning apparatus.
- At least a portion of a first end of the chamber is moveable between a closed operating position and an open position.
- the chamber first end may include the evacuation opening, and the evacuation opening may be closed when the moveable portion of the chamber first end is in the closed operating position and open when the moveable portion of the chamber first end is in the open position.
- the moveable portion may be rotationally moveable, translationally moveable, or inflatable and deflatable.
- a docking station may be operable to move the moveable portion of the chamber first end between the closed operating position and the open position.
- At least a portion of an end of the air treatment chamber is translatable generally parallel to the chamber longitudinal axis.
- the axially moveable end portion is moveable between a first position and a second position that is axially spaced from the first position.
- the second position may be forward of the first position.
- the axially moveable end portion may act as a plunger, e.g., to move debris through the chamber.
- opening at least a portion of the chamber first end moves at least a portion of the chamber second end.
- the at least a portion of the chamber second end that moves in response to opening the at least a portion of the chamber first end may be joined thereto by a linking member.
- the at least a portion of the chamber second end that moves in response to opening the at least a portion of the chamber first end may be an axially moveable second end portion.
- the at least a portion of the chamber first end may be an axially moveable first end portion.
- a fluid driven moveable member of the surface cleaning apparatus is moveable via fluid pressure through the surface cleaning apparatus, and is moveable via the fluid pressure between a first position and a second position.
- the fluid pressure may be air pressure (i.e., suction) generated by an air moving member of the surface cleaning apparatus or docking station.
- the fluid driven moveable member may be received in the apparatus air flow path and/or the evacuation air flow path.
- the fluid driven moveable member may include or consist of the chamber first end or a moveable portion thereof.
- the fluid driven moveable member may include or consist of he chamber second end or a moveable portion thereof.
- a user interface is provided at an upper end of a pistol grip handle. This location provides the user interface at a convenient location for a user of the interface.
- the user interface overlies the main body housing.
- the main body housing may contain the suction motor.
- the user interface may overly the suction motor housing.
- the user interface may be separated such that the user interface is not attached to the suction motor housing.
- the user interface may be spaced from the main body housing, and may be spaced from the main body housing by a separation air gap.
- the surface cleaning apparatus includes an annular portion.
- the user interface may be provided on the annular portion.
- the user interface may be secured to the annular portion.
- the annular portion is part of the apparatus rear end.
- the user interface may be curved to follow an annular surface of the annular portion.
- the user interface may include an information display having a display surface that faces radially outward.
- the user interface may also, or alternatively, include an information display having a display surface that faces rearwardly.
- the surface cleaning apparatus includes a filter that is removeable from an installed position to a removed position outside the main body housing.
- the filter is moveable between the installed and removed positions along a removal path.
- the removal path may extend past the user interface between the installed position and the removed position.
- the removal path may extend through the user interface.
- the filter may be, e.g., the post-motor filter.
- the post-motor filter may remove rearwardly though an annular user interface body.
- a filter is removable radially outwardly with respect to the apparatus longitudinal axis.
- the filter may be removeable in a direction that is generally perpendicular to the apparatus longitudinal axis.
- the filter is removeable between an installed position and a removed position, and is removeable along a removal path.
- the removal path may be a radially extending path, as exemplified.
- the removal path may be a laterally extending path.
- the removal path may be generally horizontal when the apparatus upper end is above the apparatus lower end, and may be generally parallel to the apparatus transverse axis.
- the surface cleaning apparatus may include a plurality of radially removable filters.
- a filter is at least partially nested within the air treatment outlet. Nesting the filter may allow the surface cleaning apparatus to have a shorter axial length.
- the filter at least partially nested withing the air treatment outlet may be the pre-motor filter.
- the surface cleaning apparatus includes an ultraviolet light source.
- the ultraviolet light source is operable to generate ultraviolet light.
- the ultraviolet light may be used to disinfect an interior or external surface of the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., a handle external surface or an internal surface facing the air flow path).
- the ultraviolet light source may be arranged to direct the ultraviolet light into a light carrying structure (such as a light pipe).
- the apparatus may include at least one wall that is transparent to ultraviolet light.
- the surface cleaning apparatus may include a dirt scoop.
- the dirt scoop is moveable between an operational position and an evacuation position. In the operational position, the dirt scoop extends into the air treatment chamber. As it moves to the evacuation position, the dirt scoop sweeps through the chamber to dislodge debris.
- FIG. 1 is perspective view of a surface cleaning apparatus, according to an embodiment
- FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 1 ;
- FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of an embodiment of a stick vacuum cleaner incorporating the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 1 in an upright storage position;
- FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the stick vacuum cleaner of FIG. 3 in a reclined cleaning position
- FIG. 5 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 1 ;
- FIG. 6 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of a portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 1 ;
- FIG. 7 is a transverse cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in an open position;
- FIG. 8 is a transverse cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 7 , with the closure member in a closed position;
- FIG. 9 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in an open position;
- FIG. 10 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 9 , with the closure member in a closed position;
- FIG. 11 is a transverse cross sectional view of another portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 1 ;
- FIG. 12 is another axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 1 ;
- FIG. 13 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of another portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 1 ;
- FIG. 14 is a transverse cross sectional view of another portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 1 ;
- FIG. 15 is another axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 1 ;
- FIG. 16 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of another portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 1 ;
- FIG. 17 is a perspective view of n end of an embodiment of an external onduit, such as a rigid wand;
- FIG. 18 is a perspective view of another embodiment of an external conduit
- FIG. 19 is a perspective view of another embodiment of an external conduit
- FIG. 20 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 1 having received therein the external conduit of FIG. 19 ;
- FIG. 21 is a perspective view of another embodiment of an external conduit
- FIG. 22 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus having received therein the external conduit of FIG. 21 , with a moveable inlet member in a first position;
- FIG. 23 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 22 , with the moveable inlet member in a second position;
- FIG. 24 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a moveable inlet member in a first position;
- FIG. 25 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 24 , with the moveable inlet member in a second position;
- FIG. 26 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of a portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 24 , with the moveable inlet member in the second position:
- FIG. 27 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a moveable inlet member in a first position;
- FIG. 28 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 27 , with the moveable inlet member in a second position;
- FIG. 29 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a moveable inlet member in a first position;
- FIG. 30 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 29 , with the moveable inlet member in a second position;
- FIG. 31 is an axial cross sectional view of a portion of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position;
- FIG. 32 is an axial cross sectional view of the portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 31 , with the closure member in a second position;
- FIG. 33 is a transverse cross sectional view of an inlet of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 31 ;
- FIG. 34 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position;
- FIG. 35 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 34 , with the closure member in a second position;
- FIG. 36 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position;
- FIG. 37 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 36 , with the closure member in a second position;
- FIG. 38 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position;
- FIG. 39 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 38 , with the closure member in a second position;
- FIG. 40 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position;
- FIG. 41 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 40 , with the closure member in a second position
- FIG. 42 is a transverse cross sectional view of a portion of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position;
- FIG. 43 is a transverse cross sectional view of the portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 42 , with the closure member in a second position;
- FIG. 44 is an axial cross sectional view of a portion of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position:
- FIG. 45 is an axial cross sectional view of the portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 44 , with the closure member in a second position;
- FIG. 46 is a perspective view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus.
- FIG. 47 is an exploded view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 46 ;
- FIG. 48 is a front perspective view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 46 docked at a docking station;
- FIG. 49 is an axial cross sectional view of he surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 46 docked at the docking station;
- FIG. 50 is an expanded axial cross sectional view of a portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 46 docked at the docking station;
- FIG. 51 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 46 with a closure member in a first position;
- FIG. 52 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 46 with the closure member in a second position;
- FIG. 53 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of another portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 46 with the closure member in the first position;
- FIG. 54 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of the other portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 46 with the closure member in the second position;
- FIG. 55 is a schematic cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a chamber first end in a first position and a chamber second end in a first position;
- FIG. 56 is a schematic cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 55 , with the chamber first end in a second position;
- FIG. 57 is a schematic cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 55 , with a chamber second end in a second position;
- FIG. 58 is a schematic cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 55 , with a chamber second end in a third position;
- FIG. 59 is a schematic cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a chamber first end in a first position and a chamber second end in a first position;
- FIG. 60 is a schematic cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 59 , with the chamber first end in a second position and the chamber second end in a second position;
- FIG. 61 is a schematic cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 59 , with the chamber first end in a third position and the chamber second end in a third position;
- FIG. 62 is a front perspective view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus
- FIG. 63 is a rear perspective view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 62 ;
- FIG. 64 is a front perspective axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 62 ;
- FIG. 65 is a rear perspective axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 62 ;
- FIG. 66 is another rear perspective view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 62 ;
- FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 62 docked at a docking station;
- FIG. 68 is an axial cross sectional view of he surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 62 docked at the docking station;
- FIG. 69 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of a portion of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 62 ;
- FIG. 70 is an exploded view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 62 ;
- FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a filter in a first position;
- FIG. 72 is a rear perspective view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 71 , with the filter in a second position;
- FIG. 73 is a schematic rear cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a filter in a first position;
- FIG. 74 is a schematic rear cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 73 , with the filter in a second position;
- FIG. 75 is a schematic cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a dirt scoop in a first position;
- FIG. 76 is a schematic cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus of FIG. 75 , with the dirt scoop in a second position.
- an embodiment means “one or more (but not all) embodiments of the present invention(s),” unless expressly specified otherwise.
- two or more parts are said to be “coupled”, “connected”, “attached”, or “fastened” where the parts are joined or operate together either directly or indirectly (i.e., through one or more intermediate parts), so long as a link occurs.
- two or more parts are said to be “directly coupled”, “directly connected”, “directly attached”, or “directly fastened” where the parts are connected in physical contact with each other. None of the terms “coupled”, “connected”, “attached”, and “fastened” distinguish the manner in which two or more parts are joined together.
- FIGS. 1 and 2 an exemplary embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus is shown generally as 100 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus is exemplified as a hand vacuum cleaner with an apparatus front end 102 , an apparatus rear end 104 , an apparatus upper end 106 and an apparatus lower end 108 .
- An apparatus longitudinal axis 110 extends between the apparatus front end 102 and the apparatus rear end 104 .
- An apparatus vertical axis 112 extends between the apparatus upper end 106 and apparatus lower end 108 .
- the apparatus vertical axis 112 is perpendicular to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 .
- An apparatus transverse axis 114 is perpendicular to each of the apparatus vertical axis 112 and the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 includes a main body 120 .
- the main body 120 includes a main body housing 122 and a handle 124 .
- the handle 124 may be a pistol grip handle with a hand grip portion 126 that extends generally vertically.
- the handle 124 has a longest dimension in the direction of a handle longitudinal axis 128 .
- the handle longitudinal axis 128 may be generally transverse to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 .
- the handle 124 may be a pistol grip handle with a handle upper end 130 of the pistol grip handle mounted to a lower end of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the handle 124 may extend away from the main body housing 122 .
- the handle may be below the suction motor, the pre-motor filter, and/or the air treatment assembly. Arranging the handle below a heavy and/or bulky component of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may result in a more desirable hand-feel of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the handle upper end 130 may be mounted to one or more of a suction motor housing, the pre-motor filter housing and the air treatment assembly.
- the handle upper end 130 may be mounted to each of the air treatment assembly and the pre-motor filter housing.
- the handle upper end 130 may be mounted to each of the pre-motor filter housing and the suction motor housing.
- main body housing 122 and/or handle 124 may be in other configurations, shapes, and/or positions in other embodiments.
- the illustrated example surface cleaning apparatus is a hand vacuum cleaner, which may also be referred to as a “handvac” or “hand-held vacuum cleaner”.
- a hand vacuum cleaner is a vacuum cleaner that can be operated to clean a surface generally one-handedly. That is, the entire weight of the vacuum may be held by the same one hand used to direct a dirty air inlet of the vacuum cleaner with respect to a surface to be cleaned.
- the handle and a clean air inlet may be rigidly coupled to each other (directly or indirectly) so as to move as one while maintaining a constant orientation relative to each other. This is to be contrasted with canister and upright vacuum cleaners, whose weight is typically supported by a surface (e.g., a floor) during use.
- any one or more of the features of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 set out herein may alternately be used in any type of surface cleaning apparatus, such as an upright surface cleaning apparatus, a stick vac, a canister surface cleaning apparatus, an extractor or the like. It will also be appreciated that a surface cleaning apparatus may use any configuration of the operating components and the airflow paths exemplified herein.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may form a part of a larger surface cleaning apparatus 152 (e.g., a stick vacuum cleaner). As exemplified, the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may be mounted to an outlet end of an upright support member or rigid wand or external conduit 140 (e.g., a wand of a stick vacuum).
- the external conduit 140 may be a rigid conduit (e.g., formed of rigid plastic and/or metal).
- the external conduit 140 extends between an external conduit inlet end 142 and an external conduit outlet end 144 .
- the external conduit 140 includes an external conduit sidewall 146 extending between the external conduit inlet end 142 and the external conduit outlet end 144 .
- the external conduit 140 may be a linear rigid conduit extending linearly along an external conduit longitudinal axis 148 between the external conduit inlet end 142 and the external conduit outlet end 144 , the longitudinal axis extending along a longest dimension of the external conduit 140 .
- the external conduit 140 may include a flexible portion and/or a non-linear portion.
- the external conduit 140 may include a flexible hose portion and a rigid portion.
- the external conduit 140 is mounted (e.g., rotationally such as pivotally mounted) at an upstream end 142 to a surface cleaning head 150 , whereby the surface cleaning apparatus forms a stick type surface cleaning apparatus 152 .
- the external conduit 140 may be provided without the surface cleaning head 150 .
- the external conduit 140 may be removably receivable in the surface cleaning apparatus 100 whereby an effective nozzle of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is extended to the upstream end 142 , thereby extending the reach of the hand vacuum cleaner for, e.g., above floor cleaning.
- the external conduit 140 and the surface cleaning head 150 are parts of a floor cleaning unit 154 to which the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may be removably mountable to form the stick type vacuum 152 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is operable in different modes, and may include a mode for use with the floor cleaning head 150 and a mode for use without the floor cleaning head.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may be operable in a floor cleaner mode.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may be operable in an above floor cleaning mode.
- the floor cleaning mode may provide a different (e.g., lesser) level of power to an air moving member of the hand vacuum unit than the above floor cleaning mode, resulting in, e.g., a different efficiency, run time, and/or physical configuration of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 , as discussed further elsewhere herein.
- the surface cleaning head 150 and the external conduit 140 may be moveably mounted between an upright storage position ( FIG. 3 ) and a reclined cleaning position ( FIG. 4 ).
- the surface cleaning head 150 and the external conduit 140 are joined by a pivot joint 156 about which they pivot relative to one another to move between the upright storage position and the reclined cleaning position.
- an apparatus air flow path 160 extends from an apparatus dirty air inlet 162 to an apparatus clean air outlet 164 (clean air outlet 164 is shown in, e.g., FIG. 1 ).
- the apparatus dirty air inlet 162 may be provided at the apparatus front end 102 . As exemplified, the apparatus dirty air inlet 162 may be provided at the apparatus upper end 106 . The apparatus dirty air inlet 162 may be at a forwardmost part of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 , and may be directed forwardly as exemplified (i.e., opening forwardly). It will be appreciated that the dirty air inlet may be located elsewhere, such as the lower end of the lower end of the air treatment assembly.
- the apparatus dirty air inlet 162 may be provided at an inlet end of an inlet conduit 170 .
- the inlet conduit extends from the apparatus dirty air inlet 162 rearwardly.
- the inlet conduit 170 extends from an inlet conduit inlet end 172 to an inlet conduit outlet end 174 .
- the inlet conduit outlet end 174 is within an internal chamber of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., an air treatment chamber which may be a cyclone chamber). Accordingly, the inlet conduit may be inserted into the air treatment chamber.
- the inlet conduit 170 may be provided external to the internal chamber and may have an outlet port that is also an inlet port provide din a wall (e.g., a sidewall) of the internal chamber.
- the inlet conduit 170 may be a generally linear conduit having an inlet conduit longitudinal axis 176 along a longest dimension of the inlet conduit and extending between the inlet conduit inlet end 172 and the inlet conduit outlet end 174 .
- the inlet conduit longitudinal axis 176 may extend between the apparatus front end 102 and the apparatus rear end 104 , and, as exemplified, may be generally horizontal when the apparatus upper end 106 is above the apparatus lower end 108 .
- the inlet conduit longitudinal axis 176 may be generally parallel to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 .
- the inlet conduit 170 may form a nozzle 180 of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the inlet conduit 170 may be connected or directly connected to an accessory, such as the external conduit 140 (e.g., a wand).
- the accessory may be any suitable accessory tool such as a rigid air flow conduit (e.g., an above floor cleaning wand), a crevice tool, a mini brush, and the like.
- the accessory may be coupled to the surface cleaning apparatus 100 such that the accessory is in air flow communication with the dirty air inlet (e.g., in air flow communication with the inlet conduit 170 ).
- the accessory may be or include a conduit (e.g., external conduit 140 ), and the conduit of the accessory may be received within the inlet conduit 170 or may receive the inlet conduit 10 within the accessory conduit.
- one or more releasable fasteners may be used to couple the accessory to the surface cleaning apparatus 100 , such as clips or magnets.
- the accessory may be held in air flow communication with the dirty air inlet via a friction fit (e.g., between an outer diameter of an accessory conduit and an inner diameter of the inlet conduit 170 , or vice versa).
- a friction fit e.g., between an outer diameter of an accessory conduit and an inner diameter of the inlet conduit 170 , or vice versa.
- the inlet conduit 170 could be slideably receivable in an accessory conduit.
- the inlet conduit 170 may project forward alone.
- the inlet conduit 170 may extend forwardly of the rest of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 , with no other member of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 extending forwardly with the inlet conduit 170 .
- one or more additional component such as an electrical coupler 380 , may project forward alongside the inlet conduit.
- the inlet conduit 170 may be part of the main body 120 .
- the inlet conduit 170 may be joined to the rearward portion by any suitable structure, e.g., a portion of the main body housing 122 , a plurality of discrete arms in parallel to one another, or, as exemplified in FIGS. 46 and 47 , a main body shell 182 .
- the inlet conduit 170 is part of a front portion of a body that is removably coupled to the main body 120 (e.g., the air treatment assembly 200 , in the exemplary embodiment).
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may not include an inlet conduit 170 , and the apparatus dirty air inlet 162 may instead open directly into a downstream chamber (e.g., an air treatment chamber 210 ) rather than being at an upstream end of a conduit.
- a conduit 170 allows a nozzle 180 to be formed for application to a surface that is to be cleaned.
- the apparatus clean air outlet 164 may be provided at a lateral portion of the apparatus rear end 104 .
- the apparatus clean air outlet 164 may include a grill 190 located on a lateral surface of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the apparatus clean air outlet 164 may include openings (e.g., grill 190 ) on each lateral side of the apparatus rear end 104 .
- the openings on each of the lateral sides of the apparatus rear end 104 may be generally equivalent in cross sectional area to encourage balanced air flow out each side of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 through the apparatus clean air outlet 164 .
- the apparatus rear end 104 may have a main body housing sidewall 192 that extends to a main body rear face 194 of the main body housing 122 .
- the apparatus clean air outlet 164 may be provided in the main body housing sidewall 192 .
- the main body housing sidewall 192 is a generally cylindrical wall, and the main body rear face 194 includes a rear surface of a planar rear wall 196 , as exemplified.
- the main body rear face 194 is a rear face of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 as a whole (i.e., nothing overlying the main body rear face 194 ).
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include a body overlying the rear face 194 of the housing 122 , such as a user interface support body as discussed further elsewhere herein.
- apparatus dirty air inlet 162 and/or the apparatus clean air outlet 164 may be provided at different locations and/or be of different configurations.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 includes an air treatment assembly 200 .
- the apparatus air flow path 160 extends through the air treatment assembly 200 .
- the air treatment assembly 200 is configured to remove particles of dirt and other debris from the airflow and/or otherwise treat the airflow.
- the air treatment assembly includes one or more air treatment members 202 . Any air treatment member or members known in the art may be used.
- the surface cleaning apparatus may use one or more cyclones, bags, screens, physical filter media (e.g., foam, felt, HEPA) or the like.
- the air treatment assembly 200 may be removably mounted between the apparatus dirty air inlet 162 and the main body housing 122 . As exemplified in FIGS.
- the air treatment assembly 200 may be removably receivable in a cavity between the inlet conduit 170 and the main body housing 122 .
- the air treatment assembly 200 may include the inlet conduit 170 (e.g., with the inlet conduit 170 extending forwardly from the air treatment assembly 200 , optionally from an upper portion of the front end of the air treatment assembly 200 ), and the air treatment assembly 200 may be removably coupled to the main body housing 122 , e.g., a front end of the main body.
- the air treatment assembly 200 may be removeable from the main body housing 122 in any suitable direction, such as upwardly and/or downwardly and/or forwardly (e.g., as exemplified in FIG. 2 ).
- the air treatment assembly 200 may include any suitable number of air treatment stages, each with any suitable number of air treatment members in parallel.
- the air treatment member 202 may include a first separation stage with a single air treatment member (e.g., a cyclone or momentum separator) and a downstream second stage comprising a plurality of air treatment members (e.g., an array of mini cyclones in parallel with one another).
- An air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 extends between an air treatment member first end 206 (e.g., front end) and an air treatment member second end 208 (e.g., rear end). As exemplified, the air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 may be generally parallel to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 and/or the inlet conduit longitudinal axis 176 . The air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 may be generally transverse to the handle longitudinal axis 128 . The air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 may be generally horizontal when the apparatus upper end 106 is above the apparatus lower end 108 .
- the exemplary air treatment member 202 includes an air treatment chamber 210 .
- the air treatment chamber 210 has a chamber housing 212 having a chamber first end 214 and a chamber second end 216 axially spaced from the chamber first end 214 along the chamber longitudinal axis 218 .
- the air treatment chamber 210 may be a cyclone chamber, as exemplified, and the chamber longitudinal axis 218 may be a cyclone axis of revolution.
- the chamber longitudinal axis 218 may be a generally horizontal axis when the apparatus upper end 106 is above the apparatus lower end 108 , and may extend between the apparatus front end 102 and the apparatus rear end 104 .
- the chamber first end 214 may be a front end and the chamber second end 216 may be a rear end.
- the air treatment chamber 210 includes a chamber sidewall 220 extending between the chamber first end 214 and the chamber second end 216 .
- the air treatment chamber sidewall 220 may be a generally cylindrical sidewall.
- a generally cylindrical sidewall encourages cyclonic air flow within the chamber.
- the air treatment chamber sidewall 220 may have a generally constant diameter along the chamber longitudinal axis 218 .
- any suitable shape may be used for the air treatment chamber.
- the chamber longitudinal axis 218 may be the same as the air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 .
- the air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 may be centrally located within the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 may be a central axis extending through a radial centre of the chamber sidewall 220 .
- the chamber longitudinal axis 218 may extend along a longest dimension of the air treatment chamber 210 , as exemplified.
- the air treatment chamber 210 may include a chamber first end wall 222 (e.g., front end wall) at the chamber first end 214 and a chamber second end wall 224 (e.g., rear end wall) at the chamber second end 216 .
- the end walls may close the ends of the chamber.
- the chamber sidewall 220 may extend between the chamber first end wall 222 to the chamber second end wall 224 .
- the first end wall may be a front end wall and the second end wall may be a rear end wall.
- the first and second end walls may each extend generally vertically and/or transversely when the apparatus upper end 106 is above the apparatus lower end 108 .
- the end walls, or a portion of one or each of the end walls may be openable to, e.g., allow for dirt removal.
- the sidewall or a portion thereof may be openable.
- the chamber first end wall 222 may be pivotally coupled to the chamber sidewall 220 at pivot joint 226 .
- the chamber first end wall 222 may be openable by pivoting the first end wall 222 about a pivot axis 228 of the pivot joint 226 (see, e.g., FIG. 2 ).
- the pivot axis 228 may be generally perpendicular to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 and/or the apparatus vertical axis 112 .
- the inlet conduit 170 may be part of the openable first end 222 , and may be provided on a front face of the air treatment assembly 200 such as on the openable assembly first wall 222 . Alternately the inlet conduit 170 may remain in position while a portion of the first wall 222 below the inlet conduit 170 is opened, e.g., pivoted open. The openable end wall or portion thereof may be latched shut, e.g., by a latch 229 opposite the pivot joint 226 .
- the air treatment inlet 230 includes a chamber inlet opening 234
- the air treatment outlet 232 includes a chamber outlet opening 236 , with the air flow path extending through the chamber inlet opening 234 and the chamber outlet opening 236 .
- the air treatment inlet 230 and/or the air treatment outlet 232 may include more than just an opening.
- the air treatment outlet 232 may include a screen that may be a vortex finder 238 extending into the air treatment chamber, and the air treatment inlet 230 may include a projecting conduit 240 extending into the air treatment chamber 210 .
- Including bodies that extend into the air treatment chamber 210 allows for greater control over air flow within the chamber and/or a more compact construction.
- the air treatment member may have any air inlet and any air outlet known in the art.
- the treatment inlet 230 comprises a projecting conduit 240 into which the outlet end of the inlet conduit 170 may be removably insertable. It will be appreciated that part or all of the air treatment inlet 230 may be positioned exterior or interior of the air treatment member.
- the air treatment inlet 230 may be exterior (e.g., above) the air treatment chamber and a sidewall of the air treatment inlet 230 may have a port that communicates with the air treatment chamber via a port in the sidewall of the air treatment chamber.
- the air treatment inlet 230 may have an outlet end that is within the air treatment chamber. In such a case, the air treatment inlet 230 may be located radially inward of the chamber sidewall 220 .
- the air treatment inlet 230 may extend axially inward of the chamber first end 214 and have an outlet end that is located axially inwardly of the chamber second end 216 , as exemplified. As exemplified, the air treatment inlet 230 may extend axially into the air treatment chamber 210 by an axial projecting length 242 .
- the axial projecting length 242 may be between 10 mm and 100 mm, between 25 mm and 75 mm, or, optionally, between 40 mm and 60 mm.
- the air treatment inlet 230 located radially in the air treatment chamber 210 by a radial projecting distance 244 that is between 0.1 times and 0.5 times the cyclone diameter 246 , between 0.25 times and 0.45 times the cyclone diameter 246 , or, optionally, between 0.3 times and 0.4 times the cyclone diameter 246 .
- the air treatment inlet may be located in the chamber sidewall 220 of the air treatment assembly (i.e., include or consist of an opening through the chamber sidewall 220 ).
- the air treatment inlet 230 may optionally have an axial inner (outlet) end that is closer to the chamber first end 214 than the chamber second end 216 , and may project into the air treatment chamber 210 from the air treatment chamber first end 214 .
- An inlet at the air treatment first end 214 allows for a more compact construction.
- the air treatment inlet 230 may alternatively be located at a rear or midway position of the air treatment assembly 200 , and may be located on the same or the opposite end from the air treatment outlet 232 .
- the exemplary air treatment member 202 is a uniflow cyclone, however it will be appreciated that in other embodiments the air treatment member 202 may be a reverse flow cyclone.
- the air treatment inlet 230 includes an inlet upstream end 250 and an inlet downstream or outlet end 252 .
- the air treatment inlet 230 includes an inlet longitudinal axis 254 extending between the inlet upstream end 250 and the inlet downstream end 252 .
- the inlet upstream end 250 includes an inlet upstream opening 256 through which the air flow path enters the air treatment inlet 230 and the inlet downstream end includes an inlet downstream opening 258 through which the air flow path exits the air treatment inlet 230 and enters the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the air treatment inlet 230 includes an inlet sidewall 260 extending between the inlet upstream end 250 and the inlet downstream end 252 .
- the inlet upstream opening 256 may be an axial opening through which the inlet longitudinal axis 254 extends.
- the air treatment inlet may extend axially to an open downstream end which may be the inlet downstream opening 258 .
- the inlet downstream opening 258 may be a sidewall opening in the inlet sidewall 260 .
- the air treatment assembly 200 includes a dirt collection region 300 .
- the dirt collection region 300 may be external to the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the dirt collection region may be located in a separate dirt collection chamber from the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the separate dirt collection chamber may communicate with the air treatment chamber 210 via a dirt outlet (e.g., an opening in a wall of the air treatment chamber or a gap between walls of the air treatment chamber).
- the dirt collection region 300 may be an area of the air treatment chamber 210 (i.e., is internal to the air treatment chamber 210 ).
- the dirt collection region 300 may include, e.g., a lower portion of the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the dirt collection region 300 may be at the air treatment front end 206 and/or the air treatment rear end 208 .
- the dirt collection region 300 may be axially outward (e.g., forward) of the chamber inlet port 294 and/or axially outward (e.g., rearward) of an air permeable portion of the air treatment outlet 232 .
- the air treatment assembly 200 may include any suitable number of discrete dirt collection regions 300 .
- the air treatment assembly 200 may include separate collection regions for fine dirt and for coarse dirt, or separate dirt outlets to a common dirt collection chamber for fine dirt and for coarse dirt.
- the air treatment chamber 210 and dirt collection region 300 may be of any configuration suitable for separating dirt from an air stream and collecting the separated dirt, respectively.
- the air treatment assembly 200 may include a closure member 310 selectively closing a portion of the air flow path through the air treatment assembly 200 such that air flow therethrough is inhibited.
- the closure member 310 may selectively close the air treatment inlet 230 , such as by closing the chamber inlet opening 234 or fully blocking the air flow path within a conduit of the air treatment inlet 230 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include a closure seat 312 against which the closure member 310 seats when closed (see for example FIG. 7 ).
- the closure member 310 may rest against the closure seat 312 at each point about a perimeter 314 of the closure member 310 .
- the closure seat 312 may face upstream or downstream, and a downstream surface or an upstream surface of the closure member 310 may seat against the closure seat when the closure member 310 is closed.
- the closure member 310 may be received within a conduit in the closed position without seating against a seat, and the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may not include the closure seat 312 (see for example FIGS. 31 and 32 ).
- the closure member 310 includes a sealing material thereon to be sandwiched (e.g., at each point around a perimeter of the closure member 310 ) between the closure member 310 and conduit walls or a closure seat 312 when the closure member 310 is closed.
- the closure member 310 is biased to the closed position (e.g., FIG. 7 ).
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include a closure biasing member 316 (e.g., a spring ora compressible balloon, an embodiment exemplified in FIGS. 36 and 37 ) biasing the closure member to the closed position.
- a closure biasing member 316 e.g., a spring ora compressible balloon, an embodiment exemplified in FIGS. 36 and 37
- the closure member 310 is a generally planar member, as exemplified in FIGS. 36 and 37 .
- the closure member 310 is a curved member.
- the closure member 310 may be operable to close the apparatus air flow path 160 to prevent dirt from traveling up the path towards the apparatus dirty air inlet 162 .
- the closure member 310 may prevent dirt from falling out of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 when the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is not operating (i.e., when the suction motor is not powered up).
- the closure member 310 may be used when the dirt collection region 300 is an internal dirt collection region within the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the closure member 310 may be particularly useful with an internal dirt collection region 300 to prevent dirt from retreating along the air flow path out of the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 also includes an air moving member 320 .
- the apparatus air flow path 160 extends through the air moving member 320 .
- the air moving member 320 is provided to generate vacuum suction through the air flow path 160 .
- the air moving member may include a suction motor and fan assembly 322 , which may be referred to as suction motor 322 .
- the suction motor 322 is contained within a suction motor housing 324 .
- the suction motor housing 324 may form part of the outer surface of the main body housing 122 , or may be internal thereto.
- the suction motor housing 324 may be of any suitable construction, including any of those exemplified herein.
- the suction motor 322 in the illustrated example is positioned downstream from the air treatment member 202 , although it will be appreciated that the suction motor 322 may be positioned upstream of the air treatment member 202 (e.g., a dirty air motor) in alternative embodiments. As exemplified, the motor 322 may be rearward of the cyclone air treatment assembly 200 . The suction motor 322 may be located at the apparatus rear end 104 , and may be located at the apparatus upper end 106 , as exemplified. Air may travel rearwardly from the air treatment assembly 200 to the suction motor 322 , and air flow direction between the air treatment member 202 and the suction motor 322 may have a rearward component at each point along the way.
- the suction motor 322 rotates about a central motor axis of rotation 326 .
- the motor axis of rotation 326 is oriented generally horizontally and extends between the apparatus front end 102 and the apparatus rear end 104 . In other examples, however, the motor axis of rotation 326 may extend at any angle to the horizontal, or it may extend vertically. Accordingly, the suction motor 322 may be oriented in any direction within the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the suction motor axis of rotation 326 may be spaced (e.g., vertically spaced) from the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 , or it may be coaxial therewith as exemplified. As exemplified, the suction motor axis of rotation 326 may intersect the air treatment assembly 200 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include one or more filters, such as a pre-motor filter 330 in the air flow path 160 upstream of the suction motor 322 (e.g., upstream of the motor 322 and downstream of the air treatment assembly 200 ) and/or a post-motor filter 332 in the air flow path 160 downstream of the suction motor 322 .
- the pre-motor filter 330 and the post-motor filter 332 may be formed from any suitable physical, porous filter media and may have any suitable shape, including the examples disclosed herein.
- the pre-motor filter 330 and/or the post-motor filter 332 may be one or more of a foam filter, felt filter, HEPA filter, other physical filter media, electrostatic filter, and the like.
- one or both of the premotor filter 330 and the post motor filter 332 includes a series of screens, and, optionally, each downstream screen of the filter has finer pores than the preceding upstream screen.
- the pre-motor filter 330 may be provided in a pre-motor filter housing 334 .
- the pre-motor filter housing 334 may be of any suitable construction, including any of those exemplified herein.
- the pre-motor filter housing 334 may be operable or accessible to allow the pre-motor filter 330 to be cleaned and/or replaced.
- the suction motor axis of rotation 326 may intersect the pre-motor filter 330 .
- the pre-motor filter 330 may be provided as part of the air treatment assembly 200 and removable therewith.
- the pre-motor filter 330 may be received in a pre-motor filter housing 334 that is built into the air treatment assembly 200 .
- the pre-motor filter 330 may be part of the main body housing 122 (e.g., part of a front end, as exemplified) and not removeable as part of the air treatment assembly 200 .
- the front end of the pre-motor filter may be revealed when the air treatment assembly is removed.
- the pre-motor filter 330 may come in any suitable shape or location, however, as exemplified, the pre-motor filter 330 may have a longest dimension in a longitudinal (horizontal) direction along a pre-motor filter longitudinal axis 336 .
- the pre-motor filter may be a donut filter, with a cylindrical body of filtration material surrounding a central cavity, as illustrated.
- the donut filter may be arranged with the central cavity extending generally horizontally, with an upstream end closed by a filter end cap 338 and the downstream end open (e.g., into the suction motor housing 324 , as exemplified).
- the pre-motor filter longitudinal axis 336 may be generally parallel to and/or coaxial with the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 , the air treatment longitudinal axis 204 , the motor axis of rotation 326 , and/or the inlet conduit longitudinal axis 176 .
- the donut filter may be cylindrical or frusto-conical in shape.
- the post-motor filter 332 may be provided in a post-motor filter housing 340 .
- the post-motor filter housing 340 may form part of the outer surface of the main body housing 122 .
- the post-motor filter housing 340 may be of any suitable construction, including any of those exemplified herein.
- the post-motor filter housing 340 may be openable or accessible to allow the post-motor filter 332 to be cleaned and/or replaced.
- the post-motor filter 332 may be located radially outwards of the suction motor 322 , as exemplified.
- the post-motor filter 332 may be sandwiched between the suction motor housing 324 and the chamber sidewall 220 .
- power may be supplied to the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., to components or elements such as the suction motor 322 ) from an on-board energy storage member 350 (e.g., one or more capacitors or batteries).
- the on-board energy storage member 350 may be a battery or a plurality of batteries.
- the on-board energy storage member 350 may be provided in a pack (e.g., a removeable pack).
- the pack may be a battery pack.
- the energy storage member 350 is provided at a base of the handle 124 .
- the energy storage member 350 may be provided at a lower end 352 of a pistol grip handle 124 .
- the energy storage member 350 is opposite the motor 322 across the handle 124 .
- the handle longitudinal axis 128 may extend through each of the motor 322 and the energy storage member 350 .
- the on-board energy storage member and/or pack may be provided at any configuration and/or location in the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may alternatively or additionally include a power cord to supply power to the components of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., the motor 322 ) directly, and/or to supply power to the on-board energy storage member 350 (e.g., a capacitor or battery) to supply power to powered components (e.g., the suction motor 322 ).
- a power cord to supply power to the components of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., the motor 322 ) directly, and/or to supply power to the on-board energy storage member 350 (e.g., a capacitor or battery) to supply power to powered components (e.g., the suction motor 322 ).
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 includes a user interface 360 .
- the user interface 360 may be communicatively coupled to a control system 370 of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the control system 370 may include one or more onboard processors communicatively coupled to one or more on board data storage systems storing instructions.
- the instructions include routines or schedules for operating the surface cleaning apparatus 100 , and may include routines or schedules for operating the surface cleaning apparatus 100 in response to input.
- the input may be user input (e.g., via the user interface 360 ), such as turning the apparatus on or off or selecting an operational mode.
- the input may be from one or more components of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 , such as from an on-board sensor.
- the surface cleaning apparatus may include one or more sensors. It will be appreciated that any suitable sensor may be included, including any of the sensors described herein.
- the control system 370 e.g., the one or more processors
- the control system 370 may be communicatively coupled to the user interface to receive user input and/or provide information.
- the user interface 360 provides information to the user and/or includes at least one control operable by the user (e.g., an on/off control, which may be a button or touch sensitive area of the user interface).
- the user interface 360 may provide information about at least one operating mode of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., information about which mode is active).
- the user interface 360 may provide information about a charge level of an energy storage member 350 .
- the user interface may include at least one interface toggle 362 .
- the interface toggle 362 may be referred to as a control of the surface cleaning apparatus.
- the interface toggle 362 may be a soft toggle (e.g., a touch sensitive area of the touchscreen) or a physically moveable toggle such as a slider, a pivoting switch, or a depressible button.
- the user interface may include an information display 364 , such as a touchscreen, a display screen, or an illuminable icon.
- control system 370 may be communicatively coupled to one or more powered component of the surface cleaning apparatus to control operations thereof (e.g., to activate, deactivate, and/or change a setting such as a mode thereof).
- a powered component may be, e.g., a powered valve, a powered actuator, or a powered interface (e.g., a display screen, a touchscreen or illuminated icon), such as any of the powered components described subsequently herein.
- a powered component may be coupled to a power supply of the surface cleaning apparatus, such as a power supply member or a power cord, to receive power therefrom.
- a powered actuator may be, e.g., a solenoid or another electromechanical actuator such as a linear actuator or a motor which may be provided for any use described subsequently herein. It will be appreciated that in some embodiments a powered actuator may be independent from the control system 370 , such as a powered actuator that is controlled by a simple circuit.
- a simple circuit may not include a processor or a data storage device, such as a circuit with a toggle (e.g., a switch, slider or button) that closes the circuit when activated and breaks the circuit when deactivated.
- the surface cleaning apparatus may include one or more actuators that is unpowered or that may be realized by a powered component or an unpowered component as described subsequently herein.
- An unpowered actuator may be, e.g., an aneroid capsule or piston. It will be appreciated that an actuator as described herein may be powered or unpowered, unless otherwise specified.
- An actuator may include a mechanical coupling to a moveable member which the actuator is provided to move.
- An actuator may be a linear actuator.
- An actuator may be a dedicated actuator provided to move only one movable member, or may be a common actuator operable to move more than one movable member (e.g., at the same time, or separately as directed by the control system 370 ).
- the user interface 360 may provide information about at least one operating mode of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the user interface 360 may include a button that a user may press to toggle between, e.g., operational states of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the user may toggle between a floor cleaning mode in which the suction motor 322 is provided with a first power level and an above floor cleaning mode in which the suction motor 322 is provided with a second power level that is higher than the first power level (i.e., to rotate the fan faster).
- the user interface 360 may provide information about a charge level of the energy storage member 350 .
- the user interface 360 may be provided at any suitable location on the surface cleaning apparatus 100 , and may be any suitable user interface.
- the user interface 360 is provided on the handle and/or an upper surface of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 for ease of access or visibility, as discussed further elsewhere herein.
- an electrical connector 380 may be provided at the front end 102 to provide electricity to an attachment (e.g., the floor cleaning head) from the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., from an optional on-board energy storage member 350 ).
- the electrical connector 380 may be provided adjacent the dirty air inlet 162 (e.g., to be contacted by an electrical connector of the attachment adjacent the air outlet of the attachment).
- the electrical connector 380 may be directly beside (e.g., above) the dirty air inlet 162 .
- the electrical connector 380 may be close enough to the inlet 162 to be mated to an electrical connector mounted on a wand that is joined to the inlet 162 .
- the electrical connector may be within 10 cm, 5 cm, or 3 cm of the inlet 162 .
- the portion of the external conduit 140 (e.g., the wand) which is connected to (e.g., inserted into) the nozzle 180 (e.g., into the air treatment inlet 230 and/or the inlet conduit 170 ) includes an external conduit electrical connector 380 that is also inserted into the nozzle.
- the external conduit electrical connector 380 may be on an exterior surface of the sidewall of the external conduit 140 , as exemplified.
- the external conduit electrical connector is also an alignment member.
- the external conduit electrical connector 380 is at the end of the external conduit 140 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may, optionally, be docked with a docking station 390 .
- the docking station 390 may evacuate and/or charge the surface cleaning apparatus 100 when the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is docked.
- the docking station 390 may include an evacuation air flow passage 392 between an evacuation air inlet 394 and an evacuation air outlet 396 .
- An evacuation air treatment assembly 398 is provided in the evacuation air flow passage 392 to separate dirt.
- the docking station 390 may include an evacuation air moving member 400 in the air flow path 160 . It will be appreciated that in some embodiments, as exemplified in FIGS. 67 and 68 , the docking station 390 may not include an air moving member, with air movement through the air flow path 160 driven by an external air moving member, such as the motor 322 of a docked surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the docking station 390 may be used to evacuate the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- an evacuation air flow path 392 may extend through the docking station 390 and the docked surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the evacuation air flow path 392 extends from an evacuation dirty air inlet 394 to an evacuation clean air outlet 396 .
- the evacuation dirty air inlet 394 may be provided at any suitable location of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 or the docking station 390 .
- the evacuation clean air outlet 396 may be provided at any suitable location of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 or the docking station 390 .
- the evacuation air flow path 392 may include a portion of the apparatus air flow path 160 .
- the evacuation air flow path 392 does not include all of the apparatus air flow path 160 .
- the evacuation air flow path 392 may not include the dirty air inlet 162 and/or clean air outlet 164 .
- one or more valves may close off a portion of the apparatus air flow path 160 and/or open a portion of the evacuation air flow path 392 , and may be moved manually, in response to a user input or automatically in response to the surface cleaning apparatus being docked.
- the air moving member 400 is configured to move air from the surface cleaning apparatus 100 into the docking station upstream of at least one docking station air treatment member 202 through an evacuation opening 410 in the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the evacuation opening 410 may be a selectively closeable opening, such that the evacuation opening 410 may be closed when the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is not docked.
- the evacuation opening 410 may not be closeable, for example the evacuation opening may include the dirty air inlet of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 and may include the air treatment inlet 230 (i.e., air moves out the dirty air inlet 162 through the evacuation air flow path 392 during an evacuation operation).
- a selectively openable evacuation opening 410 may be opened in any suitable way, including manually or automatically.
- the evacuation opening 410 may be any suitable opening, and may be part of the chamber first end 214 .
- the evacuation opening 410 may include or consist of the air treatment inlet 230 and the dirty air inlet 162 , which may be selectively closed by, e.g., the closure member 310 (see for example FIG. 49 ).
- part or all of the front wall of the air treatment assembly e.g., the portion below the inlet conduit 170
- the evacuation opening 410 may alternately be a selectively closeable aperture through a sidewall of the air treatment assembly 200 (e.g., the chamber sidewall 220 ) or through an end wall of the air treatment assembly 200 .
- the evacuation opening may be a gap between walls when the walls are moved apart.
- the evacuation opening may be closed by a moveable flap or panel.
- the evacuation opening may be opened and/or closed by rotational or translational movement of a member which selectively closes the evacuation opening. It will be appreciated that the location and size of the evacuation opening 410 may be selected based on the configuration of the docking station 390 .
- Dirt may be carried out of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 and into the docking station 390 through the evacuation opening when the evacuation opening is open. Dirt may be inhibited from moving through the evacuation opening when the evacuation opening is closed, such as by a moveable door.
- the docking station 390 optionally provides a charge to the surface cleaning apparatus 100 to, e.g., charge an onboard energy storage member 350 .
- the docking station 390 provides a charge to the surface cleaning apparatus 100 without being configured to evacuate the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., without including an air flow path or treatment member to receive dirt).
- the docking station 390 may include a cord to be plugged into, e.g., a residential outlet, to supply electrical power to the docking station 390 , to be supplied to the surface cleaning apparatus 100 and/or to an onboard component such as the motor 322 .
- any suitable docking station 390 may be used, or the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may be used and provided without a docking station 390 .
- a rib arrestor 420 provided in the air treatment assembly 200 , which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- the air treatment assembly 200 includes a rib 420 extending into a chamber of the assembly 200 from a wall of the chamber.
- the rib 420 interrupts air flow (cyclonic air flow if the chamber is a cyclone chamber) and encourages dirt accumulation adjacent the rib 420 .
- the rib 420 may be at one of the ends of the chamber, and optionally at an end at which an air outlet of the chamber is located. Accordingly, the rib may create an area at the air outlet end of the air treatment chamber which has diminished or minimal or no air circulation and, accordingly, dirt, e.g., finer dirt, may be accumulated therein.
- the air treatment outlet 232 may comprise an outlet air permeable portion 422 and a downstream outlet air impermeable portion 424 through which the apparatus air flow path 160 extends.
- the outlet air permeable portion 422 may be an outlet porous portion comprising an outlet porous material 426 , e.g., a screen.
- the air treatment outlet 232 may include a central open region through which the air treatment longitudinal axis 218 extends, with a screen or other outlet porous material 426 through which the apparatus air flow path 160 passes.
- the outlet air impermeable portion 424 and the outlet porous portion 422 are parts of a vortex finder 238 of a cyclone.
- the air treatment outlet 232 includes the vortex finder 238 , and may consist of the vortex finder 238 .
- the outlet air impermeable portion 424 may be a conduit having an air impermeable sidewall extending between inlet and outlet ends, such as a linear cylindrical conduit as exemplified.
- the outlet porous portion 422 has an axially inward end 430 and an opposite axially outward end 432 .
- the axially outward end 432 is located at the inner end 434 of the outlet air impermeable portion 424 .
- the outlet air impermeable portion 424 extends between the inner end 434 and an outward end 436 .
- the outlet porous portion 422 may extend further inwardly into the air treatment chamber 210 fro the inner end 434 of the outlet air impermeable portion 424 .
- the air impermeable portion 424 may include, or consist of, an annular portion of the vortex finder 238 .
- the air impermeable portion 424 may include an annular strip extending a predetermined axial length along the longitudinal axis 218 , and the strip may have a generally constant axial length around the circumference.
- the axial length of the strip of the impermeable portion 242 may be between 1 mm and 10 mm, 2 mm and 8 mm, or about 5 mm.
- the air impermeable portion may include a projecting portion 425 ( FIG. 11 ) extending further axially than the remainder.
- the projecting portion may comprise ribs that assist in maintaining the shape of the screen during use.
- the rib 420 may extend co-extensively (i.e., with respect to the cyclone axis 218 ) along at least a portion of, and optionally all of, the air treatment chamber 210 in which the outlet air impermeable portion 424 of the air treatment outlet 232 is provided.
- the rib 420 and outlet air impermeable portion 424 may extend into the air treatment chamber 210 from a common wall.
- both the outlet air impermeable portion 424 and the rib 420 extend into the air treatment chamber 210 from the treatment chamber second end 216 (e.g., a rear end, and may extend from the treatment chamber second end wall 224 ).
- the rib 420 and outlet air impermeable portion 424 together form a dead zone 440 between the rib and the air impermeable portion.
- the dead zone 440 is at the treatment chamber second end 216 .
- the rib 420 may extend further into the air treatment chamber 210 along the air treatment longitudinal axis 218 than the impermeable portion, or the impermeable portion may extend further into the air treatment chamber 210 along the air treatment longitudinal axis 218 than the rib, or the rib 420 and outlet air impermeable portion 424 may extend equally far into the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the rib 420 extends into the air treatment chamber only coextensively with the outlet air impermeable portion 424 , and not with the outlet permeable portion 422 .
- the forward end of the rib is located at or rearward of the porous portion 422 and accordingly, the rib 420 may extend into the air treatment chamber 210 to a distance equal to or less than the outlet air impermeable portion 424 . Keeping the rib 420 from extending coextensively with the outlet air permeable portion 422 may reduce the obstruction of airflow into the permeable portion.
- the rib 420 may extend inwardly, e.g., axially inwardly, into the air treatment chamber 210 from an end wall 224 of the air treatment chamber.
- the rib may be provided in any suitable location.
- the rib may have a rear side that terminates prior to the end wall 224 .
- the rib could extend rearward from the front end of the air impermeable portion 424 or rearward from a location rearward of the air impermeable portion 424 and may terminate at or forward of the rear wall 224 .
- the rib 420 extends into the air treatment chamber 210 from the air treatment chamber rear wall 224 .
- the rib 420 may also extend inwardly, e.g., radially inwardly, from a sidewall 220 of the air treatment chamber and/or the air impermeable portion 424 . As exemplified, the rib 420 extends into the air treatment chamber 210 from the cyclone sidewall 220 .
- the rib 420 is positioned between the air treatment outlet 232 and the cyclone sidewall 220 . Accordingly, the rib 420 is radially outward from the outlet air impermeable portion 424 .
- the rib may have a radial width equal to the distance from the impermeable portion 424 to the sidewall 220 or a distance that is smaller. Accordingly, the radial inner side of the rib may terminate prior to the impermeable portion 424 and/or the radial outer side of the rib 420 may terminate prior to the sidewall 220 .
- the impermeable portion 242 faces the rib 420 .
- the impermeable portion 244 may extends circumferentially at least 10°, at least 20°, or at least 30° from the location of the rib 420 .
- the impermeable portion 244 may lead the rib 420 (i.e., begins upstream of the rib) in a direction of cyclonic flow within the chamber by at least 1°, at least 2°, or at least 5°.
- the rear end of the air treatment chamber 210 is located at the end wall on which the air treatment outlet 232 (vortex finder 238 ) is provided.
- This allows the pre-motor filter 330 to have a larger size in a direction transverse to the longitudinal axis (e.g., a larger diameter) than if the air treatment chamber 210 extended to a position rearward of the front end of the pre-motor filter 330 , which allows for the axial length of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 to be shortened.
- the rear end of the air treatment chamber 210 may be rearward of the rear end of the vortex finder, in which case, the rear end of the rib 420 may extend rearward of the vortex finder to or towards the rear end of the air treatment chamber.
- the rib 420 may extend in a generally axial direction.
- the rib 420 may be a planar body extending in a plane that is generally parallel to the air treatment longitudinal axis 218 (e.g., the cyclone axis of rotation).
- the rib 420 extends to a rib axially inner end 442 .
- the rib axially inner end 442 may be closer to the front end of the air treatment chamber 210 than the opposite end of the rib 420 .
- the rib axially inner end 442 is curved.
- the curved end extends further into the air treatment chamber 210 on a radially outer side 444 of the rib 420 than on a radially inner side 446 of the rib 20 .
- the rib axially inner end 442 may include a rounded curve between a radially inner side 446 and an axially innermost edge 448 .
- the rib 420 has an axial length 450 of 4 mm to 50 mm, 8 mm to 25 mm, or, optionally, 12 mm to 18 mm.
- the outlet air impermeable portion 424 may have an axial length 452 of 0 mm to 50 mm, 0 mm to 25 mm, or, optionally, 0 mm to 15 mm.
- the rib 420 has a radial height 454 that is equal to or a fraction of the radial distance 456 between the outlet air impermeable portion 424 and the chamber sidewall 220 .
- the rib 420 may have a height 454 of 0.1 to 1 times the radial distance 456 , 0.25 time to 0.75 times the radial distance 456 , or, preferably, 0.4 times to 0.6 times the radial distance 456 .
- the rib 420 may be provided in any suitable shape and size.
- the assembly 200 may include one or more ribs. Where the assembly 200 includes a plurality of discrete ribs, the ribs may be angularly spaced apart about the cyclone axis of rotation 218 . Additionally. or alternatively, the ribs may be angularly spaced apart about the air treatment outlet 232 .
- the ribs 420 may be evenly spaced apart, may be of the same or different sizes and may be provided on the same or different walls.
- air inlet with a side opening that may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- the air inlet 230 of an air treatment chamber which may be a cyclone chamber, has a side opening.
- the air inlet may comprise an axial extending conduit, such as inlet conduit 170 which has an opening in the axial extending sidewall thereof.
- the external conduit when provided, may have a downstream end that terminates forward of (upstream of) the sidewall opening.
- the side opening 474 , 476 may be in external conduit sidewall 146 (see, e.g., FIG. 17 ).
- the sidewall opening may open onto the air treatment chamber (e.g., there may be no internal conduit 170 or the internal conduit 170 may terminate forward of or upstream of the downstream end of the portion of the external conduit 140 with the sidewall opening). It will be appreciated that if an inlet conduit 170 with a sidewall opening is also provided with a sidewall opening of the external conduit sidewall 146 , then the sidewall opening of the external conduit sidewall 146 and the sidewall opening of the inlet conduit 170 are preferable aligned during use of the surface cleaning apparatus.
- the external conduit 140 may have an inlet end wall 262 at a downstream end thereof. Such an end wall may close of the downstream end of the external conduit such that the sidewall opening(s) are the only air outlet. In such a case, the inlet end wall 262 may provide rigidity to the downstream end of the external conduit.
- part of the sidewall opening may comprise an air permeable section 460 (e.g., mesh may be provided to cover part of the sidewall opening).
- an air permeable section 460 e.g., mesh may be provided to cover part of the sidewall opening.
- two sidewall openings may be provided, which may be on opposed sides of the air flow conduit. In such a case, one of the sidewall openings may be provided with an air permeable section 460 .
- part or all of the sidewall opening may comprise an air permeable section 460 .
- One or more air permeable sections 460 may be provided upstream of the inlet downstream opening 258 in a sidewall of the inlet conduit 170 .
- the air permeable section 460 may extend to the downstream end of the air flow conduit (e.g., inlet end wall 262 if the air flow conduit has a closed downstream end) or may terminate upstream thereof.
- the inlet downstream end 252 may include an inlet end wall 262 .
- the inlet sidewall 260 may extend along part or all of the inlet longitudinal axis and may optionally extend forwardly from the end wall 262 .
- the inlet end wall 262 may extend across the inlet longitudinal axis 254 and may close off the downstream end of the inlet sidewall 260 .
- the inlet end wall 262 may optionally be planar, and may optionally extend generally perpendicular to the inlet longitudinal axis 254 .
- the inlet end wall 262 may be removeable from the inlet sidewall in some embodiments.
- the inlet upstream opening 256 may include or consist of the chamber inlet opening 234 (i.e., the upstream end of the conduit leading to the sidewall opening or provided at the upstream end of the sidewall opening) and the inlet downstream opening 258 may include or consist of an opening (e.g., a sidewall opening) in a projecting conduit sidewall 248 of the projecting conduit 240 .
- the inlet sidewall 260 may include or consist of the projecting conduit sidewall 248
- the inlet end wall 262 may include or consist of a projecting conduit end wall 264 of the projecting conduit.
- the air treatment inlet 230 includes the external conduit 140 that is removably received in the projecting conduit 240 , and the diameter of the inlet upstream opening 256 is limited by the inner diameter of the external conduit 140 , while the inlet downstream opening is limited by the overlapping portions of downstream openings 474 , 476 in the external conduit 140 and the projecting conduit 240 .
- the inlet sidewall 260 may include the projecting conduit sidewall 248 and/or the external conduit sidewall 146
- the inlet end wall 262 may include the projecting conduit end wall 264 and/or an external conduit end wall 270 .
- the external conduit end wall 270 may be a removeable end wall or cap, although it will be appreciated that if the external conduit 140 is received in the projecting conduit 240 and the projecting conduit 240 includes the projecting conduit end wall 264 , the external conduit 140 may not require an end wall or end cap to direct airflow through sidewall openings and may not include an end wall or end cap closing the end of the external conduit sidewall 146 . However, the end cap 270 may provide greater structural strength to the downstream end of the external conduit 140 .
- the external conduit 140 is made of metal.
- the external conduit 140 is a thin-walled conduit.
- the external conduit sidewall 146 may be a thin wall formed of metal.
- the external conduit end cap 270 may support the end of the external conduit 140 in embodiments in which one or more openings 474 , 476 are formed in the sidewall, particularly where the openings extend to the downstream end of the external conduit sidewall 146 .
- inlet end wall 262 and/or inlet sidewall 260 may include an alternative member, such as a further body received within the external conduit 140 and/or the projecting conduit 240 , such as a moveable inlet member 280 as discussed further elsewhere herein.
- the projecting conduit 240 extends between a projecting conduit inlet end 266 and a projecting conduit outlet end 268 .
- the chamber inlet opening 234 is at the projecting conduit inlet end 266 .
- the chamber inlet opening 234 may be an opening in a chamber end wall, such as the chamber first end wall 222 as exemplified.
- the projecting conduit 240 also includes a projecting conduit outlet opening 282 at the projecting conduit outlet end 268 .
- the air treatment inlet 230 may be a hooked inlet. As exemplified. the projecting conduit inlet opening 284 and the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 may extend in non-parallel planes to change the direction of air flow along the apparatus air flow path 160 .
- the air treatment inlet 230 may also be a tangential inlet for a cyclone.
- the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 may extend generally parallel to the air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 (e.g., a cyclone axis).
- the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 may extend in a plane that is generally parallel to the air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 .
- the air treatment inlet 230 has an effective air inlet length 290 , the effective air inlet length 290 being the axial length of the inlet downstream opening 258 . As exemplified, this may be the axial length of the projection conduit outlet opening 282 where the protection conduit outlet opening 282 defines the inlet downstream opening 258 .
- the effective air inlet length 290 may be between 10 mm and 100 mm, between 25 mm and 75 mm, or optionally, between 40 mm and 60 mm.
- the effective air inlet length 290 may be generally equal to the projecting length 242 when the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 extends the length of the projecting conduit, as exemplified in FIG. 6 .
- the air treatment chamber 210 may have a chamber axial length 292 that is between 1.5 times and 10 times the effective air inlet length 290 , between 2.5 times and 6 times the effective air inlet length 290 , or, optionally, between 3 times and 4 times the effective air inlet length 290 .
- the ratio between the effective air inlet length 290 and the chamber axial length 292 affects the number of turns that air is subject to as it passes through the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the ratio is selected to provide at least 2, 2.5, 3 or more turns.
- the ratio between the effective air inlet length 290 and the chamber axial length 292 may be variable.
- the projecting conduit 240 may be a generally linear conduit with a projecting conduit longitudinal axis extending between the inlet and outlet ends.
- the projecting conduit 240 includes a projecting conduit sidewall 248 extending between the inlet and outlet ends.
- the projecting conduit 240 may include or consist of the inlet conduit outlet end 174 .
- the air treatment inlet 230 may include a downstream portion of the inlet conduit 170 .
- the downstream portion of the inlet conduit 170 may form the projecting conduit 240 , as exemplified.
- the inlet conduit 170 may extend into the air treatment assembly 200 .
- the inlet conduit 170 may extend into the air treatment chamber 210 of the air treatment assembly 200 .
- the air treatment inlet 230 (e.g., the downstream end of the inlet conduit 170 ) extends into the air treatment chamber 210 from an end thereof and along (e.g., against) the chamber sidewall 220 , as exemplified.
- the inlet conduit 170 includes an inlet conduit sidewall 178 extending between the inlet conduit upstream end 172 and the inlet conduit downstream end 174 .
- the projecting conduit sidewall 248 may form an outlet end portion of the inlet conduit sidewall 178 .
- the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 is provided at the inlet conduit downstream end 174 .
- the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 may be a port opening into the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 may be an unobstructed opening (e.g., not covered by a screen or other porous member).
- the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 may be located at a chamber inlet port 294 of the air treatment chamber 210 .
- an air treatment chamber air inlet 230 may include an air permeable section 460
- an air treatment chamber air inlet 230 includes an air permeable section 460 in addition to the inlet downstream opening 258 .
- the bulk of air is directed through the inlet downstream opening 258 , which is open and does not have a mesh material or the like and which may be referred to as the primary opening.
- a lesser volume of air is allowed to pass through the air permeable section 460 , e.g., from the air treatment inlet 230 into the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the inlet downstream opening 258 and the air permeable section 460 provide parallel routes.
- the air permeable section 460 may comprise or consist of an opening 462 through the inlet sidewall 260 with a barrier 464 to reduce airflow therethrough.
- the barrier 464 is permeable to air (i.e., porous) thereby essentially partially closing the opening 462 while permitting air flow therethrough.
- the barrier 464 may encourage air flow through the inlet downstream opening 258 .
- the air permeable section 460 is a porous section.
- the air permeable section 460 includes a porous material 464 closing the opening 462 in the inlet sidewall 260 .
- the porous material 464 is a mesh material.
- the mesh material may have a pore size of 20 mesh to 200 mesh, 40 mesh to 160 mesh, or, optionally, 80 mesh to 120 mesh.
- the porous material 464 may be any suitable porous material, such as foam or felt or a perforated wall.
- the air permeable section 460 and the inlet downstream opening 258 each open into the free volume 470 of the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the air Upon exiting either of the air permeable section 460 or the inlet downstream opening 258 , the air enters the free volume 470 of the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the air permeable section 460 forms a secondary pathway between the air treatment inlet 230 and the air treatment chamber 210 . This secondary pathway results in a reduction of the power required for the motor 322 to produce a given air flow rate.
- this secondary pathway results in a reduction in the power requirement of between 0.5 Watts and 10 Watts, 1 Watt and 6 Watts, or 2 Watts and 4 Watts.
- the air treatment chamber air inlet 230 includes the projecting conduit 240 with the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 opening to the chamber inlet port 294 and a secondary opening 472 through which air may pass, and the inlet air permeable section 460 may include or consist of the secondary opening 472 .
- the secondary opening 472 may be an opening in the projection conduit sidewall 248 .
- the secondary opening may have the same axial length as the outlet opening 282 or it may be longer or shorter. Alternately, or in addition, the secondary opening may be opposed to the outlet opening or it may be axially spaced from the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 by, e.g., a portion of the projecting conduit sidewall 248 .
- the air treatment chamber air inlet 230 may include the external conduit 140 . It will be appreciated that air treatment chamber air inlet 230 may include the external conduit 140 without an integral projection conduit 240 , or, as exemplified, may include both the projection conduit 240 and the external conduit 140 .
- the inlet downstream opening 258 may be formed by overlapping openings of the external conduit 140 and the projecting conduit 240 .
- the inlet air permeable portion may be formed by the overlapping openings of the external conduit 140 and the projecting conduit 240 .
- the projection conduit 240 may include the projection conduit outlet opening 282 and the separate secondary opening 472
- the external conduit 140 may include a first downstream opening 474 and a second downstream opening 476 separate from the first downstream opening 474 separated by a portion of the external conduit sidewall 146 .
- the first downstream opening 474 and the second downstream opening 476 of the external conduit 140 may be openings in the external conduit sidewall 146 , as exemplified.
- the air treatment inlet 230 may include the projection conduit 240 with the external conduit 140 received in the projection conduit 240 with the first downstream opening 474 aligned with the projection conduit outlet opening 282 and the second downstream opening 476 aligned with the secondary opening 472 .
- the porous material 464 may be included in only one of the multiple members.
- the porous material 464 may extend across the second downstream opening 476 while the secondary opening 472 is unobstructed.
- the air permeable section 460 is opposed to the inlet downstream opening 258 across an interior passage of the air treatment inlet 230 .
- the air permeable section 460 may include a portion that is opposite (i.e., directly across from) the inlet downstream opening 258 , as exemplified.
- the air permeable section 460 and/or the inlet downstream opening 258 may be provided upstream of the inlet end wall 262 .
- the air permeable section 460 and/or the inlet downstream opening 258 is downstream of a wand or auxiliary cleaning tool.
- the air permeable section 460 and/or the inlet downstream opening 258 have downstream ends that are located at the inlet end wall 262 (e.g., abutting the end wall).
- the air permeable section 460 and/or the inlet downstream opening 258 may be provided at any suitable location opening into the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the external conduit 140 and the projecting conduit 240 may each include an alignment member.
- the alignment members are provided to assist a user in inserting the external conduit 140 into the projecting conduit 240 in an appropriate orientation.
- the alignment members 480 , 482 are arranged to prevent the external conduit 140 from being inserted if misaligned.
- the projecting conduit alignment member 480 and the external conduit alignment member 482 may be coupled when the external conduit 140 is received in the projecting conduit 240 in a suitable position in which at least one opening of the external conduit 140 is aligned with at least one opening in the projecting conduit 240 to allow airflow therethrough.
- one of the projecting conduit alignment member 480 and the external conduit alignment member 482 is a male member and the other is a corresponding female member.
- the male member may be a radial projection (e.g., a key), and the female member may be a corresponding channel.
- the alignment members may be electrical connectors.
- the projecting conduit alignment member 480 may be a female electrical connector, and the external conduit alignment member 482 may be a male electrical connector.
- an inlet downstream opening 258 having a variable cross sectional area which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- the inlet downstream opening 258 of the air treatment inlet 230 has a variable cross sectional area.
- the inlet downstream opening 258 has a cross sectional area that is variable between a first cross sectional area and a second cross sectional area that is less than the first cross sectional area.
- the size of the cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 may be varied to change the separation characteristics of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 , such as to change backpressure or to change the ratio between the effective air inlet length 290 and the chamber axial length 292 .
- the ratio between the effective air inlet length 290 and the chamber axial length 292 affects the number of turns that air passing through the cyclone chamber is subject to, and so affects the efficiency of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the first cross sectional area may have a first effective air inlet length and the second cross sectional area may have a second effective air inlet length that is less than the first effective air inlet length.
- Air flowing through a cyclone may have a greater number of turns in the cyclone chamber 210 when the inlet downstream opening 258 has the second, shorter effective air inlet length rather than the first effective air inlet length.
- the air treatment inlet 230 is reconfigured by moving a moveable inlet member 280 of the air treatment inlet 230 to adjust the size of the cross sectional area (e.g., axial length) of the inlet downstream opening 258 .
- the cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 may vary as the moveable inlet member 280 moves.
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be moveable between a first member position in which the inlet downstream opening 258 has a first cross sectional area and a second member position in which the inlet downstream opening 258 has a second cross sectional area that is less than the first cross sectional area.
- the moving member 280 may be any suitable member.
- the air treatment inlet 230 includes one conduit (e.g., external conduit 140 ) received within another (e.g., inlet conduit 170 ) with the inlet downstream opening 258 formed by overlapping sidewall openings of the conduits
- one conduit may be the moveable inlet member 280 and may be adjusted within the other to change the size (e.g., axial length) of the inlet downstream opening 258 .
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be a blocking member receivable within a conduit of the air treatment inlet 230 .
- the blocking member blocks off a portion of the conduit to force the air flow path 160 out of a sidewall outlet of a conduit upstream of the blocking member.
- the blocking member may be an end wall 262 , 270 .
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be or include the closure member 310 , or the closure member 310 may include the moveable inlet member 280 .
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be moveable from a first member position to a second member position. In the first position, the moveable inlet member 280 may block or partially block the downstream end of a conduit and in the second position, the moveable inlet member 280 may open or partially open the downstream end of a conduit. Accordingly, adjusting the position of the moveable inlet member 280 may adjust the amount of air exiting axially out of the downstream end of a conduit and the amount exiting through a sidewall opening of a conduit. Alternately, the first position may be upstream of the second position whereby, as the moveable inlet member 280 is moved from a second downstream position to a first upstream position, the length of a sidewall outlet is shortened.
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be moveable in any suitable way.
- the movable member 280 may be moveable between a position in an air inlet conduit of the air treatment chamber and a position removed therefore.
- the moveable member may move about a pivot axis or along a liner path (e.g., a radial path with respect to the air treatment member longitudinal axis) between a position received in the projecting conduit 240 and/or the external conduit 140 and a position removed from within the projecting conduit 240 and/or the external conduit 140 .
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be axially moveable parallel to the air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 and/or the inlet conduit axis 174 .
- the moveable inlet member 280 is moveable to a position at which it blocks off a portion of a sidewall opening that would otherwise be available to the air flow path 160 and may therefore be referred to as a blocking member.
- the moveable inlet member 280 may form a terminal end 490 of the air treatment inlet 230 or of the external conduit 140 or of any conduit in which it is provided.
- the inlet downstream opening 258 may extend to the moveable inlet member 280 when the moveable inlet member 280 is in it downstream position (see FIG. 22 ). In this position, the moveable inlet member 280 forms an end wall of the air treatment inlet 230 at the outlet end thereof, and extends transverse to a flow direction of air through the upstream portion of the air treatment inlet 230 . As the moveable inlet member 280 moves to its upstream position, the length of the inlet downstream opening 258 is shortened whereby the effective air inlet length 290 of the inlet downstream opening 258 is varied.
- the moveable inlet member may be part of the air treatment assembly and may be slideable receivable in the external conduit 140 when the external conduit 140 is inserted into the dirty air inlet. Accordingly, when the external conduit 140 is inserted into the dirty air inlet and the moveable member is at its axially inner (rearward) position, the moveable inlet member 280 may extend across the downstream end of the external conduit 140 to close off an internal passage of the external conduit 140 through which the air flow path 160 extends, effectively forming an end wall thereof. Alternately, the moveable inlet member 280 may be a moveable inlet end wall 262 of the external conduit 140 (e.g., a wand).
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be part of the external conduit end cap 270 of the external conduit. As such, it may be removable with the external conduit from the surface cleaning apparatus. Alternately, if the external conduit 140 does not extend into the surface cleaning apparatus to the upstream (forward) position of the moveable member 280 , then the moveable member may move withing the inlet conduit 170 .
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be received within the projecting conduit 240 .
- the moveable inlet member 280 may extend across the projecting conduit 240 to close off an internal passage of the projecting conduit 240 or a portion thereof through which the air flow path 160 extends. Accordingly, the moveable inlet member 280 may direct air that is traveling through the air flow path 160 to exit the projecting conduit 240 through a sidewall outlet that is located upstream of the moveable inlet member 280 .
- the moveable inlet member 280 may move along a moveable member track 492 .
- the track 492 may be or include, e.g., a rail.
- the moveable member track 492 may extend axially (i.e., parallel to the air treatment longitudinal axis 218 ).
- the moveable member track 492 may be fixed to, or built into, the chamber sidewall 220 , and may optionally extend only within the air treatment inlet 230 .
- the moveable member track 492 may be a linear rail, which may be provided in the inner side of the sidewall.
- the cross sectional area may be changed automatically or manually, or the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may be configured such that both automatic and manual options are available.
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be moved manually and/or automatically.
- the moveable member may be moved by a manually moved mechanical link, air pressure or suction caused by the suction motor, and/or a further motor or a solenoid that is provided in addition to the suction motor, including any of the mechanisms described herein.
- the moveable inlet member 280 may move in response to pressure changes within the surface cleaning apparatus 100 , such as within the air treatment inlet 230 and/or the free volume 470 of the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the moveable inlet member 280 moves to keep the pressure at a constant level. For example, if air pressure drops (due to dirt accumulating on a pre-motor filter or the screen of the vortex finder in a cyclone chamber), then the movable member 280 may move to increase the cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 thereby reducing the back pressure through the opening 258 and offsetting or partially offsetting the air pressure drop. This may assist in maintaining cyclonic flow as despite the pressure drop.
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be manually moveable.
- the moveable member may be automatically moved in response to a change of pressure or air flow through the surface cleaning apparatus.
- one or more pressure or air flow sensors may be provided in the air flow path and upon issuance of a signal from one or more sensors, the position of the moveable member may be changed, e.g., by a solenoid or stepper motor.
- An actuator 502 may be provided to control the movement of the moveable inlet member 280 .
- the actuator 502 is a manually moveable toggle 500 , which may be on a surface of the main body 120 .
- the manual toggle 500 may be a mechanical slider, as exemplified.
- the manual toggle 500 is provided to be manually manipulated (e.g., slid) by a user. The user may move the manual toggle 500 between a first toggle position ( FIG. 24 ) and a second toggle position ( FIG. 25 ). Moving the manual toggle 500 between the first toggle position and the second toggle position may move the moveable inlet member 280 between the first member position and the second member position.
- the manual toggle 500 is drivingly coupled to the moveable inlet member 280 to move the moveable inlet member 280 between the first member position and the second member position
- the manual toggle 500 may be mechanically linked directly to the moveable inlet member 280 such that moving the manual toggle 500 pushes and/or pulls the moveable inlet member 280 .
- the manual toggle 500 may be a body that is directly secured to the moveable inlet member 280 as exemplified in FIGS. 25 and 26 (e.g., molded as part thereof).
- manual toggle 500 may be mechanically drivingly coupled to the moveable inlet member 280 via mechanical coupling 504 .
- Manual toggle 500 may therefore be an actuator 502 that may be a body that is directly secured to a mechanical linkage 504 that is directly secured to the moveable inlet member 280 .
- an actuator 502 which actuates an electromechanical member, such as a motor (e.g., a stepper motor) or a solenoid may be provided to move the moveable inlet member 280 between the first member position and the second member position.
- a motor e.g., a stepper motor
- a solenoid may be provided to move the moveable inlet member 280 between the first member position and the second member position.
- Such an actuator which may be referred to as a powered actuator may be coupled to a power supply of the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., a battery).
- a powered actuator may be communicatively coupled to the control system to be controlled thereby.
- the actuator 502 may be an unpowered actuator such as, e.g., an aneroid capsule responsive to pressure changes.
- the moveable member actuator 502 may be controlled in any suitable way, such as by the manual toggle or automatically by signals generated by the control system 370 of the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., in response to changes in pressure, changes in sensor values, or changes in operational modes).
- the moveable member actuator 502 may optionally be a dedicated actuator for controlling only the moveable inlet member 280 . Any actuator discussed herein may be used.
- moveable member actuator 502 may control another function of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 in addition to the moveable inlet member 280 .
- the actuator 502 may be provided to control another setting of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (i.e., presented to the user as being for the control of the other setting).
- the actuator 502 may be a cleaning mode setting toggle (e.g., selecting between an above floor cleaning mode and a floor cleaning mode), and actuating the actuator 502 may select a mode of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 , and the moveable inlet member 280 may be adjusted to compliment the selected mode, as disused further elsewhere herein.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may not include any indicia indicating that the actuator 502 controls the moveable inlet member 280 .
- the cross-sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 may be automatically varied based upon an air flow rate of air in the air flow path 160 .
- the air flow rate is a first flow rate
- the inlet downstream opening 258 has a first cross-sectional area
- the air flow rate is a second flow rate that is lower than the first flow rate
- the inlet downstream opening 258 has a second cross-sectional area that is different from the first cross-sectional area and may be smaller.
- the air flow rate may vary the cross-sectional area directly and/or indirectly.
- the air flow rate may vary the cross sectional area directly, as the force of air impinging the moveable inlet member 280 may cause a change in the positioning of the moveable inlet member 280 .
- the moveable member may be biased to an upstream (forward) position. In such a case, if the first air flow rate is higher than the second air flow rate, then air impinging the moveable inlet member 280 at the first air flow rate (i.e., the higher air flow rate) may carry greater force and so moves the moveable inlet member 280 farther downstream (rearwardly) than air impinging the moveable inlet member 280 at the second air flow rate.
- Moving the moveable inlet member 280 farther downstream increases the axial length of the inlet downstream opening 258 and thereby enables a higher airflow into the air treatment member. Accordingly, the force of air may move the moveable inlet member 280 automatically to increase the axial length of the opening 258 and the biasing member (e.g., a spring) may move the moveable member to reduce the axial length of the opening 258 when the air flow rate decreases, all without user intervention.
- the biasing member e.g., a spring
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include a biasing member 506 (e.g., a spring or compressible balloon) biasing the movable member 280 to a position that results in a smaller cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 .
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be biased towards the second member position ( FIG. 30 ) by the biasing member 506 , and the force of air impinging the moveable inlet member 280 may overcome the force of the biasing member 506 to move the moveable inlet member 280 all or part of the way to the first member position ( FIG. 29 ).
- the cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 may vary automatically as the surface cleaning apparatus is reconfigured wherein the reconfiguration results in a change in the air flow rate.
- the change in air flow rate may be due to a change in power level provided to the suction motor and, accordingly, each of the air flow rate and the cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 may respond to a common input (e.g., a change in power level).
- the cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 and the air flow rate both respond to the same user action, such as a user activating a toggle, such as pushing a soft button (touch screen) or a hard button or moving a slider to change an operating mode of the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., changing from a low flow mode to a high flow mode), or reconfiguring the surface cleaning apparatus 100 , such as mounting a portable unit to a floor cleaning unit 154 to form, e.g., a stick vacuum.
- a toggle such as pushing a soft button (touch screen) or a hard button or moving a slider to change an operating mode of the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., changing from a low flow mode to a high flow mode)
- reconfiguring the surface cleaning apparatus 100 such as mounting a portable unit to a floor cleaning unit 154 to form, e.g., a stick vacuum.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is removably mountable to the floor cleaning unit 154 whereby, when the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is mounted to the floor cleaning unit 154 the surface cleaning apparatus is operable in an upright vacuum cleaner mode and, when the portable cleaning unit is removed from the floor cleaning unit 154 , the portable cleaning unit is operable in an above floor (hand vac) cleaning mode.
- the above floor vacuum cleaner mode may comprise the first air flow rate, e.g., as a result of a first power level being supplied to the suction motor 322 .
- the upright vacuum cleaning mode may comprise the second air flow rate that is lower than the first air flow rate, e.g., as a result of a second power level being supplied to the suction motor 322 that is less than the first power level.
- the above floor cleaning mode may be a high-power mode and the upright cleaning mode may be a low-power mode, wherein a low power mode may allow for a longer run time. If the power level of the suction motor 322 is automatically varied as an operating mode of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is changed from the upright vacuum cleaner mode to the above floor cleaning mode, then the cross-section area of the air treatment inlet 230 may also be automatically varied as an operating mode of the surface cleaning apparatus is changed from the upright vacuum cleaner mode to the above floor cleaning mode.
- This change in the cross-sectional area may be due to the change in air flow as discussed previously.
- the change may be due to the moveable member being moved by the insertion of the external conduit 140 driving the moveable member 280 to the upright vacuum cleaner mode and the moveable member returning to the hand vac cleaning mode when the external conduit 140 is removed.
- the external conduit may be driving connected to the moveable member upon insertion and a biasing member may return the moveable member to the hand vac cleaning mode upon withdrawal of the external conduit.
- the change may be due to an electromechanical member moving the moveable member in response to mounting and removing the surface cleaning apparatus from the floor cleaning unit (e.g., insertion and/or removal of the external conduit).
- a lower power mode may result in a lower air flow rate which may result in a lower cyclone efficiency.
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be moved to decrease the axial length of a cyclone inlet to thereby to increase the number of turns of the air flow path 160 within the cyclone chamber 210 .
- the moveable inlet member 280 may be moved by any method discussed herein in response to the mode change or in response to the same user command that caused the mode change.
- the cross-sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 may be varied based on dirt characteristics in the surface cleaning apparatus.
- the dirt characteristics may be one or more of the size (i.e., particle size) of dirt which is collected, the size of dirt that is expected to be collected (e.g., based on a mode selection), the size of dirt that is carried by an air flow path 160 downstream of a selected component 510 of the surface cleaning apparatus, and the dirt loading of an air flow path downstream of the selected component 510 of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the selected component 510 referred to above may be the inlet conduit 170 , a dirt separating component such as the air treatment chamber 210 , the air treatment assembly 200 as a whole, or the pre-motor filter 330 .
- the cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 may be varied (e.g., the effective air inlet length 290 varied) to change (i.e., increase or decrease) the efficiency of the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the effective air inlet length 290 may be reduced to produce more turns in a cyclone chamber and to thereby remove finer dirt from the air flow path 160 .
- the inlet downstream opening 258 when dirt having a first size is collected the inlet downstream opening 258 may have the first cross-sectional area, and when dirt having a second size that is smaller than the first size is collected the inlet downstream opening 258 may have the second cross-sectional area.
- the inlet downstream opening 258 when air downstream of the selected component 510 has a first dirt loading the inlet downstream opening 258 may have the first cross-sectional area, and when air downstream of the inlet downstream opening 258 has a second dirt loading that is higher than the first dirt loading the inlet downstream opening 258 may have the second cross-sectional area.
- dirt particle size or dirt loading may be determined in any suitable way, such as via a dirt sensor 512 , as exemplified in FIGS. 27 and 28 , or via user observation.
- the dirt sensor 512 is operable to detect a size of dirt in an air flow path 160 and/or the dirt collection region 300 .
- a dirt sensor 512 that is operable to detect a size of dirt in the air flow path 160 may be referred to as a dirt size sensor.
- the dirt sensor 512 may determine an average, mean, or minimum particle size of detected particles, and may base its output on that value.
- the dirt sensor 512 is operable to detect a dirt loading of an airstream.
- a dirt sensor 512 that is operable to detect dirt loading of an air stream may be referred to as a dirt loading sensor.
- the dirt sensor 512 may determine a proportional volume of dirt in the air stream, and base its output on that value.
- the dirt sensor 512 may be any suitable sensor.
- the dirt sensor 512 is an acoustic sensor (e.g., a microphone).
- the output of the acoustic sensor may be used to gauge particle size.
- the dirt sensor 512 is an optical sensor.
- the dirt sensor 512 is a laser sensor.
- the dirt sensor 512 may be located at any suitable location of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 includes a dirt sensor 512 in, or arranged to detect dirt in (i.e., directed towards), the air treatment chamber, the dirt collection region 300 and/or in a dirt outlet between the dirt collection region 300 and an air treatment chamber 210 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 includes a dirt sensor 512 in the air flow path 160 (e.g., in the inlet 170 ) or arranged to detect dirt travelling towards the air flow path 160 (e.g., in the external conduit 140 ).
- a dirt sensor 512 is in, or arranged to detect dirt in, the air flow path 160
- the dirt sensor may be in, or arranged to detect dirt in, any suitable location. That location may be within (e.g., as exemplified by sensor 512 a, see FIG. 28 ) or downstream of the air treatment outlet 232 , such as within or downstream of the vortex finder 238 ). That location may be at the air treatment chamber outlet end 216 upstream of the air treatment outlet 232 , or upstream of the pre-motor filter 330 (e.g., within the pre-motor filter housing 334 upstream of the pre-motor filter 330 , as exemplified by sensor 512 b ).
- That location may be upstream of the air treatment chamber, as exemplified by sensor 512 c. In some embodiments, that location is downstream of the free volume 470 of the air treatment chamber 210 , downstream of the air treatment assembly 200 as a whole, and/or downstream of the pre-motor filter 330 , to detect changes in the size of dirt particles that are making it past these dirt separation components. It will be appreciated that any suitable number of dirt sensors may be used, and their outputs may be used in any suitable way, e.g., to send a signal which may be sent to a controller which in turns sends a signal to actuate an electromechanical member.
- a user may manually change the position of the moveable inlet member 280 due to changing dirt characteristics.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may generate an alert to prompt a user to adjust the position of the moveable inlet member 280 based upon a dirt characteristic that is determined.
- the alert may be, e.g., an audible alert played by a speaker of the apparatus, or a visual alert displayed on the apparatus (e.g., a flashing light or an illuminated icon).
- the user may respond to the alert by using actuator 502 to move the moveable inlet member 280 .
- the alert may be generated in response to detecting a change in the size of dirt that is being collected or the size or amount of dirt that is travelling downstream of the air treatment chamber and/or the air treatment assembly.
- the alert is generated in response to the output of the dirt sensor 512 .
- the alert may be generated in response to a user action indicative that the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is being or will be used to collect dirt of a different size, such as switching a mode of operation (e.g., above floor vs. upright) or adding an attachment.
- the cross-sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 may be automatically varied due to changing dirt characteristics.
- the variation may be in response to an output of a dirt sensor 512 or in response to a user action indicative that the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is being or will be used to collect dirt of a different size or to a reconfiguration of the surface cleaning apparatus to a different cleaning mode.
- the moveable member actuator 502 may move the moveable inlet member 280 in response to an output from the dirt sensor 512 indicative of a change in the dirt characteristics (e.g., particle size or dirt loading of an air flow stream), or in response to a user mode selection or accessory attachment. For example, when an output of the dirt sensor 512 is indicative of finer dirt being detected, the moveable member actuator 502 may move the movable member 280 to shorten the effective air input length 290 .
- the cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 changes in response to changes in the surface cleaning apparatus' operational mode
- the cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 may also vary within a single mode.
- the cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 may vary during an upright mode if there is a change in dirt characteristics (e.g., a sensed change in dirt loading of an air stream).
- the cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 may change during an above floor cleaning mode if there is a change in dirt characteristics (e.g., a sensed change in particle size).
- closure member 310 which is curved, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the operable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- the closure member 310 is curved along at least one dimension with respect to a coordinate system defined by the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 , the apparatus vertical axis 112 , and the apparatus transverse axis 114 .
- the closure member may therefore be referred to as a curved member.
- the closure member 310 is curved with respect only to a single dimension, as exemplified. In other words, the closure member 310 may be arcuate in shape.
- the closure member 310 may have a curved surface 520 which, in the closed position, curves in at least one plane of a set of axial planes, wherein the set of axial planes are each defined by any two of the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 , the apparatus vertical axis 112 , and the apparatus transverse axis 114 extending therein.
- the curved surface 520 in the closed position may curve in a first plane 522 of the set of axial planes in which the apparatus vertical axis 112 and the apparatus transverse axis 114 extend.
- FIGS. 9 the curved surface 520 in the closed position may curve in a first plane 522 of the set of axial planes in which the apparatus vertical axis 112 and the apparatus transverse axis 114 extend.
- the curved surface 520 in the closed position may curve in a second plane 524 of the set of axial planes in which the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 and the apparatus vertical axis 112 extend. It will be appreciated that the curved surface may also or alternatively curve in a third axial plane of the set of axial planes in which the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 and the apparatus transverse axis 114 extend.
- the closure member 310 may be curved in a selected plane 526 that is transverse to the axial direction (i.e., transverse to the apparatus longitudinal axis).
- the selected plane 526 may optionally be perpendicular to the apparatus longitudinal axis, as exemplified.
- the inlet sidewall 260 may be curved in the same selected plane 526 .
- the inlet sidewall 260 and the closure member 310 each have a surface with a generally common curvature in the selected plane 526 .
- the closure member 310 in the open position may have a closure profile 530 in a plane that is transverse to the apparatus longitudinal axis (e.g., selected plane 526 ) that is similar to a sidewall profile 532 of the inlet sidewall 260 in the same plane.
- the closure member 310 may move longitudinally (i.e., generally parallel to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 ) from an open position in which it is in the nozzle or within the air treatment inlet, to a closed position in which it closes the inlet downstream opening 258 in the inlet sidewall 260 of the air treatment inlet 230 .
- the closure member 310 may pivot down to the inlet sidewall 260 about an axis that extends generally parallel to the inlet sidewall 260 .
- the closure surface may be arcuate in shape.
- the curved surface 520 curves in only one plane of the set of axial planes when the closure member 310 is in the closed position. In other words, the curved surface 520 extends generally parallel to at least one of the set of axial planes.
- the closure seat 312 may be a curved seat.
- the curved surface 520 may seat against (i.e., touch at each point along the closure perimeter 534 ) the curved closure seat 312 when the closure member 310 is in the closed position.
- the closure seat 312 may have a curvature that matches the curvature of the curved surface 520 .
- the closure member 310 may be a thin body, such as a curved plate.
- the closure member 310 may have a first face 536 and an opposite second face 538 .
- the first face 536 and the second face 538 may extend generally parallel to one another, and may be of generally the same size and/or shape.
- the curved surface face 520 may be first face 536 or the second face 538 .
- the closure member 310 is shaped to match a shape of a component or opening of the air treatment inlet 230 .
- the closure member 310 may be shaped to match the shape of the inlet upstream opening 256 or the inlet downstream opening 258 .
- the inlet upstream opening 256 may be a circular shape curved along one dimension.
- the closure member 310 may be a curved and/or circular shape.
- the inlet downstream opening 258 may be a rectangular shape curved along one dimension (e.g., along a dimension parallel to the apparatus vertical axis 112 , as exemplified).
- the closure member 310 may be a rectangular shape and/or curved along one dimension.
- the closure member 310 may pivot about a closure axis of rotation 540 between an open position ( FIG. 7 ) and a closed position ( FIG. 8 ).
- the closure member 310 may be pivotally coupled to a further body of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 by a closure pivot joint 542 .
- the closure axis of rotation 540 may extend in any suitable direction.
- the closure axis of rotation 540 is generally parallel to one of the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 , the air treatment longitudinal axis 218 , the apparatus transverse axis 114 , or the apparatus vertical axis 112 .
- the closure axis of 540 is generally perpendicular to one of the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 , the air treatment longitudinal axis 218 , the apparatus transverse axis 114 , or the apparatus vertical axis 112 .
- the closure member When closed, the closure member may extend generally perpendicular to the direction of air flow through the portion of the air flow path that the closure member closes when in the closed position.
- the curved closure member may close an opening that is directed generally parallel to the conduit axis 254 or an opening in the inlet sidewall 260 .
- the curved closure member 310 pivots down over an opening in the inlet sidewall 260 .
- the closure member 310 may be external to the air flow path 160 when in the closed position.
- the closure member 310 may rotate or translate into a pocket that is located exterior to the air flow path (e.g., a pocket provided on an exterior surface of the inlet conduit 170 ).
- the pocket may have a port that opens onto the, e.g., inlet conduit 170 .
- the closure member may close the port and, optionally, form part of the surface of the air flow path (e.g., part of the inlet conduit 170 ) to thereby provide a smooth continuous surface of the air flow path.
- a closure member 310 that is axially moveable, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the operable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, the user interface on the handle, the user interface overlying the main body housing, the user interface on an annular portion, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- the closure member 310 moves axially with respect to the air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 and/or the inlet conduit axis 254 between a closed position ( FIG. 39 ) and/or a partially closed position ( FIG. 35 ) and an open position ( FIG. 34 ).
- a closed position FIG. 39
- a partially closed position FIG. 35
- an open position FIG. 34
- the closure member When the closure member is in the open position, during operation of the surface cleaning apparatus, air flows through the air treatment inlet 230 to the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the closure member 310 is in the closed position, air flow through the air treatment inlet 230 is inhibited.
- closure member may inhibit or prevent dirt exiting the surface cleaning apparatus when the suction motor is deenergized and, e.g., the dirty air inlet points downwardly.
- airflow through the air flow path 160 may have a flow direction 550 at the location at which the closure member 310 is positioned when in the closed position (e.g., the position exemplified in FIG. 38 ), and the closure member 310 may be moveable generally parallel to that flow direction 550 between the open and closed positions.
- the flow direction 550 may be axial with respect to the air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 and/or the inlet conduit axis 176 .
- the air treatment member 202 may have a first end and a second end, wherein the second end is spaced apart from the first end in the flow direction 550 .
- the flow direction 550 may be rearward.
- the closure member 310 moves to the open position, the closure member moves axially in the flow direction and when the closure member 310 moves to the closed position, the closure member moves opposite to the flow direction 550 from the open position through the inlet conduit 170 , towards the inlet upstream end 250 of the air treatment inlet 230 to the closed position.
- the closure member in the closed position, abuts and end wall of port in the air flow path.
- the upstream end of the inlet conduit 170 may have an inlet port and, in the closed position, the closure member 310 abuts the inlet port of the inlet conduit 170 or the upstream end of the air treatment inlet 230 may have an inlet port (i.e., the chamber inlet opening 234 ), and, in the closed position, the closure member 310 abuts the inlet port of the air treatment inlet 230 .
- the closure member 310 may have any suitable shape.
- the closure member 310 may be, e.g., circular, oval, or square, and may be, e.g., planar or curved.
- the closure member 310 is shaped to match a shape of a component or opening of the air treatment inlet 230 that is to be closed. Accordingly, for example, the closure member 310 may be shaped to match the shape of the inlet upstream opening 256 or the inlet downstream opening 258 . If the inlet upstream opening 256 is planar or circular in shape, then the closure member 310 may be planar and/or circular in shape.
- the inlet downstream opening 258 may be a rectangular shape curved along one dimension (e.g., along a dimension parallel to the apparatus vertical axis 112 , as exemplified) in which case the closure member 310 may be a rectangular shape and/or curved along one dimension.
- the closure member 310 may cover a cross sectional area that is equal to a cross sectional area of the inlet upstream opening 256 and/or the inlet downstream opening 258 if the closure member is to seat in the opening or larger if the closure member is to overlie the opening when in the closed position.
- t the closure member 310 may be the inlet end wall 262 .
- the closure member 310 may extend generally parallel to the flow direction 550 .
- the closure member 310 may close a tangential inlet to the air treatment chamber 210 (i.e., as opposed to a transversely extending opening).
- the closure member 310 may be axially moveable to a position in which it extends across (Le., closes) a sidewall opening 258 .
- the closure member may close the air treatment downstream opening 258 .
- the closure member 310 In the open position, the closure member 310 may be received against a wall of the air treatment member 202 , extending across the wall (e.g., the inlet sidewall 260 ) and may therefore overly the sidewall.
- the closure member may have the shape of an annulus sector.
- the closure member 310 may move generally along the wall of the air treatment member 202 between (i.e., translating between) the closed and open positions.
- an axially extending surface of the closure member 310 along a longest dimension of the closure member 310 faces an axially extending surface of the air treatment member 202 that has the outlet 258 so as to overlie the outlet 258 when in the closed position, and, optionally, the closure member 310 moves generally parallel to the axially extending surface of the air treatment member between the closed and open positions.
- the closure member 310 moves rearwardly and/or in the flow direction 550 from the open position to the closed position.
- closure member 310 may be moved in any suitable way.
- the closure member 310 may be moved manually or automatically.
- the closure member 310 may be moved, e.g., by air pressure or suction generated by the suction motor or by any of the driving members discussed elsewhere herein.
- the closure member may be moved by being pushed back by an upstream end of the external conduit 140 when the external conduit 140 is inserted into the nozzle 180 , by an actuator of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 other than the suction motor, or by a manual sider or other manual toggle accessible to the user from outside the surface cleaning apparatus as discussed previously.
- the closure member 310 moves along a closure member track 560 which may include a rail.
- the closure member track 560 may be a linear track.
- the closure member track 560 may extend only within the air treatment inlet 230 , or may extend beyond the air treatment inlet 230 (e.g., into a free volume of the air treatment chamber 210 or elsewhere).
- the closure member 310 moves longitudinally on a rail to the inlet end of the inlet conduit 170 to close the inlet conduit 170 .
- the closure member 310 may be at least partially moveable to close a port or into or through a recess or passage formed in a wall or by a plurality of walls of the air treatment member 202 .
- This aspect may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- closure member 310 may be provided in any portion of the air flow path, optionally upstream of the air treatment assembly 200 .
- the air treatment assembly 200 has an assembly free volume 570 that includes the chamber free volume 470 of the air treatment chamber 210 and an inlet free volume 572 of the air treatment inlet 230 .
- the chamber free volume is an open space within the air treatment chamber 210 outside the air treatment inlet 230 and the air treatment outlet 232 .
- the inlet free volume 572 is an open space within the air treatment inlet 230 and that is part of the air flow path 160 when the closure member 310 is in the closed position.
- the closure member 310 may be at least partially removed from the assembly free volume 570 or fully removed from the assembly free volume 570 . This aspect reduces the extent to which the closure member 310 inhibits air flow when in the open position and/or reduces turbulence caused by a significant discontinuity in the transverse cross sectional area of the air treatment inlet 230 at a downstream edge of the closure member 310 when the closure member 310 is in the open position.
- the closure member 310 when in the open position, may be at least partially moved into or through a closure passage 574 (as exemplified in FIGS. 40 and 41 ) and may be at least partially or fully received in a closure recess (e.g., pocket 580 , exemplified in FIGS. 42 and 43 ) or it may be moved to close a port in a wall of the air flow path 160 (as exemplified in FIGS. 53 and 54 ).
- the closure member 310 in the open position is fully received in the closure recess or fully moved into or through the closure passage 574 or moved to close a port and form a smooth wall section at the location of the port.
- closure passage may be similar to the closure recess, but extending all the way through the wall or walls to an exterior of the air treatment assembly 200 (and, optionally, to an exterior of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 ) such that the closure member 310 may be fully withdrawn from the air treatment assembly 200 through the closure passage.
- the closure recess may be formed in a single wall, e.g., a recess in a smooth and continuous surface which surface optionally continues a significant portion of the way around the recess (e.g., at least 50%, 75% or 90% of a perimeter of the recess).
- the closure recess may be formed between walls.
- the closure recess has a mouth or port which opens into the air flow path, such as into the chamber free volume 470 or into the inlet free volume 572 .
- the recess may be exterior to the assembly free volume.
- the closure recess also referred to as a closure member pocket 580
- the closure recess may be formed in a sidewall (as exemplified in FIGS. 42 to 54 ) or end wall (as exemplified in FIGS. 55 and 56 ) of the air treatment member 202 .
- the closure member pocket 580 is formed in one and only one wall.
- the closure member pocket is formed in the chamber sidewall 220 , the inlet sidewall 260 , the inlet conduit sidewall 178 (e.g., including the nozzle 180 , as exemplified in FIGS. 42 and 43 ), and/or the inlet end wall 262 .
- the closure member pocket 580 is formed in an axially extending sidewall (i.e., extending generally parallel to the apparatus longitudinal axis 218 ).
- the closure member pocket 580 may alternatively be formed in a sidewall 260 that does not extend axially.
- the closure member 310 may be at least partially withdrawn into a closure member pocket 580 formed in the inlet end wall 262 .
- the pocket 580 may be located further in the flow direction 550 (e.g., rearward) from the dirty air inlet 162 than the inlet downstream opening 258 , as exemplified.
- the inlet downstream opening 258 may be further in the flow direction (e.g., rearward) from the dirty air inlet 162 than the closure member pocket 580 .
- the closure member pocket 580 may be formed in a wall of the inlet conduit 170 and/or nozzle 180 .
- the closure member 310 is withdrawn into a sidewall of a generally smooth-walled bore.
- the smooth-walled bore is optionally a generally linear bore.
- the inlet sidewall 260 and/or inlet conduit sidewall 178 forms a generally smooth-walled bore 568 and the closure member pocket 580 or passage 574 is formed in the inlet sidewall 260 or inlet conduit sidewall 178 such that at least a portion of the closure member 310 may be withdrawn into the sidewall.
- the closure member 310 may pivot about the pivot axis to rotate upwards into the pocket 580 and downward to cover an opening of the inlet 230 (e.g., the inlet upstream opening 256 , as exemplified).
- the inlet conduit sidewall 178 may form the generally smooth-walled bore 568
- the closure member pocket 580 may be formed in the inlet conduit sidewall 178 such that at least a portion of the closure member 310 may be withdrawn into the inlet conduit sidewall 178 .
- FIGS. 44 and 45 the closure member 310 may pivot about the pivot axis to rotate upwards into the pocket 580 and downward to cover an opening of the inlet 230 (e.g., the inlet upstream opening 256 , as exemplified).
- the inlet conduit sidewall 178 may form the generally smooth-walled bore 568
- the closure member pocket 580 may be formed in the inlet conduit sidewall 178 such that at least a portion of the closure member 310 may be withdrawn into the inlet conduit
- the nozzle 180 may have a closure member pocket 580 formed in a wall therein (e.g., in a sidewall thereof) such that at least a portion of the closure member 310 may be withdrawn into the nozzle wall.
- the pocket 580 may alternately be formed in a sidewall of the inlet 230 (e.g., a portion of the inlet conduit sidewall 178 that extends into the air treatment chamber).
- the closure member 310 when in the closed position, the closure member 310 may form part of the smooth-walled bore 568 and may be continuous part thereof.
- the closure member pocket 580 may include at least a portion that is exterior to the assembly free volume 570 .
- the closure member pocket 580 may extend outward from the assembly free volume 570 .
- the pocket may have a depth such that when in the closed position, the closure member may abut an inner surface of the wall defining the pocket 580 and may be flush with the smooth-walled bore 568 .
- At least a portion of the closure member 310 in the closed position may be positioned in the assembly free volume 570 or the air treatment inlet 230 .
- substantially all or all of the closure member 310 in the closed position is positioned in the air treatment inlet 230 in the closed position.
- a face 590 of the closure member 310 in the open position may extend in a common surface with an abutting wall face 592 of an abutting wall 594 which is also directed towards the air flow path 160 , the common surface having a constant curvature along a line 596 extending across the face 590 and the abutting wall face 592 (and, optionally, a constant curvature along another line crossing the first line at a 90 degree angle).
- the closure member 310 in the open member position may be referred to as forming a portion of the wall of the air flow path, such as a wall of the air treatment assembly 200 .
- the closure member pocket 580 may have a mouth or pocket port 600 by which the closure member pocket 580 is open to the assembly free volume 570 .
- the closure member 310 may close the pocket port 600 when the closure member is in the open member position. Accordingly, when the closure member 310 closes the pocket port 600 and is flush with the surrounding surface, the closure member 310 may be referred to as having merged with the surrounding wall of the air treatment assembly 200 , and may be referred to as forming a portion of a smooth wall of the air treatment assembly 200 .
- the pocket port 600 is in an axially extending sidewall of the air treatment chamber 210 . Such as the chamber sidewall 220 or the inlet sidewall 260 , and the closure member 310 merges with axially extending sidewall.
- the closure member 310 may be moveable between the open member position and the closed member position by rotating about the closure axis of rotation 540 , the closure axis of rotation is exterior to the assembly free volume 570 .
- the closure axis of rotation is exterior to the air treatment chamber 210 .
- the closure axis of rotation 540 may extend through the closure member pocket 580 .
- the closure axis of rotation 540 may be parallel to the air treatment longitudinal axis 218 and/or the flow direction 550 .
- the closure axis of rotation 540 may be perpendicular to the air treatment longitudinal axis 218 and/or the flow direction 550 .
- the closure member 310 may have a first end 610 comprising a rotational mount 612 and a second opposed end 614 .
- the closure axis or rotation may be an axis of rotation of the rotational mount 612 .
- the closure member 310 may extend generally perpendicular to the air treatment longitudinal axis 218 and/or the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 when in the closed position.
- the second opposed end 614 of the closure member 310 may rotate towards the second end 216 of the air treatment chamber 210 as the closure member moves to the open position.
- the Closure Member is Moved by a Driving Member
- a driving member 630 that is operable to move the closure member 310 , which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 includes a driving member 630 drivingly connected to the closure member 310 .
- the closure member 310 may move in a first direction 632 from the open position to the closed position.
- the closure member 310 may move in a second direction 634 from the closed position to the open position.
- the driving member 630 may be operable to move the closure member 310 in at least one of the first and second directions.
- the driving member 630 is operable to move the closure member 310 in both the first direction 632 and the second direction 634 .
- the driving member is operable to move the closure member from the open member position to the closed member position, and the closure member is biased to the open member position by a biasing member.
- the driving member 630 may move the closure member to the open member position when activated, and the biasing member may move the closure member form the open member position to the closed member position when the driving member is not activated.
- the driving member is operable to move the closure member from the closed member position to the open member position, and the closure member is biased to the closed member position by a biasing member.
- the driving member 630 may move the closure member to the closed member position when activated, and the biasing member may move the closure member form the closed member position to the open member position when the driving member is not activated.
- the driving member 630 may be any suitable driving member, including any of the driving members described herein.
- the driving member 630 may be any actuator that is operatively connected to (e.g., drivingly connected to) the closure member 310 to move the closure member 310 in at least one direction in response to an event, such as one or more of the suction motor being actuated or deenergized, the surface cleaning apparatus being connected to or removed from a floor cleaning unit and the air treatment assembly or a subcomponent thereof being removed or reinstalled in the surface cleaning apparatus.
- an event such as one or more of the suction motor being actuated or deenergized, the surface cleaning apparatus being connected to or removed from a floor cleaning unit and the air treatment assembly or a subcomponent thereof being removed or reinstalled in the surface cleaning apparatus.
- the closure member 310 may be automatically moved upon the occurrence of an event.
- the actuation of the movement of the closure member may be controlled automatically by signals generated by the control system 370 of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., in response to changes in pressure, changes in sensor values, or changes in operational modes).
- the driving member may be mechanically or electromechanically or fluidically connected to the closure member 310 to move the closure member upon the occurrence of the event.
- the driving member 630 may comprise a closure member actuator 640 , as exemplified in FIGS. 34 and 35 .
- the closure member actuator 640 may be any suitable actuator.
- the closure member actuator 640 may act only on the closure member 310 , e.g., it may be a separate actuator from the actuator for the suction motor 322 , may therefore be a dedicated actuator for controlling only the closure member 310 .
- the closure member actuator 640 may be a powered actuator.
- a powered actuator may be an electromechanical actuator, such as a motor or solenoid.
- a powered actuator may be coupled to a power supply of the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., a battery).
- a powered actuator may be a linear actuator.
- a powered actuator may be communicatively coupled to the control system to be directed thereby. Accordingly, upon actuation (e.g., a button being pushed, a soft control on a touch screen being touched or an event occurring, a signal may be sent to the closure member actuator 640 whereupon the closure member 310 is moved.
- an unpowered actuator may be used.
- the unpowered actuator may be any such actuator discussed herein such as an aneroid capsule responsive to pressure changes or a closure mechanical coupling (a mechanical linkage) 646 drivingly coupled to the manually moveable toggle 642 .
- the closure mechanical coupling 646 mechanically drivingly couples an upline apparatus 648 (e.g., any actuator disclosed herein) to the closure member 310 .
- the upline apparatus 648 may be any actuator discussed elsewhere herein, and may be manually actuated by a user or may be actuated automatically upon the occurrence of an event.
- the closure member actuator 640 may itself comprise an on/off actuator 650 (see for example FIGS. 34 and 35 ).
- the on/off actuator 650 may be a toggle such as a button, pivoting switch or slider.
- the toggle may be manually moveable (e.g., a depressible button, pivoting switch or slider), or electronically activated (e.g., a soft button, such as presented on a touchscreen).
- the on/off actuator 650 may be the manually moveable toggle 642 .
- the on/off actuator 650 is operable to actuate the suction motor 322 when the on/off actuator 650 is set to on and which is operable to deenergize the suction motor 322 when the on/off actuator 650 is set to off.
- the closure member 310 may move from the open position to the closed position in response to the on/off actuator 650 being set to off.
- the closure member 310 may move from the closed position to the open position in response to the on/off actuator being set to on.
- the on/off actuator 650 may be mechanically drivingly connected to the closure member 310 .
- an on/off actuator 650 that is mechanically drivingly connected to the closure member 310 is a manually moveable slider.
- the driving member 630 may include the on/off actuator 650 and the mechanical linkage 646 .
- a signal may be issued which causes an electromechanical member 640 (e.g., the moveable member actuator 502 ) to drive the closure member 310 to the open position or the closed position, respectively.
- an electromechanical member 640 e.g., the moveable member actuator 502
- the closure member 310 may move in response to the on/off actuator 650 after a predetermined time delay.
- the closure member 310 may be moved to the closed position after a closing time delay of between 0.1 seconds and 10 seconds, 1 seconds and 5 seconds, or 2 seconds and 4 seconds following the transition of the on/off actuator to off. Accordingly, the air flow produced by the suction motor may terminate or substantially terminate prior to the closure member moving to the closed position.
- the closure member 310 may move to the open position after the on/off actuator 650 is moved to on with a lesser opening time delay than the opening time delay.
- the driving member 630 may include a piston 660 that is moveable between an open piston position and a closed piston position.
- the piston may be drivingly connected to (e.g., mechanically or fluidically connected to) the closure member such that the closure member is moved to the closed member position when the piston is in the closed piston position and is moved to the open member position when the piston is moved to the open piston position.
- the piston 660 may be moveable within a cylinder 662 .
- the suction generated by the suction motor 322 may drive the piston 660 to move, e.g., within the cylinder 662 .
- the piston 660 may be mechanically coupled to the closure member 310 to move the closure member as the piston moves.
- the driving member 630 may include the piston 660 and the closure mechanical linkage 646 between the piston and the closure member 310 .
- the piston may be biased (e.g., by biasing member 664 ) to return to the closed position.
- the driving member 630 may include the external conduit 140 . If an external conduit is removably insertable, then insertion of the external conduit 140 into the nozzle 180 may move the closure member 310 . The upstream end of the external conduit 140 may bear against the closure member 310 as the external conduit 140 is inserted into the nozzle, pushing the closure member 310 before it. For example, the closure member 310 may move axially to close the air treatment chamber 210 automatically when the external conduit 140 is removed.
- the air treatment inlet 230 may include an axially moving closure member 310 which slides closed when the external conduit 140 is removed and slides axially inwardly due to engagement between the upstream end of the external conduit 140 and the closure member 310 when the external conduit 140 is inserted.
- the driving member 630 may comprise an engagement member 680 provided on the external conduit 140 (e.g., the end wall) and a driving actuator 682 that is operatively connected to the closure member 310 whereby upon insertion of the external conduit 140 into the dirty air inlet, the engagement member contacts the driving actuator 682 which moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position.
- the engagement member 680 maybe, e.g., the end cap of the external conduit 140 or a downstream end of the sidewall of the external conduit 140 .
- the driving actuator 682 may include, e.g., a mating engagement member that is drivingly connected to the closure member (e.g., a physical body projecting from the closure member) to be impacted by the engagement member.
- the driving actuator 682 may include, e.g., a toggle communicatively coupled to the closure member actuator 640 , whereby the toggle is triggered by the engagement member to actuate the closure member actuator 640 .
- the external conduit 140 includes a catch to engage the closure member 310 to draw the closure member 310 to the closed member position when the external conduit 140 is withdrawn.
- mounting the surface cleaning apparatus 100 to the floor cleaning unit 154 moves the closure member 310 from the closed position to the open position, such as by the external conduit 140 being inserted into the dirty air inlet when the surface cleaning apparatus is mounted to the floor cleaning unit, or an electromechanical member being actuated upon the surface cleaning apparatus being mounted to the floor cleaning unit.
- the closure member 310 may move to the open member position when the air treatment assembly 200 is coupled to the main body 120 , and moves to the closed member position when the air treatment assembly 200 is removed.
- a mechanical or electromechanical member may move the closure member 310 when the main body 120 and the air treatment assembly 200 are separated.
- the mechanical member may be, e.g., a physical catch or magnet on the main body 120 that engages the closure member 310 (e.g., a corresponding catch or magnet of the closure member) to drive the closure member to the open or closed position as the air treatment assembly 200 is joined to or removed from the main body 120 .
- the electromechanical member may be, e.g., the closure member actuator 640 which receives a signal to move the closure member 310 in response to detection that the air treatment assembly 200 is being removed from or coupled to the main body 120 .
- the closure member 310 is biased to the open member positions by a biasing member.
- removing the air treatment assembly 200 from the main body 120 overcomes the force of the biasing member to move the closure member 310 to the closed position.
- the closure member 310 is biased to the closed member positions by a biasing member.
- coupling the air treatment assembly 200 to the main body 120 overcomes the force of the biasing member to move the closure member 310 to the closed position.
- an air treatment chamber 210 wherein the chamber first end 214 is openable and a portion of the opposed end 216 is moveable (e.g., concurrently or subsequently).
- This aspect may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- the openable chamber first end 214 which may be the forward end of the air treatment chamber or assembly, may be opened to enable the porous outlet member of the chamber (e.g., a vortex finder) to advance to a position wherein the porous member may be cleaned (e.g., to remove hair wrapped therearound) or removed for cleaning.
- the porous member may advance by itself or with other portions of the assembly, e.g., the rear (outlet) end of the assembly or chamber.
- the porous member may advance to a position proximate the open first end (the evacuation opening 410 ) or outwardly of the open first end, i.e., part or all of the porous member may advance to a position outwardly of the open first end.
- an end of the air treatment chamber 210 is translatable generally parallel to the chamber longitudinal axis 218 , and will be referred to as an axially moveable end portion 680 .
- the axially moveable end portion is moveable between a first position ( FIG. 59 ) and a second position ( FIG. 61 ) that is axially spaced from the first position.
- the second position is forward of the first position.
- the axially moveable end portion 680 may act as a plunger, e.g., to move debris through the chamber.
- the chamber first end 214 may be moveable between a closed operating position ( FIG. 55 ) in which the evacuation opening 410 is closed and an open position ( FIG. 56 ) in which the evacuation opening 410 is opened.
- the open position the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be open such that dirt may move out of the dirt collection region 300 through the evacuation opening 410 .
- the closed position the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 is closed to inhibit movement of dirt out of the dirt collection region 300 through the evacuation opening 410 .
- the open position of the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be referred to as an open evacuation position.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may comprise or consist of the front wall of the air treatment assembly (e.g., the chamber first end wall 222 ), a portion of the front wall of the air treatment assembly (e.g., movable first end portion 388 , which may be a flap, see FIG. 50 ) or part or all of the front wall of the air treatment assembly and part of the sidewall thereof.
- Part or all of the inlet conduit 170 may be part of the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 (see for example FIG. 56 ).
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may include the dirty air inlet 162 , the inlet conduit 170 or a portion thereof, and/or the air treatment inlet 230 or a portion thereof.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 is rotatably moveable.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may rotate forwardly (see for example FIG. 56 ).
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be rotationally mounted at a first end 700 thereof, and a second end 702 thereof opposite to the first end 700 may rotate forwardly as the chamber first end wall 222 or the portion thereof is opened.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be secured at a rotational mount 704 to a fixed wall of the air treatment assembly, such as the chamber sidewall 220 or a further portion of the chamber first end wall 222 .
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may pivot about an axis of the rotational mount 704 between the open position and the closed position.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be translationally moveable (see for example FIG. 60 ).
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be mounted to a fixed wall of the air treatment assembly and/or the main body via a track, and may move along the track between the open and closed positions.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may move linearly between the open and closed positions.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may translate forwardly, as exemplified in FIGS. 59 to 61 . Translational movement is described further elsewhere herein.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be inflatable and deflatable. Moving between the open and closed positions may include, or consist of, inflating or deflating a member that is drivingly connected to the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 .
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be closed, and when the inflatable member is deflated the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be opened.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be moved by any suitable actuator and any actuator discussed herein may be sued.
- the surface cleaning apparatus may include a first end actuator to move the chamber first end 214 , which may any of the actuators described herein or a dedicated actuator.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 is manually moveable, such as by a first end manually moveable member 670 .
- This manually moveable member may extend to an exterior of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 , and may be a slider or depressible button or pivotal switch.
- the first end manually movable member 670 may be drivingly coupled to the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 to move the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 .
- the manually moveable member may be moved by a user or moved by the docking station when the surface cleaning apparatus is docked.
- the first end manually moveable member 670 may be any of the manually moveable members described herein (e.g., the manually movable toggle 500 ) or a dedicated member the movement of which only affects movement of the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 .
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be moved directly by a user.
- a user may grasp the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 and pull or push it.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be referred to as a manually moveable member.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be pneumatically moveable.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be arranged to be drawn between the open and closed positions by suction generated by the suction motor 322 or a suction motor of the docking station 390 . Pneumatical movement is described further elsewhere herein.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 may be moved upon or subsequent to the surface cleaning apparatus being docked at a docking station 390 .
- docking the surface cleaning apparatus 100 with the docking station 390 may move the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 from the closed operating position to the open position.
- a portion of the docking station drivingly engage the surface cleaning apparatus to open the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 when the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is being docked.
- a mechanical linkage may be provided whereupon the docking station may push or pull the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 open.
- the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 maybe biased to the closed operating position.
- Undocking the surface cleaning apparatus 100 from the docking station 390 may move the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 from the open position to the closed operating position.
- a portion of the docking station 390 may be coupled to the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 to close the chamber first end 214 when the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is being undocked.
- a catch on the docking station 390 may pull a door shut or pull a component to a closed position as the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is pulled away from the docking station.
- the axially moveable end portion 680 may be at least a portion of the chamber second end 216 and may also include at least a portion of the chamber first end 214 .
- the chamber second end 216 may be moveable after or with the opening of the chamber first end 214 .
- the chamber second end 216 may not be moveable while the chamber first end 214 remains closed.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include two axially moveable end portions 680 , i.e., at least a portion of the chamber first end 214 and at least a portion of the chamber second end 216 .
- the first and second ends 214 , 216 may each translate forward.
- the portions may be secured together such that one can be moved by moving another.
- One of the portions may be drivingly connected to the other portion.
- the portions may be connected by a linking member 734 .
- the linking member 734 may be a mechanical linkage.
- the linking member 734 may include an arm, such as an arm of fixed length or a telescoping arm.
- the linking member 734 may include an electromechanical member.
- the electromechanical member of the linking member 734 may be responsive to movement of one position, and respond by moving the other simultaneously or sequentially (e.g., after a predetermined time delay or change in the separation distance 684 ).
- Portions secured together may be fixed together with a constant separation distance 684 between them (e.g., translate together as one body), or may be separated by a variable separation distance 684 .
- portions may be joined by a telescoping arm such that a range of separation distances are possible.
- the axially moveable end portion 680 may include the chamber second end wall 224 or a portion thereof and/or the air treatment outlet 232 or a portion thereof.
- the air treatment outlet 232 may include a porous member 422 (e.g., a screen or a pre-motor filter received in the air treatment outlet 232 ) and the axially moveable end portion 680 may include at least a portion of the porous member 422 , and optionally the entire porous member.
- the axially moveable end portion 680 may include at least a portion of the pre-motor filter housing 334 , e.g., a forward portion 686 of the pre-motor filter housing and a laterally encircling wall 688 .
- the axially moveable end portion 680 may not include an end wall 690 of the pre-motor filter housing 334 that is at an end of the pre-motor filter housing which is farthest from the chamber first end 214 (e.g., a rearward end of the pre-motor filter housing 334 , as exemplified).
- the axially moveable end portion 680 may include at least a portion of or the entirety of the suction motor housing 324 and accordingly the suction motor 322 may be moveable with the axially moveable end portion 680 .
- the axially moveable end portion 680 may be moveably secured to a supporting sidewall 692 of the air treatment assembly 200 and/or the main body 120 .
- the supporting sidewall 692 may include the chamber sidewall 220 and/or the main body sidewall 192 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include, as exemplified, a track 730 along which the axially moveable end portion 680 moves.
- the axially moveable end portion 680 may slide along the track 730 .
- the track 730 may be a linear track 730 .
- the track 730 may be parallel to the supporting sidewall 692 of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the track 730 may be provided in the supporting sidewall 692 .
- the track 730 may include a member embedded in the supporting sidewall 692 , or may include a channel formed in the supporting sidewall 692 .
- the supporting sidewall 692 and the track 730 are each axially extending.
- the track 730 may include a sealing member 732 received between the axially moveable end portion 680 and a wall along which the axially moveable end portion 680 moves.
- the sealing member 732 may be, e.g., a felt sealing member.
- the sealing member 732 may separate the axially moveable end portion 680 from a wall (e.g., the chamber sidewall 220 ) along which the axially moveable end portion slides.
- the sealing member 732 may be sandwiched between the axially moveable end portion 680 and the chamber sidewall 220 throughout the movement between the closed position and the open position.
- the track 730 may be a dedicated track along which an axially moveable end portion 680 moves, with a separate track provided for each axially moveable end portion.
- more than one axially moveable end portion is carried by a common track 730 .
- an axially moveable second end portion 680 b is coupled to the track directly while an axially moveable first end portion 680 a is coupled to the track indirectly (e.g., via the axially moveable first end portion 680 a ).
- the axially moveable first end portion 680 a is an axially moveable end portion 680 that includes at least a portion of the chamber first end 214 .
- the axially moveable second end portion 680 b is an axially moveable end portion 680 that includes at least a portion of the chamber second end 216 .
- the track may include a rail 710 between the axially moveable end portion 680 and the supporting sidewall 692 .
- the axially moveable end portion 680 may ride along the rail 710 as the axially moveable end portion 680 moves between the first and second positions.
- the rail 710 is a telescoping rail, as exemplified.
- the telescoping rail may include at least a first rail body 712 and a second rail body 714 .
- the second rail body may be moveably secured to the first rail body 712 and moveable between a retracted position generally coextensive with the first rail body 712 and an extended position extending past an end of the first rail body 712 .
- the first rail body 712 may be secured to one of the axially moveable end portion 680 and the supporting sidewall 692
- the second rail body 714 may be secured to the other of the axially moveable end portion 680 and the supporting sidewall 692 .
- the at least a portion of the second end portion 680 b may move concurrently or sequentially (e.g., subsequent to) with the at least a portion of the first end portion 680 a.
- the subsequent movement may be delayed by a predetermined time period.
- the predetermined time period may be, e.g., between 0.1 seconds and 10 seconds, between 0.1 seconds and 5 seconds, or between 0.1 seconds and 2 seconds.
- the subsequent movement may be delayed by a predetermined change in the separation distance 684 .
- the predetermined change may be, e.g., between 0.1 times and 2 times the original separation distance, between 0.2 times and 1 time the original separation distance, or between 0.2 times and 0.5 times the original separation distance.
- a delay allows dirt in the air treatment chamber to decompress, and may loosen the dirt. For example, elongated dirt, such as hair. may decompress.
- the at least a portion of the second end portion 680 b is moved by opening the at least a portion of the first end portion 680 a, but the separation distance 684 between the two is greater subsequent to the movement than prior to the movement. A greater separation distance provides further space for the dirt received therebetween to decompress.
- the axially moveable end portion 680 may be moved by any suitable driving member, including any discussed with moving the chamber first end 214 to the open position.
- the air treatment chamber 210 may be emptiable by opening the chamber first end 214 and moving at least a portion of the chamber second end 216 axially towards the chamber first end 214 .
- a fluid driven moveable member of the surface cleaning apparatus e.g., part or all of the first end 214 and or the second opposed end 216
- fluid pressure which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the operable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- a fluid driven moveable member 720 of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is moveable via fluid pressure between a first position and a second position.
- the fluid pressure may be air pressure (i.e., suction) generated by an air moving member of the surface cleaning apparatus or a docking station or exhaust air from a suction motor.
- the fluid driven moveable member 720 when the apparatus is docked, the fluid driven moveable member 720 , which is in the first position, may be received in the evacuation air flow path such that air flow through the evacuation air flow path will act on the fluid driven moveable member 720 when the fluid driven moveable member is in the first position to move the fluid driven moveable member 720 to a second or evacuation position.
- air flow through the evacuation air flow path may move the fluid driven member from the first position (i.e., towards the second position).
- the first position may be referred to as the operational, cleaning or use position.
- Such air flow may be produced by a suction motor in the surface cleaning apparatus, the docking station or both.
- air flow through the apparatus air flow path when the surface cleaning apparatus is not docked may act on the fluid driven moveable member 720 to move the fluid driven member from the first position to the second.
- fluid driven moveable member 720 may move (push or pull) part or all of the first end 214 and or the second opposed end 216 axially, such as along a rail 710 as discussed previously.
- An air impermeable member may be moved to enable air flow to move the fluid driven moveable member 720 .
- a valve or other closure member may be provided to close part of the air flow path 160 such that air flow may move the fluid driven moveable member 720 .
- the air impermeable member may be moved to an evacuation position. In which air flow may act on the fluid driven moveable member 720 to move the fluid driven moveable member 720 and therefore part or all of the first end 214 and or the second opposed end 216 may be moved.
- the valve may be moved to close the vortex finder (e.g., it may be moved to close the outlet port at the downstream end of the vortex finder), e.g., by an actuator as discussed elsewhere herein or by air flow from the suction motor of the surface cleaning apparatus and/or the docking station drawing air in a reverse flow direction through the air treatment assembly thereby pushing or drawing the valve to close the port.
- the air flow path between the suction motor and the vortex finder may become sealed and form an evacuation air flow path and air flow may push the second opposed end 216 , and the first end 214 if linked thereto) axially forwardly to open the dirt collection region.
- the air impermeable member e.g., valve
- the air impermeable member is moved, (e.g., by air flow or a biasing member or an electromechanical member or the like) to an operational position (e.g., the valve does not close the outlet port of the vortex finder).
- the valve may be moveable axially.
- the fluid driven moveable member 720 may include or consist of the chamber first end 214 and/or a moveable portion thereof and/or the chamber second end 216 or a moveable portion thereof and the ends may be linked for movement as discussed previously.
- the moveable portion of the chamber second end may move forwardly as dirt is sucked out of dirt collection region 300 when the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is docked with the docking station 390 .
- the fluid driven moveable member 720 is biased to the evacuation (dirt emptying) position. Air pressure may move the fluid driven moveable member 720 to the operating (surface cleaning) position. When suction is terminated, then the fluid driven moveable member 720 moves to the evacuation position. Alternately, the fluid driven moveable member 720 may be biased to the operating position. Suction may move the fluid driven moveable member 720 to the evacuation position. When suction is terminated, then the fluid driven moveable member 720 moves to the operating position. Alternately, the fluid driven moveable member 720 is not biased to either position. Suction from the air moving member of the evacuation air flow path 392 , through the evacuation air flow path 392 , may move the fluid driven moveable member 720 to the evacuation position. Suction from the suction motor 322 , through the apparatus air flow path 160 , may move the fluid driven moveable member 720 to the operating position.
- the following is a description of the positioning and mounting of the user interface 360 on the handle, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the operable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- the user interface may be provided on the handle, e.g., an upper end of the handle or a lower end of the handle 124 , an energy storage member 350 , an energy storage member housing 381 ( FIG. 5 ) configured to receive the energy storage member 350 , or a supporting body that overlies a portion of the main body 120 such as a rearwardly or upwardly facing portion of a body
- the user interface 360 may be provided at an upper end of the pistol grip handle 124 . This location provides the user interface at a convenient location for a user of the interface.
- the user interface 360 may be located within an upper half, upper third, or upper quarter of a length of the handle 124 along the handle longitudinal axis 128 when the apparatus upper end 106 is above the apparatus lower end 108 .
- the user interface 360 may be located within a lower half, lower third, or lower quarter of a length of the handle 124 along the handle longitudinal axis 128 when the apparatus upper end 106 is above the apparatus lower end 108 .
- the user interface 360 is on a rear portion of the upper end of the pistol grip handle 124 when the apparatus rear end 104 is rearward of the apparatus front end 102 .
- the user interface 360 may be above the hand grip portion 126 of the handle 124 .
- the user interface 360 may overly the main body housing 122 , such as the portion of the main body housing 122 that houses the suction motor 322 . Accordingly, the user interface 360 may overly or be rearward of the suction motor housing 324 , at a rear end of the main body. As exemplified, the main body housing 122 has a rear end 756 , and the user interface 360 may overly the rear end 756 . The rear end 756 may be a rear end of the suction motor housing 324 . Accordingly, the user interface may be a separate member such that the user interface is not attached to the suction motor housing or the main body and may be attached to the handle but positioned overlying the motor housing, e.g., a rear end of the main body.
- the user interface 360 is at a rear end of the main body housing 122 and overlies a rear end of the suction motor housing 324 .
- the user interface 360 may be spaced from the suction motor housing 324 by a separation air gap 742 .
- the user interface 360 may alternatively, or additionally, be separated from the main body housing 122 by one or more other bodies, such as a post-motor filter 332 or post-motor filter housing 340 .
- the user interface 360 may include or be provided on a supporting body 740 .
- the supporting body 740 is configured as a mount to receive the user interface 360 at a desired location, e.g., overlying the main body housing 122 (e.g., overlying or rearward of the suction motor housing 324 , at a rear end of the main body). Accordingly, the supporting body 740 may extend over (e.g., spaced from and facing, or facing and optionally abutting) the main body housing 122 . As exemplified in FIGS. 69 and 70 , the supporting body 740 is part of the rear end of the hand vacuum cleaner and is mounted rearward of the suction motor housing 324 .
- the user interface 360 may include a facing surface 744 facing or directly facing a housing facing surface 746 across the gap 742 .
- the facing surface 744 and the housing facing surface 746 are separated by a generally constant distance across the faces.
- the user interface 360 may be rearward of the main body housing.
- the user interface 360 may overly the main body rear face 194 of the main body housing 122 .
- the main body rear face 194 may form the housing facing surface.
- the user interface 360 faces rearwardly.
- the user interface includes a surface visible from rearward of the surface cleaning apparatus along the apparatus longitudinal axis.
- the user interface 360 may form a rear face of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 as a whole.
- the surface cleaning apparatus may not include any further body rearwardly overlying a rear face of the user interface 360 .
- the user interface 360 forms a rearmost portion of the apparatus upper end 106 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 includes a support arm 750 that retains the supporting body 740 at the desired location.
- the support arm 750 extends between a first arm end 752 and a second arm end 754 .
- the first arm end 752 may be secured or directly secured to the main body 120 (e.g., the main body housing 122 ), the suction motor housing and/or the handle.
- the support arm may be a separate part that is secured (e.g., mounted to) the main body 120 .
- the support arm 750 (e.g., first arm end 752 ) may be secured to the handle, e.g., an upper end fop the handle.
- the second arm end 754 provides support for the user interface 360 and may be secured or directly secured to the user interface 360 and/or secured or directly secured to the supporting body 740 .
- the support arm 750 may join lower ends of the supporting body 740 and the main body housing 122 . Accordingly, the support arm 750 enables the support body 740 to be mounted at an alternate location, such as a rear end of the main body.
- the support arm may extend rearwardly from the main body 120 .
- the support arm 750 may extend from the main body rear face 194 , and may extend to the supporting body 740 .
- the support arm 750 may extend from the pistol grip handle 124 , such as the upper end 130 of the pistol grip handle 124 (i.e., above the hand grip portion).
- the support arm 750 may extend rearwardly from the upper end 130 of the pistol grip handle 124 . Accordingly, the support arm may be or may extend to a position that is rearward of the suction motor.
- the gap 742 may be contained within and/or exterior to cladding 758 , which bridges the lateral edges 760 of the gap (Le., radially outward edges with respect to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 ). Accordingly, the gap 742 may not be visible from an exterior of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 .
- the cladding 758 holds the supporting member 740 in position, e.g., it may be secured to the rear end of the main body (e.g., the motor housing) and/or upper end 130 of the handle, and the support arm 750 may not be included.
- the user interface 360 overlying the main body housing does not include any interface toggles or controls 362 .
- the user interface 360 overlying the main body housing 122 may include one or more information displays 364 , without including interface toggles 362 , such as to avoid running wires from that interface back through the motor housing. If controls are provided or a readout from sensors is required, then wires may extend along of through the support arm 750 .
- the main body 120 has a cavity 770 provided at the apparatus rear end 104 , and the suction motor 322 is positioned in the cavity 770 and a user interface 360 is provided on or at the apparatus rear end 104 .
- the suction motor housing 324 may also be in the cavity 770 .
- the user interface 360 may accordingly overly the suction motor 322 and/or suction motor housing 324 in the cavity 770 .
- the user interface 360 may be separated from the suction motor 322 and/or suction motor housing 324 by a portion of the cavity 770 (i.e., an air gap).
- the apparatus rear end 104 includes an apparatus rear wall 772 , which may be a rear wall of the cavity 770 .
- the user interface 360 may be provided on the apparatus rear wall 772 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include an annular portion 780 .
- the annular portion 780 may be a ring-shaped body or a portion of an annular body (e.g., an annulus sector) that has a radial or generally radial outwardly facing surface.
- the annular portion 780 may be integrally formed with the main body 120 , or, as exemplified, an independently formed body directly or indirectly secured to the main body 120 , e.g., by a support arm 740 and or a supporting body 740 .
- the annular portion is part of the apparatus rear end 104 .
- the user interface 360 may be provided on the annular portion 780 (e.g., on the radial or generally radial outwardly facing surface).
- the user interface 360 may be secured to the annular portion or be part of the annular portion.
- the user interface 360 may be curved to follow an annular surface of the annular portion 780 .
- the user interface 360 may include a substrate 782 , such as a flexible panel.
- the substrate 782 may be curved when mounted to the annular portion 780 .
- the user interface 360 may include one or more interface toggles 362 or controls and/or information displays 364 on the substrate 782 .
- the user interface 360 may include an information display 364 having a display surface that faces radially outward.
- the information display 364 may be a screen having a display surface facing radially outward (i.e., generally perpendicular to an annular longitudinal axis 784 of the annular portion 780 ) and optionally upwardly.
- the information display 364 may be, e.g., an illuminated icon with an illuminated surface facing radially outward.
- the substrate 782 has a radially outward-facing surface on which the information display is provided.
- the user interface 360 may include a plurality of information displays facing radially outward.
- a protective cover 786 overlies the information display 364 .
- the user interface 360 may also, or alternatively, include an information display 364 having a display surface that faces rearwardly.
- a filter that is visible through and/or removeable through the user interface 360 , which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 includes a filter 790 that is removeable from an installed position ( FIG. 71 ) to a removed position ( FIG. 72 ) outside the main body housing 122 .
- the filter 790 is moveable between the installed and removed positions along a removal path 792 .
- the removal path 792 may extend through the user interface 360 between the installed position and the removed position. Accordingly, a rearwardly removable filter may be removable while the user interface 360 remains in position as the filter is removed.
- the filter 790 may be, e.g., the post-motor filter 332 .
- the filter 790 may be a rearwardly removeable filter and the removal path 792 may extend generally parallel to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 , or may include at least a rearward component to a motion vector at each point along the removal path 792 .
- the filter 790 When installed, the filter 790 may be at the apparatus rear end 104 .
- the filter 790 may be part of the apparatus rear end 104 .
- the apparatus rear end 104 includes a rear wall 772 (e.g., the main body rear wall 196 ), and the rear wall 772 may be part of a filter housing 796 for the filter 790 (e.g., the post-motor filter housing 340 ), and may optionally remove with the filter 790 .
- the user interface 360 is provided at the apparatus rear end 104 and may be part of the apparatus rear end 104 .
- the user interface may be on an annular member or an annulus sector or it may be part of an annular member or an annulus sector.
- the user interface 360 may be provided radially outward of the filter 790 and/or the filter housing 796 in the installed position, radially outward of the filter in a partially removed position, and/or radially outward of the removal path 792 .
- the user interlace 360 is has a central hollow portion (e.g., it may be annular), then the user interface 360 may surround the filter 790 and/or the filter housing 796 in the installed position, radially outward of the filter in a partially removed position, and/or radially outward of the removal path 792 .
- the user interface 360 is part of the filter housing 796 .
- a radially-removable post-motor filter 332 which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- a filter 800 is removable radially outwardly with respect to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 .
- the filter 800 e.g., which may be the post-motor filter 332
- the filter 800 may be removeable in a direction that is generally perpendicular to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 .
- the filter 800 is removeable between an installed position ( FIG. 73 ) and a removed position ( FIG. 74 ), and is removeable along a removal path 802 .
- the removal path 802 may be a radially extending path, as exemplified.
- the removal path 802 may be a laterally extending path 802 .
- the filter 800 may overly at least a portion of the suction motor 322 and/or the suction motor housing 324 .
- the filter 800 is seated on the suction motor housing 324 .
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include a plurality of radially removeable filters 800 (e.g., two or more).
- the plurality of radially removeable filters 800 may each be separately removeable or concurrently removably.
- Each of the plurality of radially removeable filters may separately overly the at least a portion of the suction motor 322 and/or the suction motor housing 324 .
- Each of the plurality of radially removeable filters may separately be seated on the suction motor housing 324 .
- One or more of the plurality of radially removeable filters 800 may remove in a different direction to one or more other filters of the plurality of filters.
- each of which is shaped as an annulus sector (e.g., they may be semi-circular filters 800 ), are provided.
- the filters 800 are removeable in opposite directions.
- the removal path of each filter is generally horizontal (lateral) when the apparatus upper end 106 is above the apparatus lower end 108 , and may be generally parallel to the apparatus transverse axis 114 . It will be appreciated that if the position of the filters is rotated 90°, then the filters may be removable radially but one would remove upwardly and one would remove downwardly.
- a filter that is at least partially nested within the air treatment outlet 232 , which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, the user interface on the handle, the user interface overlying the main body housing, the user interface on an annular portion, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- a filter which may be the pre-motor filter 330 , is at least partially nested within the air treatment outlet 232 . Nesting the filter may allow the surface cleaning apparatus 100 to have a shorter axial length without shortening a pre-motor filter.
- the porous member 422 of the air treatment outlet 232 may be rigid, e.g., it may be a screen that is made of a mesh material. As exemplified, the screen may be conical or frusto-conical in shape. It will be appreciated that the air treatment outlet 232 may be any shaped which enables a filter to be at least partially nested therein.
- the filter may itself be rigid.
- a pre-motor filter 330 may comprise a pleated filter material 814 .
- the pleated filter material includes pleats 816 , and the pleats 816 may extend in a forward/rearward direction.
- the pleats 816 may extend generally parallel to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110 .
- the pre-motor filter 330 may have a hollow interior 818 .
- the hollow interior 818 may be downstream of the pleated filter material 814 .
- the hollow interior 818 may have an outlet end 820 , and a suction motor inlet end 822 of the suction motor 322 may face the outlet end 820 of the hollow interior 818 when the filter is in an operational position. It will be appre 3 ciated that any filter material f any shape may be used.
- the filter is at least partially nested in the air treatment outlet 232 , e.g., a vortex finder.
- the filter may extend part way into the air treatment outlet 232 or substantially the entre way into the air treatment outlet 232 .
- the forward end of the filter is located at a forward end of a vortex finder.
- the filter may be nested into the air treatment outlet 232 . As exemplified in FIG. 64 , about half of the filter is nested in the air treatment outlet 232 . As exemplified, the filter may include an unnested (rearward) end 812 opposite the nested end 810 , wherein the unnested end being outside the air treatment chamber 210 and/or outside the air treatment outlet 232 . The unnested end 812 may have a larger diameter than would be practical within the air treatment outlet 232 . It will be appreciated that 25%, 50%, 75% or more of the filter may be nested in the air treatment outlet 232 .
- the filter may have a similar shape as the air treatment outlet 232 but with a smaller diameter.
- the filter is a rigid frusto-conical pre-motor filter.
- the filter may also be frusto-conical but with a diameter at a nested (forward) end 810 that is small enough to allow the air flow path to extend past the nested end 810 internal of the air treatment outlet 232 .
- the air treatment outlet 232 and the nested end 810 of the filter are each axially inward of the air treatment chamber inlet opening 234 .
- ultraviolet disinfection which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 includes an ultraviolet light source 830 .
- the ultraviolet light source 830 is operable to generate ultraviolet light.
- the ultraviolet light source 830 may be arranged to direct the ultraviolet light onto an interior and/or exterior surface of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 to disinfect the interior and/or exterior surface.
- the light may be used to kill biological material on an interior surface that would cause an odour.
- the light may be used to kill biological material on an exterior surface that could be harmful to the user when the user uses the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., the exterior surface may be a surface of the handle).
- the ultraviolet light source 830 may be arranged to direct the ultraviolet light into a light carrying structure 832 (such as a light pipe) to be carried by the light carrying structure 832 to a distal location.
- a light carrying structure 832 such as a light pipe
- the source may be provided in the main body housing and the light carrying structure may carry the light to the handle and/or the interior of the air treatment chamber.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include at least one member that is transparent to ultraviolet light, and the ultraviolet light may be directed through the transparent member (inwardly, e.g., into an air treatment chamber, or outwardly, through a handle).
- the transparent member may be a wall of the handle 124 , and light may be directed to the external surface of the UV transparent wall of the handle 124 from within the handle 124 to disinfect an external surface of the handle 124 .
- the ultraviolet light source 830 may be activated when the surface cleaning apparatus 100 is docked at a docking station or placed in a storage position wherein a user is not holding the surface cleaning apparatus.
- a dirt scoop which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, and the ultraviolet disinfection, which are set out herein.
- the surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include a dirt scoop 840 .
- the dirt scoop 840 is moveable between an operational position ( FIG. 75 ) and an evacuation position ( FIG. 76 ) wherein as the dirt scoop moves between the operational position and the evacuation position, the dirt scoop physically engages dirt in the air treatment member and moves the dirt outwardly from the air treatment member.
- the dirt scoop 840 in the operational position, is located in the air treatment chamber 210 . It will be appreciated that the dirt scoop may be of any shape and may extend any amount into the air treatment member. As exemplified, the dirt scoop 840 is a linearly extending member.
- the dirt scoop 840 may be mounted to a moveable carrying member 842 .
- the dirt scoop 840 is mounted to or provided as part of the air treatment inlet 230 .
- the moveable carrying member 842 may move when the evacuation opening 410 is opened.
- the moveable carrying member 842 may be pivotally mounted, and may move about a pivot axis when the evacuation opening 410 is opened.
- the dirt scoop 840 moves with the moveable carrying member 842 .
- the dirt scoop As the dirt scoop is moves with, e.g., the air treatment inlet 230 , it passes through part of the free volume 470 of the air treatment chamber 210 and may help to dislodge dirt within the air treatment chamber.
- the dirt scoop may sweep through part or all of the free volume 470 to dislodge dirt and move the dirt towards or out the evacuation opening 410 .
- the dirt scoop 840 may extend between a first end 850 and an opposite second end 852 , with the first end 850 mounted to the moveable carrying member 842 and the second end 852 following an arc-shaped path 854 through the chamber.
- the moveable carrying member 842 may be the air treatment inlet 230 .
- the dirt scoop may include a linearly extending member 846 extending into the air treatment chamber from the moveable carrying member.
- the dirt scoop may extend along a scoop longitudinal axis 844 between a first end and a second end opposite the first end.
- the dirt scoop may be rigid or flexible.
- the dirt scoop 840 may be positioned adjacent the chamber sidewall 220 in the operational position.
- the dirt scoop 840 may be spaced from the chamber sidewall 220 by, e.g., less than 10 mm, less than 5 mm, or less than 1 mm in the operational position.
- the scoop longitudinal axis 844 may be generally parallel to the chamber sidewall 220 in the operation position. As such, the dirt scoop may be positioned out of the air flow path of air in the air treatment chamber (e.g., it may be flush with or recessed into a sidewall of the air treatment chamber.
- X and/or Y is intended to mean X or Y or both, for example.
- X, Y, and/or Z is intended to mean X or Y or Z or any combination thereof.
- the portable cleaning unit is removably mountable to the floor cleaning unit whereby, when the portable cleaning unit is mounted to the floor cleaning unit, the surface cleaning apparatus is operable in an upright vacuum cleaner mode and, when the portable cleaning unit is removed from the floor cleaning unit, the portable cleaning unit is operable in an above floor cleaning mode, and
- the air flow rate is the second flow rate and when the portable cleaning unit is operated in the above floor cleaning mode, the air flow rate is the first flow rate.
- the portable cleaning unit is removably mountable to the floor cleaning unit whereby, when the portable cleaning unit is mounted to the floor cleaning unit, the surface cleaning apparatus is operable in an upright vacuum cleaner mode and, when the portable cleaning unit is removed from the floor cleaning unit, the portable cleaning unit is operable in an above floor cleaning mode, and
- the suction motor when the surface cleaning apparatus is operated in the upright vacuum cleaner mode, the suction motor has provided to it the second power level and when the portable cleaning unit is operated in the above floor cleaning mode, the suction motor has provided to it the first power level.
- the portable cleaning unit is removably mountable to the floor cleaning unit whereby, when the portable cleaning unit is mounted to the floor cleaning unit, the surface cleaning apparatus is operable in a floor cleaner mode and, when the portable cleaning unit is removed from the floor cleaning unit, the portable cleaning unit is operable in an above floor cleaning mode, and wherein, mounting the portable cleaning unit to the floor cleaning unit moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position.
- closure member moves in a first direction from the open position to the closed position and in a second direction from the closed position to the open position
- driving member is operable to move the closure member in at least one of the first and second directions
- the portable cleaning unit is removably mountable to the floor cleaning unit whereby, when the portable cleaning unit is mounted to the floor cleaning unit, the surface cleaning apparatus is operable in a floor cleaner mode and, when the portable cleaning unit is removed from the floor cleaning unit, the portable cleaning unit is operable in an above floor cleaning mode, and
- mounting the portable cleaning unit to the floor cleaning unit moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position.
- the rib extends co-extensively along at least a portion of the cyclone chamber in which the impermeable portion is provided.
- a rib which is positioned between the cyclone air outlet and the sidewall, extends in a generally axial direction.
- the air treatment chamber is emptyable by opening the first end of the air treatment chamber housing and moving at least a portion of the second end axially towards the first end of the air treatment chamber.
- a hand surface cleaning apparatus having a front end and a rear end, the hand surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- the filter is removable rearwardly.
- the rear end of the hand vacuum cleaner comprises an annular portion and the user interface is provided on the annular portion.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Cleaning In General (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- This application is:
-
- (a) a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application Ser. No. 16/818,438, filed on Mar. 31, 2020, which is allowed, which itself claims priority from co-pending United States Provisional Patent Application No. 62/818,856, filed on Mar. 15, 2019, and also claims priority from U.S. patent application Ser. No. 62/1825,148, filed on Mar. 28, 2019;
- (b) a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/458,217 which was filed on Aug. 26, 2021, which itself is continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/342,410, filed on Jun. 8, 2021, which itself is a continuation of:
- a. U.S. patent Application Ser. No. 16/822,708, filed on Mar. 18, 2020;
- b. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/823,191 filed on Mar. 18, 2020;
- c. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/823,203, filed on Mar. 18, 2020; and,
- d. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/823,216, filed on Mar. 18, 2020 and issued as U.S. Pat. No. 11/445,878 on Sep. 20, 2022;
- (c) a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/342299 which was filed on Jun. 8, 2021, which itself is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/900,465, filed on Jun. 12, 2020 and issued as U.S. Pat. No. 11,445,875 on Sep. 20, 2020, which itself is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/642,781, filed Jul. 6, 2017, and issued as U.S. Pat. No. 10,722,086 on Jul. 28, 2020; and,
- (d) a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/694,362 which was filed on Mar. 14, 2022, which itself is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/471.041, filed on Sep. 9, 2021, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/806,726, filed on Mar. 2, 2020, and issued as U.S. Pat. No. 11,219,906 on Jan. 11, 2022, which itself is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/447,308, filed on Jun. 20, 2019 and issued as U.S. Pat. No. 10,966,583 on Apr. 6, 2021, which itself is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/254,918, filed on Jan. 23, 2019 and issued as U.S. Pat. No. 10,828,649 on Nov. 10, 2020.
- the entirety of each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- This disclosure relates generally to surface cleaning apparatus such as hand vacuum cleaners, upright vacuum cleaners, stick vacuum cleaners or canister vacuum cleaners, and, in particular, portable surface cleaning apparatus, such as hand vacuum cleaners.
- The following is not an admission that anything discussed below is part of the prior art or part of the common general knowledge of a person skilled in the art.
- Various types of surface cleaning apparatus are known, including upright surface cleaning apparatus, canister surface cleaning apparatus, stick surface cleaning apparatus, central vacuum systems, and hand carriable surface cleaning apparatus such as hand vacuum cleaners. Further, various designs for cyclonic surface cleaning apparatus, including battery operated cyclonic hand vacuum cleaners are known in the art.
- The following introduction is provided to introduce the reader to the more detailed discussion to follow. The introduction is not intended to limit or define any claimed or as yet unclaimed invention. One or more inventions may reside in any combination or sub-combination of the elements or process steps disclosed in any part of this document including its claims and figures.
- In accordance with an aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, a surface cleaning apparatus includes an air treatment assembly. A rib extends into a chamber of the assembly from a wall of the chamber, which may be a cyclone. The rib interrupts air flow, which may be cyclonic air flow, and encourages dirt accumulation adjacent the rib. The rib may be at one of the ends of the chamber, and optionally at an end at which an air outlet of the chamber is located. The rib may extend inwardly into the air treatment chamber from the air treatment chamber end wall (e.g., the outlet end wall). The rib may extend radially into the air treatment chamber from an air treatment chamber sidewall (e.g., radially inwardly) and/or axially from the air treatment chamber end wall. The air treatment chamber air outlet may comprise an air permeable portion through which the air flow path extends. The outlet may also include an air impermeable portion. The air permeable portion may be a porous portion comprising a porous material that extends inwardly from the air impermeable portion. The rib may extend co-extensively (i.e., with respect to a cyclone axis) along at least a portion of the cyclone chamber in which the impermeable portion of the outlet is provided.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, the air treatment inlet conduit extends into the air treatment chamber from an upstream opening to a downstream opening. The downstream opening may be a tangential opening into the chamber when the chamber is a cyclone chamber. The inlet may include an air permeable section (e.g., covered by porous material such as a mesh) that is discrete from the downstream opening of the inlet conduit. The bulk of air is directed through the downstream opening, which may be referred to as the primary opening. A lesser volume of air is allowed to pass through the air permeable section from the air treatment inlet conduit into the air treatment chamber. The downstream opening and the air permeable section provide alternate air exits which concurrently permit air flow therethrough. The air permeable section forms a secondary pathway between the air treatment inlet conduit and the air treatment chamber. This secondary pathway results in a reduction of the power required for the motor to produce a given air flow rate.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, the axial length of the downstream opening of the inlet conduit is variable. The axial length of the downstream opening may be varied to change the separation characteristics of the surface cleaning apparatus, such as to change backpressure or to change the ratio between an effective air inlet axial length and the chamber axial length. The ratio between the effective air inlet axial length and the chamber axial length affects the number of turns that air passing through the cyclone chamber is subject to, and so affects the efficiency of the surface cleaning apparatus. The axial length may be changed manually by a user or automatically, e.g., in response to, e.g., detecting that finer particles are being collected or that particles are making past the air treatment assembly of the surface cleaning apparatus.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, the air treatment inlet is selectively closeable by a closure member. When the closure member is in the open position, during operation of the surface cleaning apparatus, air flows through the air treatment inlet to the air treatment chamber. When the closure member is in the closed position, air flow through the air treatment inlet is inhibited. The closure member may be curved along at least one dimension with respect to a coordinate system defined by the apparatus longitudinal axis, the apparatus vertical axis, and the apparatus tangential axis. The closure member may therefore be referred to as a curved member. Optionally, the closure member is curved with respect only to a single dimension, as exemplified. In other words, the closure member may be arcuate in shape. The closure member may pivot about a closure axis of rotation between an open position and a closed position.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, the closure member moves axially with respect to the air treatment member longitudinal axis and/or the inlet conduit axis. The closure member may be an end wall of the air treatment inlet. The inlet end wall may extend transverse to the flow direction. The inlet end wall may include a generally planar inlet end wall upstream face, which may extend generally perpendicular to the flow direction. Alternatively, the closure member may close a tangential inlet to the air treatment chamber. The closure member may be received against a sidewall of the air treatment inlet and translate axially to close the tangential inlet.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, the air treatment assembly has an assembly free volume that includes the chamber free volume within the chamber and an inlet free volume within the air treatment inlet. The chamber free volume is an open space within the air treatment chamber outside the air treatment inlet and the air treatment outlet. The inlet free volume is an open space within the air treatment inlet that would be included in the air flow path if the closure member was not included in the surface cleaning apparatus. The closure member in the open position may be at least partially removed from the assembly free volume. The closure member in the open position may be fully removed from the assembly free volume. This aspect reduces the extent to which the closure member inhibits air flow when in the open position and/or reduces turbulence caused by a significant discontinuity in the transverse cross sectional area of the air treatment inlet at a downstream edge of the closure member when the closure member is in the open position. The closure member is moveable between the open and closed positions, and, when in the open position may be at least partially received in a closure recess or partially moved into or through a closure passage. The recess may have a mouth or port through which it is open to the assembly free volume, and the closure member may close the port when the closure member is in the open position.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, the surface cleaning apparatus includes a driving member drivingly connected to the closure member. The closure member may move in a first direction from the open position to the closed position. The closure member may move in a second direction from the closed position to the open position. The driving member may be operable to move the closure member in at least one of the first and second directions. The driving member may be any suitable driving member. The driving member may include a closure member actuator, such as an electromechanical actuator. The driving member may include a manually moveable member. The driving member may include a suction-powered piston. The driving member may include an external conduit (e.g., a removable wand) removably insertable into the surface cleaning apparatus.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, at least a portion of a first end of the chamber is moveable between a closed operating position and an open position. The chamber first end may include the evacuation opening, and the evacuation opening may be closed when the moveable portion of the chamber first end is in the closed operating position and open when the moveable portion of the chamber first end is in the open position. The moveable portion may be rotationally moveable, translationally moveable, or inflatable and deflatable. A docking station may be operable to move the moveable portion of the chamber first end between the closed operating position and the open position.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, at least a portion of an end of the air treatment chamber is translatable generally parallel to the chamber longitudinal axis. The axially moveable end portion is moveable between a first position and a second position that is axially spaced from the first position. The second position may be forward of the first position. The axially moveable end portion may act as a plunger, e.g., to move debris through the chamber.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, opening at least a portion of the chamber first end moves at least a portion of the chamber second end. The at least a portion of the chamber second end that moves in response to opening the at least a portion of the chamber first end may be joined thereto by a linking member. The at least a portion of the chamber second end that moves in response to opening the at least a portion of the chamber first end may be an axially moveable second end portion. The at least a portion of the chamber first end may be an axially moveable first end portion.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, a fluid driven moveable member of the surface cleaning apparatus is moveable via fluid pressure through the surface cleaning apparatus, and is moveable via the fluid pressure between a first position and a second position. It will be appreciated that the fluid pressure may be air pressure (i.e., suction) generated by an air moving member of the surface cleaning apparatus or docking station. The fluid driven moveable member may be received in the apparatus air flow path and/or the evacuation air flow path. The fluid driven moveable member may include or consist of the chamber first end or a moveable portion thereof. The fluid driven moveable member may include or consist of he chamber second end or a moveable portion thereof.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, a user interface is provided at an upper end of a pistol grip handle. This location provides the user interface at a convenient location for a user of the interface.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, the user interface overlies the main body housing. The main body housing may contain the suction motor. The user interface may overly the suction motor housing. The user interface may be separated such that the user interface is not attached to the suction motor housing. The user interface may be spaced from the main body housing, and may be spaced from the main body housing by a separation air gap.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, the surface cleaning apparatus includes an annular portion. The user interface may be provided on the annular portion. The user interface may be secured to the annular portion. Optionally, the annular portion is part of the apparatus rear end. The user interface may be curved to follow an annular surface of the annular portion. The user interface may include an information display having a display surface that faces radially outward. The user interface may also, or alternatively, include an information display having a display surface that faces rearwardly.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, the surface cleaning apparatus includes a filter that is removeable from an installed position to a removed position outside the main body housing. The filter is moveable between the installed and removed positions along a removal path. The removal path may extend past the user interface between the installed position and the removed position. The removal path may extend through the user interface. The filter may be, e.g., the post-motor filter. The post-motor filter may remove rearwardly though an annular user interface body.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, a filter is removable radially outwardly with respect to the apparatus longitudinal axis. The filter may be removeable in a direction that is generally perpendicular to the apparatus longitudinal axis. The filter is removeable between an installed position and a removed position, and is removeable along a removal path. The removal path may be a radially extending path, as exemplified. The removal path may be a laterally extending path. The removal path may be generally horizontal when the apparatus upper end is above the apparatus lower end, and may be generally parallel to the apparatus transverse axis. The surface cleaning apparatus may include a plurality of radially removable filters.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects a filter is at least partially nested within the air treatment outlet. Nesting the filter may allow the surface cleaning apparatus to have a shorter axial length. The filter at least partially nested withing the air treatment outlet may be the pre-motor filter.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, the surface cleaning apparatus includes an ultraviolet light source. The ultraviolet light source is operable to generate ultraviolet light. The ultraviolet light may be used to disinfect an interior or external surface of the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., a handle external surface or an internal surface facing the air flow path). The ultraviolet light source may be arranged to direct the ultraviolet light into a light carrying structure (such as a light pipe). The apparatus may include at least one wall that is transparent to ultraviolet light.
- In accordance with another aspect of this disclosure, which may be used alone or in combination with any one or more other aspects, the surface cleaning apparatus may include a dirt scoop. The dirt scoop is moveable between an operational position and an evacuation position. In the operational position, the dirt scoop extends into the air treatment chamber. As it moves to the evacuation position, the dirt scoop sweeps through the chamber to dislodge debris.
- It will be appreciated by a person skilled in the art that an apparatus or method disclosed herein may embody any one or more of the features contained herein and that the features may be used in any particular combination or sub-combination.
- These and other aspects and features of various embodiments will be described in greater detail below.
- For a better understanding of the described embodiments and to show more clearly how they may be carried into effect, reference will now be made, by way of example, to the accompanying drawings in which:
-
FIG. 1 is perspective view of a surface cleaning apparatus, according to an embodiment; -
FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 1 ; -
FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of an embodiment of a stick vacuum cleaner incorporating the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 1 in an upright storage position; -
FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the stick vacuum cleaner ofFIG. 3 in a reclined cleaning position; -
FIG. 5 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 1 ; -
FIG. 6 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of a portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 1 ; -
FIG. 7 is a transverse cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in an open position; -
FIG. 8 is a transverse cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 7 , with the closure member in a closed position; -
FIG. 9 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in an open position; -
FIG. 10 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 9 , with the closure member in a closed position; -
FIG. 11 is a transverse cross sectional view of another portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 1 ; -
FIG. 12 is another axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 1 ; -
FIG. 13 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of another portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 1 ; -
FIG. 14 is a transverse cross sectional view of another portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 1 ; -
FIG. 15 is another axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 1 ; -
FIG. 16 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of another portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 1 ; -
FIG. 17 is a perspective view of n end of an embodiment of an external onduit, such as a rigid wand; -
FIG. 18 is a perspective view of another embodiment of an external conduit; -
FIG. 19 is a perspective view of another embodiment of an external conduit; -
FIG. 20 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 1 having received therein the external conduit ofFIG. 19 ; -
FIG. 21 is a perspective view of another embodiment of an external conduit; -
FIG. 22 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus having received therein the external conduit ofFIG. 21 , with a moveable inlet member in a first position; -
FIG. 23 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 22 , with the moveable inlet member in a second position; -
FIG. 24 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a moveable inlet member in a first position; -
FIG. 25 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 24 , with the moveable inlet member in a second position; -
FIG. 26 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of a portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 24 , with the moveable inlet member in the second position: -
FIG. 27 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a moveable inlet member in a first position; -
FIG. 28 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 27 , with the moveable inlet member in a second position; -
FIG. 29 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a moveable inlet member in a first position; -
FIG. 30 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 29 , with the moveable inlet member in a second position; -
FIG. 31 is an axial cross sectional view of a portion of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position; -
FIG. 32 is an axial cross sectional view of the portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 31 , with the closure member in a second position; -
FIG. 33 is a transverse cross sectional view of an inlet of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 31 ; -
FIG. 34 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position; -
FIG. 35 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 34 , with the closure member in a second position; -
FIG. 36 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position; -
FIG. 37 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 36 , with the closure member in a second position; -
FIG. 38 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position; -
FIG. 39 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 38 , with the closure member in a second position; -
FIG. 40 is an axial cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position; -
FIG. 41 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 40 , with the closure member in a second position -
FIG. 42 is a transverse cross sectional view of a portion of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position; -
FIG. 43 is a transverse cross sectional view of the portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 42 , with the closure member in a second position; -
FIG. 44 is an axial cross sectional view of a portion of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a closure member in a first position: -
FIG. 45 is an axial cross sectional view of the portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 44 , with the closure member in a second position; -
FIG. 46 is a perspective view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus; -
FIG. 47 is an exploded view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 46 ; -
FIG. 48 is a front perspective view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 46 docked at a docking station; -
FIG. 49 is an axial cross sectional view of he surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 46 docked at the docking station; -
FIG. 50 is an expanded axial cross sectional view of a portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 46 docked at the docking station; -
FIG. 51 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 46 with a closure member in a first position; -
FIG. 52 is an axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 46 with the closure member in a second position; -
FIG. 53 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of another portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 46 with the closure member in the first position; -
FIG. 54 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of the other portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 46 with the closure member in the second position; -
FIG. 55 is a schematic cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a chamber first end in a first position and a chamber second end in a first position; -
FIG. 56 is a schematic cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 55 , with the chamber first end in a second position; -
FIG. 57 is a schematic cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 55 , with a chamber second end in a second position; -
FIG. 58 is a schematic cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 55 , with a chamber second end in a third position; -
FIG. 59 is a schematic cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a chamber first end in a first position and a chamber second end in a first position; -
FIG. 60 is a schematic cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 59 , with the chamber first end in a second position and the chamber second end in a second position; -
FIG. 61 is a schematic cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 59 , with the chamber first end in a third position and the chamber second end in a third position; -
FIG. 62 is a front perspective view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus; -
FIG. 63 is a rear perspective view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 62 ; -
FIG. 64 is a front perspective axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 62 ; -
FIG. 65 is a rear perspective axial cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 62 ; -
FIG. 66 is another rear perspective view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 62 ; -
FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 62 docked at a docking station; -
FIG. 68 is an axial cross sectional view of he surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 62 docked at the docking station; -
FIG. 69 is an enlarged axial cross sectional view of a portion of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 62 ; -
FIG. 70 is an exploded view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 62 ; -
FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a filter in a first position; -
FIG. 72 is a rear perspective view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 71 , with the filter in a second position; -
FIG. 73 is a schematic rear cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a filter in a first position; -
FIG. 74 is a schematic rear cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 73 , with the filter in a second position; -
FIG. 75 is a schematic cross sectional view of another embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus, with a dirt scoop in a first position; and, -
FIG. 76 is a schematic cross sectional view of the surface cleaning apparatus ofFIG. 75 , with the dirt scoop in a second position. - The drawings included herewith are for illustrating various examples of articles methods, and apparatuses of the teaching of the present specification and are not intended to limit the scope of what is taught in any way.
- Various apparatuses, methods and compositions are described below to provide an example of an embodiment of each claimed invention. No embodiment described below limits any claimed invention and any claimed invention may cover apparatuses and methods that differ from those described below. The claimed inventions are not limited to apparatuses, methods and compositions having all of the features of any one apparatus, method or composition described below or to features common to multiple or all of the apparatuses, methods or compositions described below. It is possible that an apparatus, method or composition described below is not an embodiment of any claimed invention. Any invention disclosed in an apparatus, method or composition described below that is not claimed in this document may be the subject matter of another protective instrument, for example, a continuing patent application, and the applicant(s), inventor(s) and/or owner(s) do not intend to abandon, disclaim, or dedicate to the public any such invention by its disclosure in this document.
- The terms “an embodiment,” “embodiment,” “embodiments,” “the embodiment,” “the embodiments,” “one or more embodiments,” “some embodiments,” and “one embodiment” mean “one or more (but not all) embodiments of the present invention(s),” unless expressly specified otherwise.
- The terms “including,” “comprising” and variations thereof mean “including but not limited to,” unless expressly specified otherwise. A listing of items does not imply that any or all of the items are mutually exclusive, unless expressly specified otherwise. The terms “a,” “an” and “the” mean “one or more,” unless expressly specified otherwise.
- As used herein and in the claims, two or more parts are said to be “coupled”, “connected”, “attached”, or “fastened” where the parts are joined or operate together either directly or indirectly (i.e., through one or more intermediate parts), so long as a link occurs. As used herein and in the claims, two or more parts are said to be “directly coupled”, “directly connected”, “directly attached”, or “directly fastened” where the parts are connected in physical contact with each other. None of the terms “coupled”, “connected”, “attached”, and “fastened” distinguish the manner in which two or more parts are joined together.
- Furthermore, it will be appreciated that for simplicity and clarity of illustration, where considered appropriate, reference numerals may be repeated among the figures to indicate corresponding or analogous elements. In addition, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the example embodiments described herein. However, it will be understood by those of ordinary skill in the art that the example embodiments described herein may be practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, and components have not been described in detail so as not to obscure the example embodiments described herein. Also, the description is not to be considered as limiting the scope of the example embodiments described herein.
- Referring to
FIGS. 1 and 2 , an exemplary embodiment of a surface cleaning apparatus is shown generally as 100. The surface cleaning apparatus is exemplified as a hand vacuum cleaner with an apparatusfront end 102, an apparatusrear end 104, an apparatusupper end 106 and an apparatuslower end 108. An apparatuslongitudinal axis 110 extends between the apparatusfront end 102 and the apparatusrear end 104. An apparatusvertical axis 112 extends between the apparatusupper end 106 and apparatuslower end 108. The apparatusvertical axis 112 is perpendicular to the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110. An apparatustransverse axis 114 is perpendicular to each of the apparatusvertical axis 112 and the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110. - The
surface cleaning apparatus 100 includes amain body 120. Themain body 120 includes amain body housing 122 and ahandle 124. - As exemplified, the
handle 124 may be a pistol grip handle with ahand grip portion 126 that extends generally vertically. Thehandle 124 has a longest dimension in the direction of a handlelongitudinal axis 128. As exemplified, the handlelongitudinal axis 128 may be generally transverse to the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110. - The
handle 124 may be a pistol grip handle with a handleupper end 130 of the pistol grip handle mounted to a lower end of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. Thehandle 124 may extend away from themain body housing 122. The handle may be below the suction motor, the pre-motor filter, and/or the air treatment assembly. Arranging the handle below a heavy and/or bulky component of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may result in a more desirable hand-feel of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. - The handle
upper end 130 may be mounted to one or more of a suction motor housing, the pre-motor filter housing and the air treatment assembly. For example, the handleupper end 130 may be mounted to each of the air treatment assembly and the pre-motor filter housing. Alternately, the handleupper end 130 may be mounted to each of the pre-motor filter housing and the suction motor housing. - It will be appreciated that the
main body housing 122 and/or handle 124 may be in other configurations, shapes, and/or positions in other embodiments. - The illustrated example surface cleaning apparatus is a hand vacuum cleaner, which may also be referred to as a “handvac” or “hand-held vacuum cleaner”. As used herein, a hand vacuum cleaner is a vacuum cleaner that can be operated to clean a surface generally one-handedly. That is, the entire weight of the vacuum may be held by the same one hand used to direct a dirty air inlet of the vacuum cleaner with respect to a surface to be cleaned. For example, the handle and a clean air inlet may be rigidly coupled to each other (directly or indirectly) so as to move as one while maintaining a constant orientation relative to each other. This is to be contrasted with canister and upright vacuum cleaners, whose weight is typically supported by a surface (e.g., a floor) during use.
- It will be appreciated that any one or more of the features of the
surface cleaning apparatus 100 set out herein may alternately be used in any type of surface cleaning apparatus, such as an upright surface cleaning apparatus, a stick vac, a canister surface cleaning apparatus, an extractor or the like. It will also be appreciated that a surface cleaning apparatus may use any configuration of the operating components and the airflow paths exemplified herein. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 3 and 4 , it will also be appreciated that thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may form a part of a larger surface cleaning apparatus 152 (e.g., a stick vacuum cleaner). As exemplified, thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may be mounted to an outlet end of an upright support member or rigid wand or external conduit 140 (e.g., a wand of a stick vacuum). - The
external conduit 140 may be a rigid conduit (e.g., formed of rigid plastic and/or metal). Theexternal conduit 140 extends between an externalconduit inlet end 142 and an externalconduit outlet end 144. Theexternal conduit 140 includes anexternal conduit sidewall 146 extending between the externalconduit inlet end 142 and the externalconduit outlet end 144. Theexternal conduit 140 may be a linear rigid conduit extending linearly along an external conduitlongitudinal axis 148 between the externalconduit inlet end 142 and the externalconduit outlet end 144, the longitudinal axis extending along a longest dimension of theexternal conduit 140. Alternatively, or additionally, theexternal conduit 140 may include a flexible portion and/or a non-linear portion. For example, theexternal conduit 140 may include a flexible hose portion and a rigid portion. - Optionally, the
external conduit 140 is mounted (e.g., rotationally such as pivotally mounted) at anupstream end 142 to asurface cleaning head 150, whereby the surface cleaning apparatus forms a stick typesurface cleaning apparatus 152. It will be appreciated that theexternal conduit 140 may be provided without thesurface cleaning head 150. For example, theexternal conduit 140 may be removably receivable in thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 whereby an effective nozzle of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is extended to theupstream end 142, thereby extending the reach of the hand vacuum cleaner for, e.g., above floor cleaning. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 3 and 4 , theexternal conduit 140 and thesurface cleaning head 150 are parts of afloor cleaning unit 154 to which thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may be removably mountable to form thestick type vacuum 152. - In some embodiments, the
surface cleaning apparatus 100 is operable in different modes, and may include a mode for use with thefloor cleaning head 150 and a mode for use without the floor cleaning head. For example, when thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is mounted to thefloor cleaning unit 154, thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may be operable in a floor cleaner mode. When thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is removed from thefloor cleaning unit 154, thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may be operable in an above floor cleaning mode. The floor cleaning mode may provide a different (e.g., lesser) level of power to an air moving member of the hand vacuum unit than the above floor cleaning mode, resulting in, e.g., a different efficiency, run time, and/or physical configuration of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100, as discussed further elsewhere herein. - With the
surface cleaning apparatus 100 mounted to thefloor cleaning unit 154, thesurface cleaning head 150 and theexternal conduit 140 may be moveably mounted between an upright storage position (FIG. 3 ) and a reclined cleaning position (FIG. 4 ). As exemplified, thesurface cleaning head 150 and theexternal conduit 140 are joined by a pivot joint 156 about which they pivot relative to one another to move between the upright storage position and the reclined cleaning position. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 5 and 6 , an apparatusair flow path 160 extends from an apparatusdirty air inlet 162 to an apparatus clean air outlet 164 (clean air outlet 164 is shown in, e.g.,FIG. 1 ). - The apparatus
dirty air inlet 162 may be provided at the apparatusfront end 102. As exemplified, the apparatusdirty air inlet 162 may be provided at the apparatusupper end 106. The apparatusdirty air inlet 162 may be at a forwardmost part of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100, and may be directed forwardly as exemplified (i.e., opening forwardly). It will be appreciated that the dirty air inlet may be located elsewhere, such as the lower end of the lower end of the air treatment assembly. - The apparatus
dirty air inlet 162 may be provided at an inlet end of aninlet conduit 170. The inlet conduit extends from the apparatusdirty air inlet 162 rearwardly. - The
inlet conduit 170 extends from an inletconduit inlet end 172 to an inletconduit outlet end 174. Optionally, as exemplified, the inletconduit outlet end 174 is within an internal chamber of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., an air treatment chamber which may be a cyclone chamber). Accordingly, the inlet conduit may be inserted into the air treatment chamber. Alternately, theinlet conduit 170 may be provided external to the internal chamber and may have an outlet port that is also an inlet port provide din a wall (e.g., a sidewall) of the internal chamber. Theinlet conduit 170 may be a generally linear conduit having an inlet conduitlongitudinal axis 176 along a longest dimension of the inlet conduit and extending between the inletconduit inlet end 172 and the inletconduit outlet end 174. The inlet conduitlongitudinal axis 176 may extend between the apparatusfront end 102 and the apparatusrear end 104, and, as exemplified, may be generally horizontal when the apparatusupper end 106 is above the apparatuslower end 108. The inlet conduitlongitudinal axis 176 may be generally parallel to the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110. - As exemplified, the
inlet conduit 170 may form anozzle 180 of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. Alternatively, or additionally, theinlet conduit 170 may be connected or directly connected to an accessory, such as the external conduit 140 (e.g., a wand). The accessory may be any suitable accessory tool such as a rigid air flow conduit (e.g., an above floor cleaning wand), a crevice tool, a mini brush, and the like. The accessory may be coupled to thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 such that the accessory is in air flow communication with the dirty air inlet (e.g., in air flow communication with the inlet conduit 170). For example, the accessory may be or include a conduit (e.g., external conduit 140), and the conduit of the accessory may be received within theinlet conduit 170 or may receive the inlet conduit 10 within the accessory conduit. Optionally, one or more releasable fasteners may be used to couple the accessory to thesurface cleaning apparatus 100, such as clips or magnets. Alternatively, or additionally, the accessory may be held in air flow communication with the dirty air inlet via a friction fit (e.g., between an outer diameter of an accessory conduit and an inner diameter of theinlet conduit 170, or vice versa). Alternately, it will be understood that theinlet conduit 170 could be slideably receivable in an accessory conduit. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 1 and 2 , theinlet conduit 170 may project forward alone. In other words, theinlet conduit 170 may extend forwardly of the rest of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100, with no other member of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 extending forwardly with theinlet conduit 170. Alternatively, as exemplified inFIGS. 46 to 54 , one or more additional component, such as anelectrical coupler 380, may project forward alongside the inlet conduit. As exemplified inFIGS. 46 to 54 , theinlet conduit 170 may be part of themain body 120. Where themain body 120 includes a rearward portion (e.g., main body housing 122) and the inlet conduit is at the apparatusfront end 102, theinlet conduit 170 may be joined to the rearward portion by any suitable structure, e.g., a portion of themain body housing 122, a plurality of discrete arms in parallel to one another, or, as exemplified inFIGS. 46 and 47 , amain body shell 182. Alternatively, as exemplified inFIGS. 1 and 2 , theinlet conduit 170 is part of a front portion of a body that is removably coupled to the main body 120 (e.g., theair treatment assembly 200, in the exemplary embodiment). - It will also be appreciated that, in some embodiments, the
surface cleaning apparatus 100 may not include aninlet conduit 170, and the apparatusdirty air inlet 162 may instead open directly into a downstream chamber (e.g., an air treatment chamber 210) rather than being at an upstream end of a conduit. However, aconduit 170 allows anozzle 180 to be formed for application to a surface that is to be cleaned. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 1 and 2 , the apparatusclean air outlet 164 may be provided at a lateral portion of the apparatusrear end 104. The apparatusclean air outlet 164 may include agrill 190 located on a lateral surface of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. As exemplified, the apparatusclean air outlet 164 may include openings (e.g., grill 190) on each lateral side of the apparatusrear end 104. The openings on each of the lateral sides of the apparatusrear end 104 may be generally equivalent in cross sectional area to encourage balanced air flow out each side of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 through the apparatusclean air outlet 164. - As exemplified, the apparatus
rear end 104 may have a mainbody housing sidewall 192 that extends to a main bodyrear face 194 of themain body housing 122. The apparatusclean air outlet 164 may be provided in the mainbody housing sidewall 192. Optionally, the mainbody housing sidewall 192 is a generally cylindrical wall, and the main bodyrear face 194 includes a rear surface of a planarrear wall 196, as exemplified. Optionally, the main bodyrear face 194 is a rear face of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 as a whole (i.e., nothing overlying the main body rear face 194). However, it will be appreciated that in some embodiments thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may include a body overlying therear face 194 of thehousing 122, such as a user interface support body as discussed further elsewhere herein. - It will also be appreciated that the apparatus
dirty air inlet 162 and/or the apparatusclean air outlet 164 may be provided at different locations and/or be of different configurations. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 5 and 6 , thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 includes anair treatment assembly 200. The apparatusair flow path 160 extends through theair treatment assembly 200. Theair treatment assembly 200 is configured to remove particles of dirt and other debris from the airflow and/or otherwise treat the airflow. The air treatment assembly includes one or moreair treatment members 202. Any air treatment member or members known in the art may be used. For example, the surface cleaning apparatus may use one or more cyclones, bags, screens, physical filter media (e.g., foam, felt, HEPA) or the like. Theair treatment assembly 200 may be removably mounted between the apparatusdirty air inlet 162 and themain body housing 122. As exemplified inFIGS. 63 to 70 , theair treatment assembly 200 may be removably receivable in a cavity between theinlet conduit 170 and themain body housing 122. Alternatively, as exemplified inFIGS. 1 and 2 , theair treatment assembly 200 may include the inlet conduit 170 (e.g., with theinlet conduit 170 extending forwardly from theair treatment assembly 200, optionally from an upper portion of the front end of the air treatment assembly 200), and theair treatment assembly 200 may be removably coupled to themain body housing 122, e.g., a front end of the main body. Theair treatment assembly 200 may be removeable from themain body housing 122 in any suitable direction, such as upwardly and/or downwardly and/or forwardly (e.g., as exemplified inFIG. 2 ). - It will be appreciated that the
air treatment assembly 200 may include any suitable number of air treatment stages, each with any suitable number of air treatment members in parallel. For example, theair treatment member 202 may include a first separation stage with a single air treatment member (e.g., a cyclone or momentum separator) and a downstream second stage comprising a plurality of air treatment members (e.g., an array of mini cyclones in parallel with one another). - As exemplified in
FIGS. 5 and 6 , theair treatment assembly 200 may comprise a single cleaning stage. A single cleaning stage may include, e.g., a single cyclonic stage (which may comprise one or more cyclones in parallel), or a single non-cyclonic momentum separator chamber. As exemplified, the single cleaning stage may comprise a single air treatment member, and, as such, theair treatment assembly 200 may be referred to asair treatment member 202. - An air treatment member
longitudinal axis 204 extends between an air treatment member first end 206 (e.g., front end) and an air treatment member second end 208 (e.g., rear end). As exemplified, the air treatment memberlongitudinal axis 204 may be generally parallel to the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110 and/or the inlet conduitlongitudinal axis 176. The air treatment memberlongitudinal axis 204 may be generally transverse to the handlelongitudinal axis 128. The air treatment memberlongitudinal axis 204 may be generally horizontal when the apparatusupper end 106 is above the apparatuslower end 108. - The exemplary
air treatment member 202 includes anair treatment chamber 210. Theair treatment chamber 210 has achamber housing 212 having a chamberfirst end 214 and a chambersecond end 216 axially spaced from the chamberfirst end 214 along the chamberlongitudinal axis 218. Theair treatment chamber 210 may be a cyclone chamber, as exemplified, and the chamberlongitudinal axis 218 may be a cyclone axis of revolution. The chamberlongitudinal axis 218 may be a generally horizontal axis when the apparatusupper end 106 is above the apparatuslower end 108, and may extend between the apparatusfront end 102 and the apparatusrear end 104. The chamberfirst end 214 may be a front end and the chambersecond end 216 may be a rear end. - The
air treatment chamber 210 includes achamber sidewall 220 extending between the chamberfirst end 214 and the chambersecond end 216. The airtreatment chamber sidewall 220 may be a generally cylindrical sidewall. A generally cylindrical sidewall encourages cyclonic air flow within the chamber. The airtreatment chamber sidewall 220 may have a generally constant diameter along the chamberlongitudinal axis 218. However, it will be appreciated that any suitable shape may be used for the air treatment chamber. - The chamber
longitudinal axis 218 may be the same as the air treatment memberlongitudinal axis 204. The air treatment memberlongitudinal axis 204 may be centrally located within theair treatment chamber 210. The air treatment memberlongitudinal axis 204 may be a central axis extending through a radial centre of thechamber sidewall 220. The chamberlongitudinal axis 218 may extend along a longest dimension of theair treatment chamber 210, as exemplified. As exemplified, theair treatment chamber 210 may include a chamber first end wall 222 (e.g., front end wall) at the chamberfirst end 214 and a chamber second end wall 224 (e.g., rear end wall) at the chambersecond end 216. The end walls may close the ends of the chamber. Thechamber sidewall 220 may extend between the chamberfirst end wall 222 to the chambersecond end wall 224. The first end wall may be a front end wall and the second end wall may be a rear end wall. The first and second end walls may each extend generally vertically and/or transversely when the apparatusupper end 106 is above the apparatuslower end 108. - One or both of the end walls, or a portion of one or each of the end walls, may be openable to, e.g., allow for dirt removal. Alternatively, or additionally, the sidewall or a portion thereof may be openable. As exemplified, the chamber
first end wall 222 may be pivotally coupled to thechamber sidewall 220 at pivot joint 226. The chamberfirst end wall 222 may be openable by pivoting thefirst end wall 222 about apivot axis 228 of the pivot joint 226 (see, e.g.,FIG. 2 ). Thepivot axis 228 may be generally perpendicular to the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110 and/or the apparatusvertical axis 112. Optionally, as exemplified, theinlet conduit 170 may be part of the openablefirst end 222, and may be provided on a front face of theair treatment assembly 200 such as on the openable assemblyfirst wall 222. Alternately theinlet conduit 170 may remain in position while a portion of thefirst wall 222 below theinlet conduit 170 is opened, e.g., pivoted open. The openable end wall or portion thereof may be latched shut, e.g., by a latch 229 opposite thepivot joint 226. - The
air treatment inlet 230 includes a chamber inlet opening 234, and theair treatment outlet 232 includes a chamber outlet opening 236, with the air flow path extending through the chamber inlet opening 234 and thechamber outlet opening 236. However, it will be appreciated that in some embodiments theair treatment inlet 230 and/or theair treatment outlet 232 may include more than just an opening. As exemplified, theair treatment outlet 232 may include a screen that may be avortex finder 238 extending into the air treatment chamber, and theair treatment inlet 230 may include a projectingconduit 240 extending into theair treatment chamber 210. Including bodies that extend into theair treatment chamber 210 allows for greater control over air flow within the chamber and/or a more compact construction. It will be appreciated that the air treatment member may have any air inlet and any air outlet known in the art. - Optionally, the
treatment inlet 230 comprises a projectingconduit 240 into which the outlet end of theinlet conduit 170 may be removably insertable. It will be appreciated that part or all of theair treatment inlet 230 may be positioned exterior or interior of the air treatment member. For example, theair treatment inlet 230 may be exterior (e.g., above) the air treatment chamber and a sidewall of theair treatment inlet 230 may have a port that communicates with the air treatment chamber via a port in the sidewall of the air treatment chamber. Alternately, theair treatment inlet 230 may have an outlet end that is within the air treatment chamber. In such a case, theair treatment inlet 230 may be located radially inward of thechamber sidewall 220. Theair treatment inlet 230 may extend axially inward of the chamberfirst end 214 and have an outlet end that is located axially inwardly of the chambersecond end 216, as exemplified. As exemplified, theair treatment inlet 230 may extend axially into theair treatment chamber 210 by an axial projectinglength 242. The axial projectinglength 242 may be between 10 mm and 100 mm, between 25 mm and 75 mm, or, optionally, between 40 mm and 60 mm. Optionally, theair treatment inlet 230 located radially in theair treatment chamber 210 by aradial projecting distance 244 that is between 0.1 times and 0.5 times thecyclone diameter 246, between 0.25 times and 0.45 times thecyclone diameter 246, or, optionally, between 0.3 times and 0.4 times thecyclone diameter 246. However, it will also be appreciated that in some embodiments the air treatment inlet may be located in thechamber sidewall 220 of the air treatment assembly (i.e., include or consist of an opening through the chamber sidewall 220). - The
air treatment inlet 230 may optionally have an axial inner (outlet) end that is closer to the chamberfirst end 214 than the chambersecond end 216, and may project into theair treatment chamber 210 from the air treatment chamberfirst end 214. An inlet at the air treatmentfirst end 214 allows for a more compact construction. However, it will be appreciated that theair treatment inlet 230 may alternatively be located at a rear or midway position of theair treatment assembly 200, and may be located on the same or the opposite end from theair treatment outlet 232. The exemplaryair treatment member 202 is a uniflow cyclone, however it will be appreciated that in other embodiments theair treatment member 202 may be a reverse flow cyclone. - It will be appreciated that in embodiments in which the
air treatment inlet 230 projects into theair treatment chamber 210, theair treatment inlet 230 includes an inletupstream end 250 and an inlet downstream oroutlet end 252. Theair treatment inlet 230 includes an inletlongitudinal axis 254 extending between the inletupstream end 250 and the inletdownstream end 252. The inletupstream end 250 includes an inletupstream opening 256 through which the air flow path enters theair treatment inlet 230 and the inlet downstream end includes an inletdownstream opening 258 through which the air flow path exits theair treatment inlet 230 and enters theair treatment chamber 210. Theair treatment inlet 230 includes aninlet sidewall 260 extending between the inletupstream end 250 and the inletdownstream end 252. The inlet upstream opening 256 may be an axial opening through which the inletlongitudinal axis 254 extends. The air treatment inlet may extend axially to an open downstream end which may be the inletdownstream opening 258. Alternately, or in addition, the inletdownstream opening 258 may be a sidewall opening in theinlet sidewall 260. - The
air treatment assembly 200 includes adirt collection region 300. In some embodiments, thedirt collection region 300 may be external to theair treatment chamber 210. The dirt collection region may be located in a separate dirt collection chamber from theair treatment chamber 210. The separate dirt collection chamber may communicate with theair treatment chamber 210 via a dirt outlet (e.g., an opening in a wall of the air treatment chamber or a gap between walls of the air treatment chamber). - Alternatively, as exemplified, the
dirt collection region 300 may be an area of the air treatment chamber 210 (i.e., is internal to the air treatment chamber 210). Thedirt collection region 300 may include, e.g., a lower portion of theair treatment chamber 210. Thedirt collection region 300 may be at the air treatmentfront end 206 and/or the air treatmentrear end 208. Thedirt collection region 300 may be axially outward (e.g., forward) of thechamber inlet port 294 and/or axially outward (e.g., rearward) of an air permeable portion of theair treatment outlet 232. - It will be appreciated that the
air treatment assembly 200 may include any suitable number of discretedirt collection regions 300. In some embodiments, theair treatment assembly 200 may include separate collection regions for fine dirt and for coarse dirt, or separate dirt outlets to a common dirt collection chamber for fine dirt and for coarse dirt. It will be understood that theair treatment chamber 210 anddirt collection region 300 may be of any configuration suitable for separating dirt from an air stream and collecting the separated dirt, respectively. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 7 to 10 , theair treatment assembly 200 may include aclosure member 310 selectively closing a portion of the air flow path through theair treatment assembly 200 such that air flow therethrough is inhibited. Where theair treatment assembly 200 includes theair treatment chamber 210, theclosure member 310 may selectively close theair treatment inlet 230, such as by closing the chamber inlet opening 234 or fully blocking the air flow path within a conduit of theair treatment inlet 230. - The
surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include aclosure seat 312 against which theclosure member 310 seats when closed (see for exampleFIG. 7 ). Theclosure member 310 may rest against theclosure seat 312 at each point about aperimeter 314 of theclosure member 310. Theclosure seat 312 may face upstream or downstream, and a downstream surface or an upstream surface of theclosure member 310 may seat against the closure seat when theclosure member 310 is closed. Alternatively, theclosure member 310 may be received within a conduit in the closed position without seating against a seat, and thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may not include the closure seat 312 (see for exampleFIGS. 31 and 32 ). Optionally, theclosure member 310 includes a sealing material thereon to be sandwiched (e.g., at each point around a perimeter of the closure member 310) between theclosure member 310 and conduit walls or aclosure seat 312 when theclosure member 310 is closed. - Optionally, the
closure member 310 is biased to the closed position (e.g.,FIG. 7 ). Thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may include a closure biasing member 316 (e.g., a spring ora compressible balloon, an embodiment exemplified inFIGS. 36 and 37 ) biasing the closure member to the closed position. Optionally, theclosure member 310 is a generally planar member, as exemplified inFIGS. 36 and 37 . Optionally, theclosure member 310 is a curved member. - The
closure member 310 may be operable to close the apparatusair flow path 160 to prevent dirt from traveling up the path towards the apparatusdirty air inlet 162. For example, theclosure member 310 may prevent dirt from falling out of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 when thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is not operating (i.e., when the suction motor is not powered up). It will be appreciated that theclosure member 310 may be used when thedirt collection region 300 is an internal dirt collection region within theair treatment chamber 210. Theclosure member 310 may be particularly useful with an internaldirt collection region 300 to prevent dirt from retreating along the air flow path out of theair treatment chamber 210. - As exemplified in
FIG. 5 , thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 also includes anair moving member 320. The apparatusair flow path 160 extends through theair moving member 320. Theair moving member 320 is provided to generate vacuum suction through theair flow path 160. The air moving member may include a suction motor andfan assembly 322, which may be referred to assuction motor 322. - The
suction motor 322 is contained within asuction motor housing 324. Thesuction motor housing 324 may form part of the outer surface of themain body housing 122, or may be internal thereto. Thesuction motor housing 324 may be of any suitable construction, including any of those exemplified herein. - The
suction motor 322 in the illustrated example is positioned downstream from theair treatment member 202, although it will be appreciated that thesuction motor 322 may be positioned upstream of the air treatment member 202 (e.g., a dirty air motor) in alternative embodiments. As exemplified, themotor 322 may be rearward of the cycloneair treatment assembly 200. Thesuction motor 322 may be located at the apparatusrear end 104, and may be located at the apparatusupper end 106, as exemplified. Air may travel rearwardly from theair treatment assembly 200 to thesuction motor 322, and air flow direction between theair treatment member 202 and thesuction motor 322 may have a rearward component at each point along the way. - The
suction motor 322 rotates about a central motor axis ofrotation 326. Preferably, when the apparatusupper end 106 is positioned above the apparatuslower end 108, the motor axis ofrotation 326 is oriented generally horizontally and extends between the apparatusfront end 102 and the apparatusrear end 104. In other examples, however, the motor axis ofrotation 326 may extend at any angle to the horizontal, or it may extend vertically. Accordingly, thesuction motor 322 may be oriented in any direction within thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. The suction motor axis ofrotation 326 may be spaced (e.g., vertically spaced) from the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110, or it may be coaxial therewith as exemplified. As exemplified, the suction motor axis ofrotation 326 may intersect theair treatment assembly 200. - The
surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include one or more filters, such as apre-motor filter 330 in theair flow path 160 upstream of the suction motor 322 (e.g., upstream of themotor 322 and downstream of the air treatment assembly 200) and/or apost-motor filter 332 in theair flow path 160 downstream of thesuction motor 322. Thepre-motor filter 330 and thepost-motor filter 332 may be formed from any suitable physical, porous filter media and may have any suitable shape, including the examples disclosed herein. For example, thepre-motor filter 330 and/or thepost-motor filter 332 may be one or more of a foam filter, felt filter, HEPA filter, other physical filter media, electrostatic filter, and the like. Optionally, one or both of thepremotor filter 330 and thepost motor filter 332 includes a series of screens, and, optionally, each downstream screen of the filter has finer pores than the preceding upstream screen. - The
pre-motor filter 330 may be provided in apre-motor filter housing 334. Thepre-motor filter housing 334 may be of any suitable construction, including any of those exemplified herein. Thepre-motor filter housing 334 may be operable or accessible to allow thepre-motor filter 330 to be cleaned and/or replaced. As exemplified, the suction motor axis ofrotation 326 may intersect thepre-motor filter 330. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 62 to 68 , thepre-motor filter 330 may be provided as part of theair treatment assembly 200 and removable therewith. Thepre-motor filter 330 may be received in apre-motor filter housing 334 that is built into theair treatment assembly 200. Alternatively, as exemplified inFIG. 5 , thepre-motor filter 330 may be part of the main body housing 122 (e.g., part of a front end, as exemplified) and not removeable as part of theair treatment assembly 200. In such an embodiment, the front end of the pre-motor filter may be revealed when the air treatment assembly is removed. - The
pre-motor filter 330 may come in any suitable shape or location, however, as exemplified, thepre-motor filter 330 may have a longest dimension in a longitudinal (horizontal) direction along a pre-motor filterlongitudinal axis 336. The pre-motor filter may be a donut filter, with a cylindrical body of filtration material surrounding a central cavity, as illustrated. The donut filter may be arranged with the central cavity extending generally horizontally, with an upstream end closed by afilter end cap 338 and the downstream end open (e.g., into thesuction motor housing 324, as exemplified). The pre-motor filterlongitudinal axis 336 may be generally parallel to and/or coaxial with the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110, the air treatmentlongitudinal axis 204, the motor axis ofrotation 326, and/or the inlet conduitlongitudinal axis 176. The donut filter may be cylindrical or frusto-conical in shape. - The
post-motor filter 332 may be provided in apost-motor filter housing 340. Thepost-motor filter housing 340 may form part of the outer surface of themain body housing 122. Thepost-motor filter housing 340 may be of any suitable construction, including any of those exemplified herein. Thepost-motor filter housing 340 may be openable or accessible to allow thepost-motor filter 332 to be cleaned and/or replaced. - The
post-motor filter 332 may be located radially outwards of thesuction motor 322, as exemplified. Optionally, thepost-motor filter 332 may be sandwiched between thesuction motor housing 324 and thechamber sidewall 220. - As exemplified, power may be supplied to the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., to components or elements such as the suction motor 322) from an on-board energy storage member 350 (e.g., one or more capacitors or batteries). For example, the on-board
energy storage member 350 may be a battery or a plurality of batteries. - The on-board
energy storage member 350 may be provided in a pack (e.g., a removeable pack). The pack may be a battery pack. Optionally, theenergy storage member 350 is provided at a base of thehandle 124. Theenergy storage member 350 may be provided at alower end 352 of apistol grip handle 124. Optionally, theenergy storage member 350 is opposite themotor 322 across thehandle 124. The handlelongitudinal axis 128 may extend through each of themotor 322 and theenergy storage member 350. However, it will be appreciated that the on-board energy storage member and/or pack may be provided at any configuration and/or location in thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. - It will be appreciated that in some examples, the
surface cleaning apparatus 100 may alternatively or additionally include a power cord to supply power to the components of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., the motor 322) directly, and/or to supply power to the on-board energy storage member 350 (e.g., a capacitor or battery) to supply power to powered components (e.g., the suction motor 322). - As exemplified in
FIG. 11 , it will also be appreciated that thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 includes auser interface 360. Theuser interface 360 may be communicatively coupled to a control system 370 of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. The control system 370 may include one or more onboard processors communicatively coupled to one or more on board data storage systems storing instructions. The instructions include routines or schedules for operating thesurface cleaning apparatus 100, and may include routines or schedules for operating thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 in response to input. The input may be user input (e.g., via the user interface 360), such as turning the apparatus on or off or selecting an operational mode. The input may be from one or more components of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100, such as from an on-board sensor. The surface cleaning apparatus may include one or more sensors. It will be appreciated that any suitable sensor may be included, including any of the sensors described herein. The control system 370 (e.g., the one or more processors) may be communicatively coupled to one or more sensors and/or actuators to receive input and/or provide operation commands thereto. - The control system 370 (e.g., the one or more processors) may be communicatively coupled to the user interface to receive user input and/or provide information. The
user interface 360 provides information to the user and/or includes at least one control operable by the user (e.g., an on/off control, which may be a button or touch sensitive area of the user interface). Theuser interface 360 may provide information about at least one operating mode of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., information about which mode is active). Theuser interface 360 may provide information about a charge level of anenergy storage member 350. The user interface may include at least oneinterface toggle 362. Theinterface toggle 362 may be referred to as a control of the surface cleaning apparatus. Theinterface toggle 362 may be a soft toggle (e.g., a touch sensitive area of the touchscreen) or a physically moveable toggle such as a slider, a pivoting switch, or a depressible button. The user interface may include aninformation display 364, such as a touchscreen, a display screen, or an illuminable icon. - It will be appreciated that the control system 370 may be communicatively coupled to one or more powered component of the surface cleaning apparatus to control operations thereof (e.g., to activate, deactivate, and/or change a setting such as a mode thereof). A powered component may be, e.g., a powered valve, a powered actuator, or a powered interface (e.g., a display screen, a touchscreen or illuminated icon), such as any of the powered components described subsequently herein. A powered component may be coupled to a power supply of the surface cleaning apparatus, such as a power supply member or a power cord, to receive power therefrom.
- A powered actuator may be, e.g., a solenoid or another electromechanical actuator such as a linear actuator or a motor which may be provided for any use described subsequently herein. It will be appreciated that in some embodiments a powered actuator may be independent from the control system 370, such as a powered actuator that is controlled by a simple circuit. A simple circuit may not include a processor or a data storage device, such as a circuit with a toggle (e.g., a switch, slider or button) that closes the circuit when activated and breaks the circuit when deactivated.
- It will be appreciated that the surface cleaning apparatus may include one or more actuators that is unpowered or that may be realized by a powered component or an unpowered component as described subsequently herein. An unpowered actuator may be, e.g., an aneroid capsule or piston. It will be appreciated that an actuator as described herein may be powered or unpowered, unless otherwise specified. An actuator may include a mechanical coupling to a moveable member which the actuator is provided to move. An actuator may be a linear actuator. An actuator may be a dedicated actuator provided to move only one movable member, or may be a common actuator operable to move more than one movable member (e.g., at the same time, or separately as directed by the control system 370).
- The
user interface 360 may provide information about at least one operating mode of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. Theuser interface 360 may include a button that a user may press to toggle between, e.g., operational states of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. For example, the user may toggle between a floor cleaning mode in which thesuction motor 322 is provided with a first power level and an above floor cleaning mode in which thesuction motor 322 is provided with a second power level that is higher than the first power level (i.e., to rotate the fan faster). In some embodiments, theuser interface 360 may provide information about a charge level of theenergy storage member 350. - It will be appreciated that the
user interface 360 may be provided at any suitable location on thesurface cleaning apparatus 100, and may be any suitable user interface. Optionally, theuser interface 360 is provided on the handle and/or an upper surface of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 for ease of access or visibility, as discussed further elsewhere herein. - Optionally, as exemplified in
FIGS. 46 and 47 , anelectrical connector 380 may be provided at thefront end 102 to provide electricity to an attachment (e.g., the floor cleaning head) from the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., from an optional on-board energy storage member 350). Theelectrical connector 380 may be provided adjacent the dirty air inlet 162 (e.g., to be contacted by an electrical connector of the attachment adjacent the air outlet of the attachment). As exemplified, theelectrical connector 380 may be directly beside (e.g., above) thedirty air inlet 162. In other words, theelectrical connector 380 may be close enough to the inlet 162to be mated to an electrical connector mounted on a wand that is joined to theinlet 162. For example, the electrical connector may be within 10 cm, 5 cm, or 3 cm of theinlet 162. - In some embodiments, the portion of the external conduit 140 (e.g., the wand) which is connected to (e.g., inserted into) the nozzle 180 (e.g., into the
air treatment inlet 230 and/or the inlet conduit 170) includes an external conduitelectrical connector 380 that is also inserted into the nozzle. The external conduitelectrical connector 380 may be on an exterior surface of the sidewall of theexternal conduit 140, as exemplified. Optionally, the external conduit electrical connector is also an alignment member. Optionally, the external conduitelectrical connector 380 is at the end of theexternal conduit 140. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 48 to 50 , it will be appreciated that thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may, optionally, be docked with adocking station 390. Thedocking station 390 may evacuate and/or charge thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 when thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is docked. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 48 to 50 , thedocking station 390 may include an evacuationair flow passage 392 between anevacuation air inlet 394 and anevacuation air outlet 396. An evacuationair treatment assembly 398 is provided in the evacuationair flow passage 392 to separate dirt. Thedocking station 390 may include an evacuationair moving member 400 in theair flow path 160. It will be appreciated that in some embodiments, as exemplified inFIGS. 67 and 68 , thedocking station 390 may not include an air moving member, with air movement through theair flow path 160 driven by an external air moving member, such as themotor 322 of a dockedsurface cleaning apparatus 100. - The
docking station 390 may be used to evacuate thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. When thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is docked with thedocking station 390, an evacuationair flow path 392 may extend through thedocking station 390 and the dockedsurface cleaning apparatus 100. The evacuationair flow path 392 extends from an evacuationdirty air inlet 394 to an evacuationclean air outlet 396. It will be appreciated that the evacuationdirty air inlet 394 may be provided at any suitable location of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 or thedocking station 390. It will also be appreciated that the evacuationclean air outlet 396 may be provided at any suitable location of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 or thedocking station 390. It will also be appreciated that the evacuationair flow path 392 may include a portion of the apparatusair flow path 160. Optionally, the evacuationair flow path 392 does not include all of the apparatusair flow path 160. The evacuationair flow path 392 may not include thedirty air inlet 162 and/orclean air outlet 164. For example, one or more valves may close off a portion of the apparatusair flow path 160 and/or open a portion of the evacuationair flow path 392, and may be moved manually, in response to a user input or automatically in response to the surface cleaning apparatus being docked. - The
air moving member 400 is configured to move air from thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 into the docking station upstream of at least one docking stationair treatment member 202 through an evacuation opening 410 in thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. The evacuation opening 410 may be a selectively closeable opening, such that the evacuation opening 410 may be closed when thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is not docked. Although it will be appreciated that in some embodiments the evacuation opening 410 may not be closeable, for example the evacuation opening may include the dirty air inlet of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 and may include the air treatment inlet 230 (i.e., air moves out thedirty air inlet 162 through the evacuationair flow path 392 during an evacuation operation). A selectively openable evacuation opening 410 may be opened in any suitable way, including manually or automatically. - it will be appreciated that the evacuation opening 410 may be any suitable opening, and may be part of the chamber
first end 214. The evacuation opening 410 may include or consist of theair treatment inlet 230 and thedirty air inlet 162, which may be selectively closed by, e.g., the closure member 310 (see for exampleFIG. 49 ). Alternately, part or all of the front wall of the air treatment assembly (e.g., the portion below the inlet conduit 170) may be openable. The evacuation opening 410 may alternately be a selectively closeable aperture through a sidewall of the air treatment assembly 200 (e.g., the chamber sidewall 220) or through an end wall of theair treatment assembly 200. The evacuation opening may be a gap between walls when the walls are moved apart. The evacuation opening may be closed by a moveable flap or panel. The evacuation opening may be opened and/or closed by rotational or translational movement of a member which selectively closes the evacuation opening. It will be appreciated that the location and size of the evacuation opening 410 may be selected based on the configuration of thedocking station 390. - Dirt may be carried out of the
surface cleaning apparatus 100 and into thedocking station 390 through the evacuation opening when the evacuation opening is open. Dirt may be inhibited from moving through the evacuation opening when the evacuation opening is closed, such as by a moveable door. - The
docking station 390 optionally provides a charge to thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 to, e.g., charge an onboardenergy storage member 350. In some embodiments, thedocking station 390 provides a charge to thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 without being configured to evacuate the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., without including an air flow path or treatment member to receive dirt). Thedocking station 390 may include a cord to be plugged into, e.g., a residential outlet, to supply electrical power to thedocking station 390, to be supplied to thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 and/or to an onboard component such as themotor 322. - It will be appreciated that any
suitable docking station 390 may be used, or thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may be used and provided without adocking station 390. - The following is a description of a
rib arrestor 420 provided in theair treatment assembly 200, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein. - In accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 11 to 13 , theair treatment assembly 200 includes arib 420 extending into a chamber of theassembly 200 from a wall of the chamber. Therib 420 interrupts air flow (cyclonic air flow if the chamber is a cyclone chamber) and encourages dirt accumulation adjacent therib 420. Therib 420 may be at one of the ends of the chamber, and optionally at an end at which an air outlet of the chamber is located. Accordingly, the rib may create an area at the air outlet end of the air treatment chamber which has diminished or minimal or no air circulation and, accordingly, dirt, e.g., finer dirt, may be accumulated therein. - Optionally, as exemplified in
FIG. 13 , theair treatment outlet 232 may comprise an outlet airpermeable portion 422 and a downstream outlet airimpermeable portion 424 through which the apparatusair flow path 160 extends. The outlet airpermeable portion 422 may be an outlet porous portion comprising an outlet porous material 426, e.g., a screen. Theair treatment outlet 232 may include a central open region through which the air treatmentlongitudinal axis 218 extends, with a screen or other outlet porous material 426 through which the apparatusair flow path 160 passes. - As exemplified, the outlet air
impermeable portion 424 and the outletporous portion 422 are parts of avortex finder 238 of a cyclone. In such an embodiment, theair treatment outlet 232 includes thevortex finder 238, and may consist of thevortex finder 238. - The outlet air
impermeable portion 424 may be a conduit having an air impermeable sidewall extending between inlet and outlet ends, such as a linear cylindrical conduit as exemplified. The outletporous portion 422 has an axiallyinward end 430 and an opposite axiallyoutward end 432. The axiallyoutward end 432 is located at theinner end 434 of the outlet airimpermeable portion 424. The outlet airimpermeable portion 424 extends between theinner end 434 and anoutward end 436. As exemplified, the outletporous portion 422 may extend further inwardly into theair treatment chamber 210 fro theinner end 434 of the outlet airimpermeable portion 424. - As exemplified, the air
impermeable portion 424 may include, or consist of, an annular portion of thevortex finder 238. As exemplified, the airimpermeable portion 424 may include an annular strip extending a predetermined axial length along thelongitudinal axis 218, and the strip may have a generally constant axial length around the circumference. For example, the axial length of the strip of theimpermeable portion 242 may be between 1 mm and 10 mm, 2 mm and 8 mm, or about 5 mm. In some embodiments, the air impermeable portion may include a projecting portion 425 (FIG. 11 ) extending further axially than the remainder. The projecting portion may comprise ribs that assist in maintaining the shape of the screen during use. - The
rib 420 may extend co-extensively (i.e., with respect to the cyclone axis 218) along at least a portion of, and optionally all of, theair treatment chamber 210 in which the outlet airimpermeable portion 424 of theair treatment outlet 232 is provided. Therib 420 and outlet airimpermeable portion 424 may extend into theair treatment chamber 210 from a common wall. As exemplified, both the outlet airimpermeable portion 424 and therib 420 extend into theair treatment chamber 210 from the treatment chamber second end 216 (e.g., a rear end, and may extend from the treatment chamber second end wall 224). Therib 420 and outlet airimpermeable portion 424 together form adead zone 440 between the rib and the air impermeable portion. As exemplified, thedead zone 440 is at the treatment chambersecond end 216. - It will be appreciated that the
rib 420 may extend further into theair treatment chamber 210 along the air treatmentlongitudinal axis 218 than the impermeable portion, or the impermeable portion may extend further into theair treatment chamber 210 along the air treatmentlongitudinal axis 218 than the rib, or therib 420 and outlet airimpermeable portion 424 may extend equally far into theair treatment chamber 210. Optionally, therib 420 extends into the air treatment chamber only coextensively with the outlet airimpermeable portion 424, and not with the outletpermeable portion 422. In other words, the forward end of the rib is located at or rearward of theporous portion 422 and accordingly, therib 420 may extend into theair treatment chamber 210 to a distance equal to or less than the outlet airimpermeable portion 424. Keeping therib 420 from extending coextensively with the outlet airpermeable portion 422 may reduce the obstruction of airflow into the permeable portion. - The
rib 420 may extend inwardly, e.g., axially inwardly, into theair treatment chamber 210 from anend wall 224 of the air treatment chamber. However, it will be appreciated that the rib may be provided in any suitable location. For example, the rib may have a rear side that terminates prior to theend wall 224. Accordingly, for example, the rib could extend rearward from the front end of the airimpermeable portion 424 or rearward from a location rearward of the airimpermeable portion 424 and may terminate at or forward of therear wall 224. As exemplified, therib 420 extends into theair treatment chamber 210 from the air treatment chamberrear wall 224. - The
rib 420 may also extend inwardly, e.g., radially inwardly, from asidewall 220 of the air treatment chamber and/or the airimpermeable portion 424. As exemplified, therib 420 extends into theair treatment chamber 210 from thecyclone sidewall 220. - As exemplified, the
rib 420 is positioned between theair treatment outlet 232 and thecyclone sidewall 220. Accordingly, therib 420 is radially outward from the outlet airimpermeable portion 424. The rib may have a radial width equal to the distance from theimpermeable portion 424 to thesidewall 220 or a distance that is smaller. Accordingly, the radial inner side of the rib may terminate prior to theimpermeable portion 424 and/or the radial outer side of therib 420 may terminate prior to thesidewall 220. - Optionally, as exemplified, the
impermeable portion 242 faces therib 420. It will be appreciated that only the portion of the outlet that faces therib 420 need be air impermeable. Accordingly, theimpermeable portion 244 may extends circumferentially at least 10°, at least 20°, or at least 30° from the location of therib 420. Theimpermeable portion 244 may lead the rib 420 (i.e., begins upstream of the rib) in a direction of cyclonic flow within the chamber by at least 1°, at least 2°, or at least 5°. - As exemplified, the rear end of the
air treatment chamber 210 is located at the end wall on which the air treatment outlet 232 (vortex finder 238) is provided. This allows thepre-motor filter 330 to have a larger size in a direction transverse to the longitudinal axis (e.g., a larger diameter) than if theair treatment chamber 210 extended to a position rearward of the front end of thepre-motor filter 330, which allows for the axial length of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 to be shortened. Alternately, the rear end of theair treatment chamber 210 may be rearward of the rear end of the vortex finder, in which case, the rear end of therib 420 may extend rearward of the vortex finder to or towards the rear end of the air treatment chamber. - The
rib 420 may extend in a generally axial direction. As exemplified, therib 420 may be a planar body extending in a plane that is generally parallel to the air treatment longitudinal axis 218 (e.g., the cyclone axis of rotation). Therib 420 extends to a rib axiallyinner end 442. As exemplified, the rib axiallyinner end 442 may be closer to the front end of theair treatment chamber 210 than the opposite end of therib 420. Optionally, as exemplified, the rib axiallyinner end 442 is curved. The curved end extends further into theair treatment chamber 210 on a radiallyouter side 444 of therib 420 than on a radiallyinner side 446 of the rib 20. As exemplified, the rib axiallyinner end 442 may include a rounded curve between a radiallyinner side 446 and an axiallyinnermost edge 448. - Optionally, the
rib 420 has anaxial length 450 of 4 mm to 50 mm, 8 mm to 25 mm, or, optionally, 12 mm to 18 mm. The outlet airimpermeable portion 424 may have anaxial length 452 of 0 mm to 50 mm, 0 mm to 25 mm, or, optionally, 0 mm to 15 mm. Optionally, therib 420 has aradial height 454 that is equal to or a fraction of theradial distance 456 between the outlet airimpermeable portion 424 and thechamber sidewall 220. Therib 420 may have aheight 454 of 0.1 to 1 times theradial distance 456, 0.25 time to 0.75 times theradial distance 456, or, preferably, 0.4 times to 0.6 times theradial distance 456. However, it will be appreciated that therib 420 may be provided in any suitable shape and size. - It will also be appreciated that the
assembly 200 may include one or more ribs. Where theassembly 200 includes a plurality of discrete ribs, the ribs may be angularly spaced apart about the cyclone axis ofrotation 218. Additionally. or alternatively, the ribs may be angularly spaced apart about theair treatment outlet 232. Theribs 420 may be evenly spaced apart, may be of the same or different sizes and may be provided on the same or different walls. - Air Inlet with a Side Opening
- The following is a description of air inlet with a side opening that may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- In accordance with this aspect, the
air inlet 230 of an air treatment chamber, which may be a cyclone chamber, has a side opening. The air inlet may comprise an axial extending conduit, such asinlet conduit 170 which has an opening in the axial extending sidewall thereof. In such a case, the external conduit, when provided, may have a downstream end that terminates forward of (upstream of) the sidewall opening. Alternately, theside opening FIG. 17 ). Accordingly, when theexternal conduit 140 is inserted into the dirty air inlet, the sidewall opening may open onto the air treatment chamber (e.g., there may be nointernal conduit 170 or theinternal conduit 170 may terminate forward of or upstream of the downstream end of the portion of theexternal conduit 140 with the sidewall opening). It will be appreciated that if aninlet conduit 170 with a sidewall opening is also provided with a sidewall opening of theexternal conduit sidewall 146, then the sidewall opening of theexternal conduit sidewall 146 and the sidewall opening of theinlet conduit 170 are preferable aligned during use of the surface cleaning apparatus. - If a sidewall opening of the
external conduit sidewall 146 is provided, then theexternal conduit 140 may have aninlet end wall 262 at a downstream end thereof. Such an end wall may close of the downstream end of the external conduit such that the sidewall opening(s) are the only air outlet. In such a case, theinlet end wall 262 may provide rigidity to the downstream end of the external conduit. - If the air flow conduit (
external conduit 140 and/or internal conduit 170) has a closed end, e.g.,inlet end wall 262 or externalconduit end wall 270, then part of the sidewall opening may comprise an air permeable section 460 (e.g., mesh may be provided to cover part of the sidewall opening). For example, two sidewall openings may be provided, which may be on opposed sides of the air flow conduit. In such a case, one of the sidewall openings may be provided with an airpermeable section 460. - If the air flow conduit (
external conduit 140 and/or internal conduit 170) has an open end, then part or all of the sidewall opening may comprise an airpermeable section 460. One or more airpermeable sections 460 may be provided upstream of the inletdownstream opening 258 in a sidewall of theinlet conduit 170. - In any embodiment, the air
permeable section 460 may extend to the downstream end of the air flow conduit (e.g.,inlet end wall 262 if the air flow conduit has a closed downstream end) or may terminate upstream thereof. - The following is a discussion of an inlet conduit with a side opening wherein the external conduit terminates forward of the sidewall opening. It will be appreciated that the same features may be used with an external conduit with a sidewall opening.
- If the inlet
downstream opening 258 into the air treatment chamber is only through the sidewall, then the inletdownstream end 252 may include aninlet end wall 262. Theinlet sidewall 260 may extend along part or all of the inlet longitudinal axis and may optionally extend forwardly from theend wall 262. - The
inlet end wall 262 may extend across the inletlongitudinal axis 254 and may close off the downstream end of theinlet sidewall 260. Theinlet end wall 262 may optionally be planar, and may optionally extend generally perpendicular to the inletlongitudinal axis 254. Theinlet end wall 262 may be removeable from the inlet sidewall in some embodiments. - As exemplified in
FIG. 6 , the inlet upstream opening 256 may include or consist of the chamber inlet opening 234 (i.e., the upstream end of the conduit leading to the sidewall opening or provided at the upstream end of the sidewall opening) and the inletdownstream opening 258 may include or consist of an opening (e.g., a sidewall opening) in a projectingconduit sidewall 248 of the projectingconduit 240. Theinlet sidewall 260 may include or consist of the projectingconduit sidewall 248, and theinlet end wall 262 may include or consist of a projectingconduit end wall 264 of the projecting conduit. - Alternately, as exemplified in
FIGS. 20, 22, and 23 , theair treatment inlet 230 includes theexternal conduit 140 that is removably received in the projectingconduit 240, and the diameter of the inlet upstream opening 256 is limited by the inner diameter of theexternal conduit 140, while the inlet downstream opening is limited by the overlapping portions ofdownstream openings external conduit 140 and the projectingconduit 240. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 20, 22, and 23 , theinlet sidewall 260 may include the projectingconduit sidewall 248 and/or theexternal conduit sidewall 146, and theinlet end wall 262 may include the projectingconduit end wall 264 and/or an externalconduit end wall 270. - The external
conduit end wall 270 may be a removeable end wall or cap, although it will be appreciated that if theexternal conduit 140 is received in the projectingconduit 240 and the projectingconduit 240 includes the projectingconduit end wall 264, theexternal conduit 140 may not require an end wall or end cap to direct airflow through sidewall openings and may not include an end wall or end cap closing the end of theexternal conduit sidewall 146. However, theend cap 270 may provide greater structural strength to the downstream end of theexternal conduit 140. In some embodiments, theexternal conduit 140 is made of metal. Optionally, theexternal conduit 140 is a thin-walled conduit. Theexternal conduit sidewall 146 may be a thin wall formed of metal. The externalconduit end cap 270 may support the end of theexternal conduit 140 in embodiments in which one ormore openings external conduit sidewall 146. - It will also be appreciated that the
inlet end wall 262 and/orinlet sidewall 260 may include an alternative member, such as a further body received within theexternal conduit 140 and/or the projectingconduit 240, such as amoveable inlet member 280 as discussed further elsewhere herein. - Referring again to
FIGS. 5 and 6 , the projectingconduit 240 extends between a projectingconduit inlet end 266 and a projectingconduit outlet end 268. The chamber inlet opening 234 is at the projectingconduit inlet end 266. The chamber inlet opening 234 may be an opening in a chamber end wall, such as the chamberfirst end wall 222 as exemplified. The projectingconduit 240 also includes a projecting conduit outlet opening 282 at the projectingconduit outlet end 268. - The
air treatment inlet 230 may be a hooked inlet. As exemplified. the projecting conduit inlet opening 284 and the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 may extend in non-parallel planes to change the direction of air flow along the apparatusair flow path 160. Theair treatment inlet 230 may also be a tangential inlet for a cyclone. As exemplified, the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 may extend generally parallel to the air treatment member longitudinal axis 204 (e.g., a cyclone axis). The projecting conduit outlet opening 282 may extend in a plane that is generally parallel to the air treatment memberlongitudinal axis 204. - in some embodiments, the
air treatment inlet 230 has an effectiveair inlet length 290, the effectiveair inlet length 290 being the axial length of the inletdownstream opening 258. As exemplified, this may be the axial length of the projection conduit outlet opening 282 where the protection conduit outlet opening 282 defines the inletdownstream opening 258. The effectiveair inlet length 290 may be between 10 mm and 100 mm, between 25 mm and 75 mm, or optionally, between 40 mm and 60 mm. The effectiveair inlet length 290 may be generally equal to the projectinglength 242 when the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 extends the length of the projecting conduit, as exemplified inFIG. 6 . - The
air treatment chamber 210 may have a chamberaxial length 292 that is between 1.5 times and 10 times the effectiveair inlet length 290, between 2.5 times and 6 times the effectiveair inlet length 290, or, optionally, between 3 times and 4 times the effectiveair inlet length 290. The ratio between the effectiveair inlet length 290 and the chamberaxial length 292 affects the number of turns that air is subject to as it passes through theair treatment chamber 210. Optionally, the ratio is selected to provide at least 2, 2.5, 3 or more turns. As discussed further elsewhere herein, the ratio between the effectiveair inlet length 290 and the chamberaxial length 292 may be variable. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 5 and 6 , the projectingconduit 240 may be a generally linear conduit with a projecting conduit longitudinal axis extending between the inlet and outlet ends. The projectingconduit 240 includes a projectingconduit sidewall 248 extending between the inlet and outlet ends. As exemplified, the projectingconduit 240 may include or consist of the inletconduit outlet end 174. - As exemplified, the
air treatment inlet 230 may include a downstream portion of theinlet conduit 170. The downstream portion of theinlet conduit 170 may form the projectingconduit 240, as exemplified. As exemplified inFIGS. 5 and 6 , theinlet conduit 170 may extend into theair treatment assembly 200. Theinlet conduit 170 may extend into theair treatment chamber 210 of theair treatment assembly 200. Optionally, the air treatment inlet 230 (e.g., the downstream end of the inlet conduit 170) extends into theair treatment chamber 210 from an end thereof and along (e.g., against) thechamber sidewall 220, as exemplified. - The
inlet conduit 170 includes aninlet conduit sidewall 178 extending between the inlet conduitupstream end 172 and the inlet conduitdownstream end 174. As exemplified, the projectingconduit sidewall 248 may form an outlet end portion of theinlet conduit sidewall 178. - The projecting conduit outlet opening 282 is provided at the inlet conduit
downstream end 174. As exemplified, the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 may be a port opening into theair treatment chamber 210. As exemplified, the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 may be an unobstructed opening (e.g., not covered by a screen or other porous member). As exemplified, the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 may be located at achamber inlet port 294 of theair treatment chamber 210. - As discussed previously, if a sidewall opening is provided and an end wall is not provided, or if two sidewall openings are provided, whether or not an end wall is provided, then an air treatment
chamber air inlet 230 may include an airpermeable section 460 - As exemplified in
FIGS. 14 to 16 , an air treatmentchamber air inlet 230 includes an airpermeable section 460 in addition to the inletdownstream opening 258. The bulk of air is directed through the inletdownstream opening 258, which is open and does not have a mesh material or the like and which may be referred to as the primary opening. A lesser volume of air is allowed to pass through the airpermeable section 460, e.g., from theair treatment inlet 230 into theair treatment chamber 210. The inletdownstream opening 258 and the airpermeable section 460 provide parallel routes. - The air
permeable section 460 may comprise or consist of anopening 462 through theinlet sidewall 260 with abarrier 464 to reduce airflow therethrough. Thebarrier 464 is permeable to air (i.e., porous) thereby essentially partially closing theopening 462 while permitting air flow therethrough. Thebarrier 464 may encourage air flow through the inletdownstream opening 258. As exemplified inFIGS. 15 and 16 , the airpermeable section 460 is a porous section. The airpermeable section 460 includes aporous material 464 closing theopening 462 in theinlet sidewall 260. In some embodiments, theporous material 464 is a mesh material. The mesh material may have a pore size of 20 mesh to 200 mesh, 40 mesh to 160 mesh, or, optionally, 80 mesh to 120 mesh. However. it will be appreciated that theporous material 464 may be any suitable porous material, such as foam or felt or a perforated wall. - The air
permeable section 460 and the inletdownstream opening 258 each open into thefree volume 470 of theair treatment chamber 210. Upon exiting either of the airpermeable section 460 or the inletdownstream opening 258, the air enters thefree volume 470 of theair treatment chamber 210. The airpermeable section 460 forms a secondary pathway between theair treatment inlet 230 and theair treatment chamber 210. This secondary pathway results in a reduction of the power required for themotor 322 to produce a given air flow rate. - Optionally, this secondary pathway results in a reduction in the power requirement of between 0.5 Watts and 10 Watts, 1 Watt and 6 Watts, or 2 Watts and 4 Watts.
- In the exemplified embodiment of
FIGS. 15 and 16 , the air treatmentchamber air inlet 230 includes the projectingconduit 240 with the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 opening to thechamber inlet port 294 and asecondary opening 472 through which air may pass, and the inlet airpermeable section 460 may include or consist of thesecondary opening 472. - As exemplified, the
secondary opening 472 may be an opening in theprojection conduit sidewall 248. The secondary opening may have the same axial length as theoutlet opening 282 or it may be longer or shorter. Alternately, or in addition, the secondary opening may be opposed to the outlet opening or it may be axially spaced from the projecting conduit outlet opening 282 by, e.g., a portion of the projectingconduit sidewall 248. - Alternatively, as exemplified in
FIGS. 17 to 20 , the air treatmentchamber air inlet 230 may include theexternal conduit 140. It will be appreciated that air treatmentchamber air inlet 230 may include theexternal conduit 140 without anintegral projection conduit 240, or, as exemplified, may include both theprojection conduit 240 and theexternal conduit 140. - As exemplified in
FIG. 20 , the inletdownstream opening 258 may be formed by overlapping openings of theexternal conduit 140 and the projectingconduit 240. Similarly, the inlet air permeable portion may be formed by the overlapping openings of theexternal conduit 140 and the projectingconduit 240. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 15 and 16 , theprojection conduit 240 may include the projection conduit outlet opening 282 and the separatesecondary opening 472, while theexternal conduit 140 may include a firstdownstream opening 474 and a seconddownstream opening 476 separate from the firstdownstream opening 474 separated by a portion of theexternal conduit sidewall 146. The firstdownstream opening 474 and the seconddownstream opening 476 of theexternal conduit 140 may be openings in theexternal conduit sidewall 146, as exemplified. Theair treatment inlet 230 may include theprojection conduit 240 with theexternal conduit 140 received in theprojection conduit 240 with the firstdownstream opening 474 aligned with the projection conduit outlet opening 282 and the seconddownstream opening 476 aligned with thesecondary opening 472. It will be appreciated that in embodiments in which the airpermeable section 460 is a porous section and is formed by overlapping openings of multiple members, theporous material 464 may be included in only one of the multiple members. For example, theporous material 464 may extend across the seconddownstream opening 476 while thesecondary opening 472 is unobstructed. - Optionally, the air
permeable section 460 is opposed to the inletdownstream opening 258 across an interior passage of theair treatment inlet 230. The airpermeable section 460 may include a portion that is opposite (i.e., directly across from) the inletdownstream opening 258, as exemplified. - The air
permeable section 460 and/or the inletdownstream opening 258 may be provided upstream of theinlet end wall 262. Optionally, the airpermeable section 460 and/or the inletdownstream opening 258 is downstream of a wand or auxiliary cleaning tool. In some embodiments, the airpermeable section 460 and/or the inletdownstream opening 258 have downstream ends that are located at the inlet end wall 262 (e.g., abutting the end wall). However, it will be appreciated that the airpermeable section 460 and/or the inletdownstream opening 258 may be provided at any suitable location opening into theair treatment chamber 210. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 21 to 23 , in embodiments in which theexternal conduit 140 is received in the projectingconduit 240, theexternal conduit 140 and the projectingconduit 240 may each include an alignment member. The alignment members are provided to assist a user in inserting theexternal conduit 140 into the projectingconduit 240 in an appropriate orientation. Optionally, thealignment members external conduit 140 from being inserted if misaligned. The projectingconduit alignment member 480 and the externalconduit alignment member 482 may be coupled when theexternal conduit 140 is received in the projectingconduit 240 in a suitable position in which at least one opening of theexternal conduit 140 is aligned with at least one opening in the projectingconduit 240 to allow airflow therethrough. - Optionally, one of the projecting
conduit alignment member 480 and the externalconduit alignment member 482 is a male member and the other is a corresponding female member. For example, the male member may be a radial projection (e.g., a key), and the female member may be a corresponding channel. In some embodiments, the alignment members may be electrical connectors. The projectingconduit alignment member 480 may be a female electrical connector, and the externalconduit alignment member 482 may be a male electrical connector. - The following is a description of an inlet
downstream opening 258 having a variable cross sectional area, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein. - In accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 21 to 23 , the inletdownstream opening 258 of theair treatment inlet 230 has a variable cross sectional area. The inletdownstream opening 258 has a cross sectional area that is variable between a first cross sectional area and a second cross sectional area that is less than the first cross sectional area. The size of the cross sectional area of the inletdownstream opening 258 may be varied to change the separation characteristics of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100, such as to change backpressure or to change the ratio between the effectiveair inlet length 290 and the chamberaxial length 292. As discussed elsewhere herein, the ratio between the effectiveair inlet length 290 and the chamberaxial length 292 affects the number of turns that air passing through the cyclone chamber is subject to, and so affects the efficiency of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. - Accordingly, the first cross sectional area may have a first effective air inlet length and the second cross sectional area may have a second effective air inlet length that is less than the first effective air inlet length. Air flowing through a cyclone may have a greater number of turns in the
cyclone chamber 210 when the inletdownstream opening 258 has the second, shorter effective air inlet length rather than the first effective air inlet length. - It will be appreciated that the cross sectional area of a sidewall inlet may be changed in any suitable way. In some embodiments, the
air treatment inlet 230 is reconfigured by moving amoveable inlet member 280 of theair treatment inlet 230 to adjust the size of the cross sectional area (e.g., axial length) of the inletdownstream opening 258. It will be appreciated that the cross sectional area of the inletdownstream opening 258 may vary as themoveable inlet member 280 moves. Themoveable inlet member 280 may be moveable between a first member position in which the inletdownstream opening 258 has a first cross sectional area and a second member position in which the inletdownstream opening 258 has a second cross sectional area that is less than the first cross sectional area. - The moving
member 280 may be any suitable member. For example, in embodiments in which theair treatment inlet 230 includes one conduit (e.g., external conduit 140) received within another (e.g., inlet conduit 170) with the inletdownstream opening 258 formed by overlapping sidewall openings of the conduits, one conduit may be themoveable inlet member 280 and may be adjusted within the other to change the size (e.g., axial length) of the inletdownstream opening 258. - Alternatively, as exemplified in
FIGS. 21 to 23 , themoveable inlet member 280 may be a blocking member receivable within a conduit of theair treatment inlet 230. The blocking member blocks off a portion of the conduit to force theair flow path 160 out of a sidewall outlet of a conduit upstream of the blocking member. For example, the blocking member may be anend wall moveable inlet member 280 may be or include theclosure member 310, or theclosure member 310 may include themoveable inlet member 280. - The
moveable inlet member 280 may be moveable from a first member position to a second member position. In the first position, themoveable inlet member 280 may block or partially block the downstream end of a conduit and in the second position, themoveable inlet member 280 may open or partially open the downstream end of a conduit. Accordingly, adjusting the position of themoveable inlet member 280 may adjust the amount of air exiting axially out of the downstream end of a conduit and the amount exiting through a sidewall opening of a conduit. Alternately, the first position may be upstream of the second position whereby, as themoveable inlet member 280 is moved from a second downstream position to a first upstream position, the length of a sidewall outlet is shortened. - It will be appreciated that the
moveable inlet member 280 may be moveable in any suitable way. Themovable member 280 may be moveable between a position in an air inlet conduit of the air treatment chamber and a position removed therefore. For example, the moveable member may move about a pivot axis or along a liner path (e.g., a radial path with respect to the air treatment member longitudinal axis) between a position received in the projectingconduit 240 and/or theexternal conduit 140 and a position removed from within the projectingconduit 240 and/or theexternal conduit 140. Alternately, or in addition, themoveable inlet member 280 may be axially moveable parallel to the air treatment memberlongitudinal axis 204 and/or theinlet conduit axis 174. Themoveable inlet member 280 is moveable to a position at which it blocks off a portion of a sidewall opening that would otherwise be available to theair flow path 160 and may therefore be referred to as a blocking member. - The
moveable inlet member 280 may form aterminal end 490 of theair treatment inlet 230 or of theexternal conduit 140 or of any conduit in which it is provided. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 21 to 23 , the inletdownstream opening 258 may extend to themoveable inlet member 280 when themoveable inlet member 280 is in it downstream position (seeFIG. 22 ). In this position, themoveable inlet member 280 forms an end wall of theair treatment inlet 230 at the outlet end thereof, and extends transverse to a flow direction of air through the upstream portion of theair treatment inlet 230. As themoveable inlet member 280 moves to its upstream position, the length of the inletdownstream opening 258 is shortened whereby the effectiveair inlet length 290 of the inletdownstream opening 258 is varied. - The moveable inlet member may be part of the air treatment assembly and may be slideable receivable in the
external conduit 140 when theexternal conduit 140 is inserted into the dirty air inlet. Accordingly, when theexternal conduit 140 is inserted into the dirty air inlet and the moveable member is at its axially inner (rearward) position, themoveable inlet member 280 may extend across the downstream end of theexternal conduit 140 to close off an internal passage of theexternal conduit 140 through which theair flow path 160 extends, effectively forming an end wall thereof. Alternately, themoveable inlet member 280 may be a moveableinlet end wall 262 of the external conduit 140 (e.g., a wand). Optionally, themoveable inlet member 280 may be part of the externalconduit end cap 270 of the external conduit. As such, it may be removable with the external conduit from the surface cleaning apparatus. Alternately, if theexternal conduit 140 does not extend into the surface cleaning apparatus to the upstream (forward) position of themoveable member 280, then the moveable member may move withing theinlet conduit 170. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 24 to 26 , themoveable inlet member 280 may be received within the projectingconduit 240. Themoveable inlet member 280 may extend across the projectingconduit 240 to close off an internal passage of the projectingconduit 240 or a portion thereof through which theair flow path 160 extends. Accordingly, themoveable inlet member 280 may direct air that is traveling through theair flow path 160 to exit the projectingconduit 240 through a sidewall outlet that is located upstream of themoveable inlet member 280. - In some embodiments, as exemplified in
FIGS. 24 and 25 , themoveable inlet member 280 may move along amoveable member track 492. Thetrack 492 may be or include, e.g., a rail. Themoveable member track 492 may extend axially (i.e., parallel to the air treatment longitudinal axis 218). Themoveable member track 492 may be fixed to, or built into, thechamber sidewall 220, and may optionally extend only within theair treatment inlet 230. Themoveable member track 492 may be a linear rail, which may be provided in the inner side of the sidewall. - The cross sectional area may be changed automatically or manually, or the
surface cleaning apparatus 100 may be configured such that both automatic and manual options are available. In embodiments in which theair treatment inlet 230 includes amoveable member 280, themoveable inlet member 280 may be moved manually and/or automatically. For example, the moveable member may be moved by a manually moved mechanical link, air pressure or suction caused by the suction motor, and/or a further motor or a solenoid that is provided in addition to the suction motor, including any of the mechanisms described herein. - The
moveable inlet member 280 may move in response to pressure changes within thesurface cleaning apparatus 100, such as within theair treatment inlet 230 and/or thefree volume 470 of theair treatment chamber 210. - Optionally, the
moveable inlet member 280 moves to keep the pressure at a constant level. For example, if air pressure drops (due to dirt accumulating on a pre-motor filter or the screen of the vortex finder in a cyclone chamber), then themovable member 280 may move to increase the cross sectional area of the inletdownstream opening 258 thereby reducing the back pressure through theopening 258 and offsetting or partially offsetting the air pressure drop. This may assist in maintaining cyclonic flow as despite the pressure drop. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 25 and 26 , themoveable inlet member 280 may be manually moveable. Alternately, the moveable member may be automatically moved in response to a change of pressure or air flow through the surface cleaning apparatus. Accordingly, for example, one or more pressure or air flow sensors may be provided in the air flow path and upon issuance of a signal from one or more sensors, the position of the moveable member may be changed, e.g., by a solenoid or stepper motor. - An
actuator 502 may be provided to control the movement of themoveable inlet member 280. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 24 and 25 , theactuator 502 is a manuallymoveable toggle 500, which may be on a surface of themain body 120. For example, themanual toggle 500 may be a mechanical slider, as exemplified. Themanual toggle 500 is provided to be manually manipulated (e.g., slid) by a user. The user may move themanual toggle 500 between a first toggle position (FIG. 24 ) and a second toggle position (FIG. 25 ). Moving themanual toggle 500 between the first toggle position and the second toggle position may move themoveable inlet member 280 between the first member position and the second member position. - The
manual toggle 500 is drivingly coupled to themoveable inlet member 280 to move themoveable inlet member 280 between the first member position and the second member position - The
manual toggle 500 may be mechanically linked directly to themoveable inlet member 280 such that moving themanual toggle 500 pushes and/or pulls themoveable inlet member 280. In some embodiments, the when themanual toggle 500 is in the first toggle position themoveable inlet member 280 is in the first member position, and when themanual toggle 500 is in the second toggle position themoveable inlet member 280 is in the second member position. Accordingly, themanual toggle 500 may be a body that is directly secured to themoveable inlet member 280 as exemplified inFIGS. 25 and 26 (e.g., molded as part thereof). - Alternatively, as exemplified in
FIGS. 27 and 28 , themanual toggle 500 may be mechanically drivingly coupled to themoveable inlet member 280 viamechanical coupling 504.Manual toggle 500 may therefore be an actuator 502 that may be a body that is directly secured to amechanical linkage 504 that is directly secured to themoveable inlet member 280. - Alternately, an
actuator 502 which actuates an electromechanical member, such as a motor (e.g., a stepper motor) or a solenoid may be provided to move themoveable inlet member 280 between the first member position and the second member position. Such an actuator, which may be referred to as a powered actuator may be coupled to a power supply of the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., a battery). A powered actuator may be communicatively coupled to the control system to be controlled thereby. - Alternately, the
actuator 502 may be an unpowered actuator such as, e.g., an aneroid capsule responsive to pressure changes. Themoveable member actuator 502 may be controlled in any suitable way, such as by the manual toggle or automatically by signals generated by the control system 370 of the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., in response to changes in pressure, changes in sensor values, or changes in operational modes). - The
moveable member actuator 502 may optionally be a dedicated actuator for controlling only themoveable inlet member 280. Any actuator discussed herein may be used. - Alternatively,
moveable member actuator 502 may control another function of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 in addition to themoveable inlet member 280. For example, theactuator 502 may be provided to control another setting of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (i.e., presented to the user as being for the control of the other setting). For example, theactuator 502 may be a cleaning mode setting toggle (e.g., selecting between an above floor cleaning mode and a floor cleaning mode), and actuating theactuator 502 may select a mode of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100, and themoveable inlet member 280 may be adjusted to compliment the selected mode, as disused further elsewhere herein. In such a case, thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may not include any indicia indicating that theactuator 502 controls themoveable inlet member 280. - Alternatively, or additionally (e.g., indirectly, as discussed further elsewhere herein), the cross-sectional area of the inlet
downstream opening 258 may be automatically varied based upon an air flow rate of air in theair flow path 160. When the air flow rate is a first flow rate, the inletdownstream opening 258 has a first cross-sectional area and when the air flow rate is a second flow rate that is lower than the first flow rate, the inletdownstream opening 258 has a second cross-sectional area that is different from the first cross-sectional area and may be smaller. The air flow rate may vary the cross-sectional area directly and/or indirectly. - The air flow rate may vary the cross sectional area directly, as the force of air impinging the
moveable inlet member 280 may cause a change in the positioning of themoveable inlet member 280. The moveable member may be biased to an upstream (forward) position. In such a case, if the first air flow rate is higher than the second air flow rate, then air impinging themoveable inlet member 280 at the first air flow rate (i.e., the higher air flow rate) may carry greater force and so moves themoveable inlet member 280 farther downstream (rearwardly) than air impinging themoveable inlet member 280 at the second air flow rate. Moving themoveable inlet member 280 farther downstream increases the axial length of the inletdownstream opening 258 and thereby enables a higher airflow into the air treatment member. Accordingly, the force of air may move themoveable inlet member 280 automatically to increase the axial length of theopening 258 and the biasing member (e.g., a spring) may move the moveable member to reduce the axial length of theopening 258 when the air flow rate decreases, all without user intervention. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 29 and 30 , thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may include a biasing member 506 (e.g., a spring or compressible balloon) biasing themovable member 280 to a position that results in a smaller cross sectional area of the inletdownstream opening 258. Themoveable inlet member 280 may be biased towards the second member position (FIG. 30 ) by the biasingmember 506, and the force of air impinging themoveable inlet member 280 may overcome the force of the biasingmember 506 to move themoveable inlet member 280 all or part of the way to the first member position (FIG. 29 ). - Alternatively, or additionally, the cross sectional area of the inlet
downstream opening 258 may vary automatically as the surface cleaning apparatus is reconfigured wherein the reconfiguration results in a change in the air flow rate. The change in air flow rate may be due to a change in power level provided to the suction motor and, accordingly, each of the air flow rate and the cross sectional area of the inletdownstream opening 258 may respond to a common input (e.g., a change in power level). Accordingly, the cross sectional area of the inletdownstream opening 258 and the air flow rate both respond to the same user action, such as a user activating a toggle, such as pushing a soft button (touch screen) or a hard button or moving a slider to change an operating mode of the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., changing from a low flow mode to a high flow mode), or reconfiguring thesurface cleaning apparatus 100, such as mounting a portable unit to afloor cleaning unit 154 to form, e.g., a stick vacuum. - For example, the
surface cleaning apparatus 100 is removably mountable to thefloor cleaning unit 154 whereby, when thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is mounted to thefloor cleaning unit 154 the surface cleaning apparatus is operable in an upright vacuum cleaner mode and, when the portable cleaning unit is removed from thefloor cleaning unit 154, the portable cleaning unit is operable in an above floor (hand vac) cleaning mode. The above floor vacuum cleaner mode may comprise the first air flow rate, e.g., as a result of a first power level being supplied to thesuction motor 322. The upright vacuum cleaning mode may comprise the second air flow rate that is lower than the first air flow rate, e.g., as a result of a second power level being supplied to thesuction motor 322 that is less than the first power level. The above floor cleaning mode may be a high-power mode and the upright cleaning mode may be a low-power mode, wherein a low power mode may allow for a longer run time. If the power level of thesuction motor 322 is automatically varied as an operating mode of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is changed from the upright vacuum cleaner mode to the above floor cleaning mode, then the cross-section area of theair treatment inlet 230 may also be automatically varied as an operating mode of the surface cleaning apparatus is changed from the upright vacuum cleaner mode to the above floor cleaning mode. - This change in the cross-sectional area may be due to the change in air flow as discussed previously. Alternately, the change may be due to the moveable member being moved by the insertion of the
external conduit 140 driving themoveable member 280 to the upright vacuum cleaner mode and the moveable member returning to the hand vac cleaning mode when theexternal conduit 140 is removed. The external conduit may be driving connected to the moveable member upon insertion and a biasing member may return the moveable member to the hand vac cleaning mode upon withdrawal of the external conduit. Alternately, the change may be due to an electromechanical member moving the moveable member in response to mounting and removing the surface cleaning apparatus from the floor cleaning unit (e.g., insertion and/or removal of the external conduit). - A lower power mode may result in a lower air flow rate which may result in a lower cyclone efficiency. The
moveable inlet member 280 may be moved to decrease the axial length of a cyclone inlet to thereby to increase the number of turns of theair flow path 160 within thecyclone chamber 210. Themoveable inlet member 280 may be moved by any method discussed herein in response to the mode change or in response to the same user command that caused the mode change. - Alternately, or in addition, the cross-sectional area of the inlet
downstream opening 258 may be varied based on dirt characteristics in the surface cleaning apparatus. The dirt characteristics may be one or more of the size (i.e., particle size) of dirt which is collected, the size of dirt that is expected to be collected (e.g., based on a mode selection), the size of dirt that is carried by anair flow path 160 downstream of a selectedcomponent 510 of the surface cleaning apparatus, and the dirt loading of an air flow path downstream of the selectedcomponent 510 of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. It will be appreciated that the selectedcomponent 510 referred to above may be theinlet conduit 170, a dirt separating component such as theair treatment chamber 210, theair treatment assembly 200 as a whole, or thepre-motor filter 330. The cross sectional area of the inletdownstream opening 258 may be varied (e.g., the effectiveair inlet length 290 varied) to change (i.e., increase or decrease) the efficiency of theair treatment chamber 210. For example, the effectiveair inlet length 290 may be reduced to produce more turns in a cyclone chamber and to thereby remove finer dirt from theair flow path 160. - For example, when dirt having a first size is collected the inlet
downstream opening 258 may have the first cross-sectional area, and when dirt having a second size that is smaller than the first size is collected the inletdownstream opening 258 may have the second cross-sectional area. Alternately or in addition, when air downstream of the selectedcomponent 510 has a first dirt loading the inletdownstream opening 258 may have the first cross-sectional area, and when air downstream of the inletdownstream opening 258 has a second dirt loading that is higher than the first dirt loading the inletdownstream opening 258 may have the second cross-sectional area. - It will be appreciated that dirt particle size or dirt loading may be determined in any suitable way, such as via a
dirt sensor 512, as exemplified inFIGS. 27 and 28 , or via user observation. In some embodiments, thedirt sensor 512 is operable to detect a size of dirt in anair flow path 160 and/or thedirt collection region 300. Adirt sensor 512 that is operable to detect a size of dirt in theair flow path 160 may be referred to as a dirt size sensor. Thedirt sensor 512 may determine an average, mean, or minimum particle size of detected particles, and may base its output on that value. Alternatively, or additionally, in some embodiments thedirt sensor 512 is operable to detect a dirt loading of an airstream. Adirt sensor 512 that is operable to detect dirt loading of an air stream may be referred to as a dirt loading sensor. Thedirt sensor 512 may determine a proportional volume of dirt in the air stream, and base its output on that value. - It will be appreciated that the
dirt sensor 512 may be any suitable sensor. In some embodiments, thedirt sensor 512 is an acoustic sensor (e.g., a microphone). For example, the output of the acoustic sensor may be used to gauge particle size. In some embodiments, thedirt sensor 512 is an optical sensor. In some embodiments, thedirt sensor 512 is a laser sensor. - The
dirt sensor 512 may be located at any suitable location of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. In some embodiments, thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 includes adirt sensor 512 in, or arranged to detect dirt in (i.e., directed towards), the air treatment chamber, thedirt collection region 300 and/or in a dirt outlet between thedirt collection region 300 and anair treatment chamber 210. In some embodiments, thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 includes adirt sensor 512 in the air flow path 160 (e.g., in the inlet 170) or arranged to detect dirt travelling towards the air flow path 160 (e.g., in the external conduit 140). - In embodiments in which a
dirt sensor 512 is in, or arranged to detect dirt in, theair flow path 160, it will be appreciated that the dirt sensor may be in, or arranged to detect dirt in, any suitable location. That location may be within (e.g., as exemplified bysensor 512 a, seeFIG. 28 ) or downstream of theair treatment outlet 232, such as within or downstream of the vortex finder 238). That location may be at the air treatmentchamber outlet end 216 upstream of theair treatment outlet 232, or upstream of the pre-motor filter 330 (e.g., within thepre-motor filter housing 334 upstream of thepre-motor filter 330, as exemplified bysensor 512 b). That location may be upstream of the air treatment chamber, as exemplified bysensor 512 c. In some embodiments, that location is downstream of thefree volume 470 of theair treatment chamber 210, downstream of theair treatment assembly 200 as a whole, and/or downstream of thepre-motor filter 330, to detect changes in the size of dirt particles that are making it past these dirt separation components. It will be appreciated that any suitable number of dirt sensors may be used, and their outputs may be used in any suitable way, e.g., to send a signal which may be sent to a controller which in turns sends a signal to actuate an electromechanical member. - A user may manually change the position of the
moveable inlet member 280 due to changing dirt characteristics. For example, thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may generate an alert to prompt a user to adjust the position of themoveable inlet member 280 based upon a dirt characteristic that is determined. The alert may be, e.g., an audible alert played by a speaker of the apparatus, or a visual alert displayed on the apparatus (e.g., a flashing light or an illuminated icon). In use, the user may respond to the alert by usingactuator 502 to move themoveable inlet member 280. - The alert may be generated in response to detecting a change in the size of dirt that is being collected or the size or amount of dirt that is travelling downstream of the air treatment chamber and/or the air treatment assembly. In some embodiments, the alert is generated in response to the output of the
dirt sensor 512. Alternatively, or additionally, the alert may be generated in response to a user action indicative that thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is being or will be used to collect dirt of a different size, such as switching a mode of operation (e.g., above floor vs. upright) or adding an attachment. - Alternatively or in addition, the cross-sectional area of the inlet
downstream opening 258 may be automatically varied due to changing dirt characteristics. The variation may be in response to an output of adirt sensor 512 or in response to a user action indicative that thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is being or will be used to collect dirt of a different size or to a reconfiguration of the surface cleaning apparatus to a different cleaning mode. Themoveable member actuator 502 may move themoveable inlet member 280 in response to an output from thedirt sensor 512 indicative of a change in the dirt characteristics (e.g., particle size or dirt loading of an air flow stream), or in response to a user mode selection or accessory attachment. For example, when an output of thedirt sensor 512 is indicative of finer dirt being detected, themoveable member actuator 502 may move themovable member 280 to shorten the effectiveair input length 290. - While in some embodiments the cross sectional area of the inlet downstream opening 258 changes in response to changes in the surface cleaning apparatus' operational mode, it will be appreciated that in some embodiments the cross sectional area of the inlet
downstream opening 258 may also vary within a single mode. For example, the cross sectional area of the inletdownstream opening 258 may vary during an upright mode if there is a change in dirt characteristics (e.g., a sensed change in dirt loading of an air stream). Similarly, the cross sectional area of the inletdownstream opening 258 may change during an above floor cleaning mode if there is a change in dirt characteristics (e.g., a sensed change in particle size). - The following is a description of a
closure member 310 which is curved, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the operable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein. - in accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 7 to 10, 31 and 32 , theclosure member 310 is curved along at least one dimension with respect to a coordinate system defined by the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110, the apparatusvertical axis 112, and the apparatustransverse axis 114. The closure member may therefore be referred to as a curved member. Optionally, theclosure member 310 is curved with respect only to a single dimension, as exemplified. In other words, theclosure member 310 may be arcuate in shape. - The
closure member 310 may have acurved surface 520 which, in the closed position, curves in at least one plane of a set of axial planes, wherein the set of axial planes are each defined by any two of the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110, the apparatusvertical axis 112, and the apparatustransverse axis 114 extending therein. As exemplified inFIGS. 9 and 10 , thecurved surface 520 in the closed position may curve in afirst plane 522 of the set of axial planes in which the apparatusvertical axis 112 and the apparatustransverse axis 114 extend. As exemplified inFIGS. 7 and 8 , thecurved surface 520 in the closed position may curve in asecond plane 524 of the set of axial planes in which the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110 and the apparatusvertical axis 112 extend. It will be appreciated that the curved surface may also or alternatively curve in a third axial plane of the set of axial planes in which the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110 and the apparatustransverse axis 114 extend. - As exemplified in
FIG. 33 , theclosure member 310 may be curved in a selectedplane 526 that is transverse to the axial direction (i.e., transverse to the apparatus longitudinal axis). The selectedplane 526 may optionally be perpendicular to the apparatus longitudinal axis, as exemplified. As exemplified, theinlet sidewall 260 may be curved in the same selectedplane 526. Optionally, theinlet sidewall 260 and theclosure member 310 each have a surface with a generally common curvature in the selectedplane 526. As exemplified inFIGS. 31 to 33 , theclosure member 310 in the open position may have aclosure profile 530 in a plane that is transverse to the apparatus longitudinal axis (e.g., selected plane 526) that is similar to a sidewall profile 532 of theinlet sidewall 260 in the same plane. Theclosure member 310 may move longitudinally (i.e., generally parallel to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110) from an open position in which it is in the nozzle or within the air treatment inlet, to a closed position in which it closes the inletdownstream opening 258 in theinlet sidewall 260 of theair treatment inlet 230. Alternatively, as exemplified inFIGS. 9 and 10 , theclosure member 310 may pivot down to theinlet sidewall 260 about an axis that extends generally parallel to theinlet sidewall 260. - Optionally, at least one dimension of the
curved surface 520 is linear with respect to the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110, the apparatusvertical axis 112, and the apparatustransverse axis 114. In other words, the closure surface may be arcuate in shape. Optionally, thecurved surface 520 curves in only one plane of the set of axial planes when theclosure member 310 is in the closed position. In other words, thecurved surface 520 extends generally parallel to at least one of the set of axial planes. - In embodiments in which the
surface cleaning apparatus 100 includes aclosure seat 312, theclosure seat 312 may be a curved seat. Thecurved surface 520 may seat against (i.e., touch at each point along the closure perimeter 534) thecurved closure seat 312 when theclosure member 310 is in the closed position. Theclosure seat 312 may have a curvature that matches the curvature of thecurved surface 520. - As exemplified, the
closure member 310 may be a thin body, such as a curved plate. Theclosure member 310 may have afirst face 536 and an oppositesecond face 538. Thefirst face 536 and thesecond face 538 may extend generally parallel to one another, and may be of generally the same size and/or shape. Thecurved surface face 520 may befirst face 536 or thesecond face 538. - Optionally, the
closure member 310 is shaped to match a shape of a component or opening of theair treatment inlet 230. Theclosure member 310 may be shaped to match the shape of the inlet upstream opening 256 or the inletdownstream opening 258. As exemplified inFIGS. 7 and 8 , the inlet upstream opening 256 may be a circular shape curved along one dimension. Theclosure member 310 may be a curved and/or circular shape. As exemplified inFIGS. 9 and 10 , the inletdownstream opening 258 may be a rectangular shape curved along one dimension (e.g., along a dimension parallel to the apparatusvertical axis 112, as exemplified). Theclosure member 310 may be a rectangular shape and/or curved along one dimension. - The
closure member 310 may pivot about a closure axis ofrotation 540 between an open position (FIG. 7 ) and a closed position (FIG. 8 ). Theclosure member 310 may be pivotally coupled to a further body of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 by a closure pivot joint 542. The closure axis ofrotation 540 may extend in any suitable direction. Optionally, the closure axis ofrotation 540 is generally parallel to one of the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110, the air treatmentlongitudinal axis 218, the apparatustransverse axis 114, or the apparatusvertical axis 112. Optionally, the closure axis of 540 is generally perpendicular to one of the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110, the air treatmentlongitudinal axis 218, the apparatustransverse axis 114, or the apparatusvertical axis 112. When closed, the closure member may extend generally perpendicular to the direction of air flow through the portion of the air flow path that the closure member closes when in the closed position. - As exemplified, the curved closure member may close an opening that is directed generally parallel to the
conduit axis 254 or an opening in theinlet sidewall 260. Optionally, as exemplified inFIGS. 9 and 10 , thecurved closure member 310 pivots down over an opening in theinlet sidewall 260. - As discussed subsequently, it will be appreciated that the
closure member 310 may be external to theair flow path 160 when in the closed position. For example, theclosure member 310 may rotate or translate into a pocket that is located exterior to the air flow path (e.g., a pocket provided on an exterior surface of the inlet conduit 170). The pocket may have a port that opens onto the, e.g.,inlet conduit 170. When received in the pocket, the closure member may close the port and, optionally, form part of the surface of the air flow path (e.g., part of the inlet conduit 170) to thereby provide a smooth continuous surface of the air flow path. - The following is a description of a
closure member 310 that is axially moveable, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the operable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, the user interface on the handle, the user interface overlying the main body housing, the user interface on an annular portion, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein. - In accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 34 to 39 , theclosure member 310 moves axially with respect to the air treatment memberlongitudinal axis 204 and/or theinlet conduit axis 254 between a closed position (FIG. 39 ) and/or a partially closed position (FIG. 35 ) and an open position (FIG. 34 ). When the closure member is in the open position, during operation of the surface cleaning apparatus, air flows through theair treatment inlet 230 to theair treatment chamber 210. When theclosure member 310 is in the closed position, air flow through theair treatment inlet 230 is inhibited. In the closed position, closure member may inhibit or prevent dirt exiting the surface cleaning apparatus when the suction motor is deenergized and, e.g., the dirty air inlet points downwardly. - When the
closure member 310 is in the open position, airflow through theair flow path 160 may have aflow direction 550 at the location at which theclosure member 310 is positioned when in the closed position (e.g., the position exemplified inFIG. 38 ), and theclosure member 310 may be moveable generally parallel to thatflow direction 550 between the open and closed positions. Theflow direction 550 may be axial with respect to the air treatment memberlongitudinal axis 204 and/or theinlet conduit axis 176. Theair treatment member 202 may have a first end and a second end, wherein the second end is spaced apart from the first end in theflow direction 550. Theflow direction 550 may be rearward. When theclosure member 310 moves to the open position, the closure member moves axially in the flow direction and when theclosure member 310 moves to the closed position, the closure member moves opposite to theflow direction 550 from the open position through theinlet conduit 170, towards the inletupstream end 250 of theair treatment inlet 230 to the closed position. - Optionally, in the closed position, the closure member abuts and end wall of port in the air flow path. For example, the upstream end of the
inlet conduit 170 may have an inlet port and, in the closed position, theclosure member 310 abuts the inlet port of theinlet conduit 170 or the upstream end of theair treatment inlet 230 may have an inlet port (i.e., the chamber inlet opening 234), and, in the closed position, theclosure member 310 abuts the inlet port of theair treatment inlet 230. - It will be appreciated that the
closure member 310 may have any suitable shape. Theclosure member 310 may be, e.g., circular, oval, or square, and may be, e.g., planar or curved. Optionally, theclosure member 310 is shaped to match a shape of a component or opening of theair treatment inlet 230 that is to be closed. Accordingly, for example, theclosure member 310 may be shaped to match the shape of the inlet upstream opening 256 or the inletdownstream opening 258. If the inlet upstream opening 256 is planar or circular in shape, then theclosure member 310 may be planar and/or circular in shape. The inletdownstream opening 258 may be a rectangular shape curved along one dimension (e.g., along a dimension parallel to the apparatusvertical axis 112, as exemplified) in which case theclosure member 310 may be a rectangular shape and/or curved along one dimension. Theclosure member 310 may cover a cross sectional area that is equal to a cross sectional area of the inlet upstream opening 256 and/or the inletdownstream opening 258 if the closure member is to seat in the opening or larger if the closure member is to overlie the opening when in the closed position. - It will be appreciated that t the
closure member 310 may be theinlet end wall 262. Alternatively, as exemplified inFIGS. 31 and 32 , theclosure member 310 may extend generally parallel to theflow direction 550. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 31 and 32 , theclosure member 310 may close a tangential inlet to the air treatment chamber 210 (i.e., as opposed to a transversely extending opening). Theclosure member 310 may be axially moveable to a position in which it extends across (Le., closes) asidewall opening 258. As exemplified inFIG. 32 in the closed position the closure member may close the air treatmentdownstream opening 258. In the open position, theclosure member 310 may be received against a wall of theair treatment member 202, extending across the wall (e.g., the inlet sidewall 260) and may therefore overly the sidewall. The closure member may have the shape of an annulus sector. Theclosure member 310 may move generally along the wall of theair treatment member 202 between (i.e., translating between) the closed and open positions. In some embodiments, an axially extending surface of theclosure member 310 along a longest dimension of theclosure member 310 faces an axially extending surface of theair treatment member 202 that has theoutlet 258 so as to overlie theoutlet 258 when in the closed position, and, optionally, theclosure member 310 moves generally parallel to the axially extending surface of the air treatment member between the closed and open positions. In some embodiments, theclosure member 310 moves rearwardly and/or in theflow direction 550 from the open position to the closed position. - It will be appreciated that the
closure member 310 may be moved in any suitable way. Theclosure member 310 may be moved manually or automatically. Theclosure member 310 may be moved, e.g., by air pressure or suction generated by the suction motor or by any of the driving members discussed elsewhere herein. The closure member may be moved by being pushed back by an upstream end of theexternal conduit 140 when theexternal conduit 140 is inserted into thenozzle 180, by an actuator of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 other than the suction motor, or by a manual sider or other manual toggle accessible to the user from outside the surface cleaning apparatus as discussed previously. - In some embodiments, the
closure member 310 moves along aclosure member track 560 which may include a rail. Theclosure member track 560 may be a linear track. Theclosure member track 560 may extend only within theair treatment inlet 230, or may extend beyond the air treatment inlet 230 (e.g., into a free volume of theair treatment chamber 210 or elsewhere). Optionally, theclosure member 310 moves longitudinally on a rail to the inlet end of theinlet conduit 170 to close theinlet conduit 170. - The following is a description of a
closure member 310 that can be withdrawn from the air flow path. Theclosure member 310 may be at least partially moveable to close a port or into or through a recess or passage formed in a wall or by a plurality of walls of theair treatment member 202. This aspect may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein. - It will be appreciated the
closure member 310 may be provided in any portion of the air flow path, optionally upstream of theair treatment assembly 200. - In accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 40 to 56 , theair treatment assembly 200 has an assemblyfree volume 570 that includes the chamberfree volume 470 of theair treatment chamber 210 and an inletfree volume 572 of theair treatment inlet 230. The chamber free volume is an open space within theair treatment chamber 210 outside theair treatment inlet 230 and theair treatment outlet 232. The inletfree volume 572 is an open space within theair treatment inlet 230 and that is part of theair flow path 160 when theclosure member 310 is in the closed position. - In the open position, the
closure member 310 may be at least partially removed from the assemblyfree volume 570 or fully removed from the assemblyfree volume 570. This aspect reduces the extent to which theclosure member 310 inhibits air flow when in the open position and/or reduces turbulence caused by a significant discontinuity in the transverse cross sectional area of theair treatment inlet 230 at a downstream edge of theclosure member 310 when theclosure member 310 is in the open position. - Optionally, when in the open position, the
closure member 310 may be at least partially moved into or through a closure passage 574 (as exemplified inFIGS. 40 and 41 ) and may be at least partially or fully received in a closure recess (e.g.,pocket 580, exemplified inFIGS. 42 and 43 ) or it may be moved to close a port in a wall of the air flow path 160 (as exemplified inFIGS. 53 and 54 ). Optionally, theclosure member 310 in the open position is fully received in the closure recess or fully moved into or through theclosure passage 574 or moved to close a port and form a smooth wall section at the location of the port. It will be appreciated that the closure passage may be similar to the closure recess, but extending all the way through the wall or walls to an exterior of the air treatment assembly 200 (and, optionally, to an exterior of the surface cleaning apparatus 100) such that theclosure member 310 may be fully withdrawn from theair treatment assembly 200 through the closure passage. - The closure recess may be formed in a single wall, e.g., a recess in a smooth and continuous surface which surface optionally continues a significant portion of the way around the recess (e.g., at least 50%, 75% or 90% of a perimeter of the recess). The closure recess may be formed between walls. The closure recess has a mouth or port which opens into the air flow path, such as into the chamber
free volume 470 or into the inletfree volume 572. The recess may be exterior to the assembly free volume. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 51 and 52 , the closure recess, also referred to as aclosure member pocket 580, may be formed in a sidewall (as exemplified inFIGS. 42 to 54 ) or end wall (as exemplified inFIGS. 55 and 56 ) of theair treatment member 202. In some embodiments, theclosure member pocket 580 is formed in one and only one wall. Optionally, the closure member pocket is formed in thechamber sidewall 220, theinlet sidewall 260, the inlet conduit sidewall 178 (e.g., including thenozzle 180, as exemplified inFIGS. 42 and 43 ), and/or theinlet end wall 262. Optionally, theclosure member pocket 580 is formed in an axially extending sidewall (i.e., extending generally parallel to the apparatus longitudinal axis 218). However, as exemplified inFIGS. 53 and 54 , it will be appreciated that theclosure member pocket 580 may alternatively be formed in asidewall 260 that does not extend axially. - As exemplified in
FIG. 52 , theclosure member 310 may be at least partially withdrawn into aclosure member pocket 580 formed in theinlet end wall 262. Thepocket 580 may be located further in the flow direction 550 (e.g., rearward) from thedirty air inlet 162 than the inletdownstream opening 258, as exemplified. Alternatively, the inletdownstream opening 258 may be further in the flow direction (e.g., rearward) from thedirty air inlet 162 than theclosure member pocket 580. Theclosure member pocket 580 may be formed in a wall of theinlet conduit 170 and/ornozzle 180. - Optionally, the
closure member 310 is withdrawn into a sidewall of a generally smooth-walled bore. The smooth-walled bore is optionally a generally linear bore. As exemplified inFIGS. 42 to 43 , theinlet sidewall 260 and/or inlet conduit sidewall 178 forms a generally smooth-walled bore 568 and theclosure member pocket 580 orpassage 574 is formed in theinlet sidewall 260 orinlet conduit sidewall 178 such that at least a portion of theclosure member 310 may be withdrawn into the sidewall. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 44 and 45 , theclosure member 310 may pivot about the pivot axis to rotate upwards into thepocket 580 and downward to cover an opening of the inlet 230 (e.g., the inlet upstream opening 256, as exemplified). As exemplified inFIGS. 42 and 43 , theinlet conduit sidewall 178 may form the generally smooth-walled bore 568, and theclosure member pocket 580 may be formed in theinlet conduit sidewall 178 such that at least a portion of theclosure member 310 may be withdrawn into theinlet conduit sidewall 178. As exemplified inFIGS. 42 and 43 , thenozzle 180 may have aclosure member pocket 580 formed in a wall therein (e.g., in a sidewall thereof) such that at least a portion of theclosure member 310 may be withdrawn into the nozzle wall. Although it will be appreciated that thepocket 580 may alternately be formed in a sidewall of the inlet 230 (e.g., a portion of theinlet conduit sidewall 178 that extends into the air treatment chamber). It will also be appreciated that, when in the closed position, theclosure member 310 may form part of the smooth-walled bore 568 and may be continuous part thereof. - As exemplified, the
closure member pocket 580 may include at least a portion that is exterior to the assemblyfree volume 570. Theclosure member pocket 580 may extend outward from the assemblyfree volume 570. Optionally, the pocket may have a depth such that when in the closed position, the closure member may abut an inner surface of the wall defining thepocket 580 and may be flush with the smooth-walled bore 568. - At least a portion of the
closure member 310 in the closed position may be positioned in the assemblyfree volume 570 or theair treatment inlet 230. Optionally, substantially all or all of theclosure member 310 in the closed position is positioned in theair treatment inlet 230 in the closed position. - As discussed previously, in the open position, the
closure member 310 may merge with a wall of theair treatment assembly 200. In other words, as exemplified inFIGS. 53 and 54 , aface 590 of theclosure member 310 in the open position, which may be directed towards theair flow path 160, may extend in a common surface with anabutting wall face 592 of anabutting wall 594 which is also directed towards theair flow path 160, the common surface having a constant curvature along aline 596 extending across theface 590 and the abutting wall face 592 (and, optionally, a constant curvature along another line crossing the first line at a 90 degree angle). Where theclosure member 310 in the open member position merges with a wall of the air flow path, such as a wall of theair treatment assembly 200, theclosure member 310 in the open member position may be referred to as forming a portion of the wall of the air flow path, such as a wall of theair treatment assembly 200. - As exemplified, the
closure member pocket 580 may have a mouth orpocket port 600 by which theclosure member pocket 580 is open to the assemblyfree volume 570. Theclosure member 310 may close thepocket port 600 when the closure member is in the open member position. Accordingly, when theclosure member 310 closes thepocket port 600 and is flush with the surrounding surface, theclosure member 310 may be referred to as having merged with the surrounding wall of theair treatment assembly 200, and may be referred to as forming a portion of a smooth wall of theair treatment assembly 200. Optionally, thepocket port 600 is in an axially extending sidewall of theair treatment chamber 210. Such as thechamber sidewall 220 or theinlet sidewall 260, and theclosure member 310 merges with axially extending sidewall. - The
closure member 310 may be moveable between the open member position and the closed member position by rotating about the closure axis ofrotation 540, the closure axis of rotation is exterior to the assemblyfree volume 570. Optionally, the closure axis of rotation is exterior to theair treatment chamber 210. The closure axis ofrotation 540 may extend through theclosure member pocket 580. The closure axis ofrotation 540 may be parallel to the air treatmentlongitudinal axis 218 and/or theflow direction 550. The closure axis ofrotation 540 may be perpendicular to the air treatmentlongitudinal axis 218 and/or theflow direction 550. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 44 and 45 , theclosure member 310 may have afirst end 610 comprising arotational mount 612 and a secondopposed end 614. The closure axis or rotation may be an axis of rotation of therotational mount 612. Theclosure member 310 may extend generally perpendicular to the air treatmentlongitudinal axis 218 and/or the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110 when in the closed position. The secondopposed end 614 of theclosure member 310 may rotate towards thesecond end 216 of theair treatment chamber 210 as the closure member moves to the open position. - The following is a description of a driving
member 630 that is operable to move theclosure member 310, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein. - In accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 34 to 39 , thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 includes a drivingmember 630 drivingly connected to theclosure member 310. Theclosure member 310 may move in afirst direction 632 from the open position to the closed position. Theclosure member 310 may move in asecond direction 634 from the closed position to the open position. The drivingmember 630 may be operable to move theclosure member 310 in at least one of the first and second directions. Optionally, the drivingmember 630 is operable to move theclosure member 310 in both thefirst direction 632 and thesecond direction 634. - Optionally, the driving member is operable to move the closure member from the open member position to the closed member position, and the closure member is biased to the open member position by a biasing member. The driving
member 630 may move the closure member to the open member position when activated, and the biasing member may move the closure member form the open member position to the closed member position when the driving member is not activated. Optionally, the driving member is operable to move the closure member from the closed member position to the open member position, and the closure member is biased to the closed member position by a biasing member. The drivingmember 630 may move the closure member to the closed member position when activated, and the biasing member may move the closure member form the closed member position to the open member position when the driving member is not activated. - It will be appreciated that the driving
member 630 may be any suitable driving member, including any of the driving members described herein. - The driving
member 630 may be any actuator that is operatively connected to (e.g., drivingly connected to) theclosure member 310 to move theclosure member 310 in at least one direction in response to an event, such as one or more of the suction motor being actuated or deenergized, the surface cleaning apparatus being connected to or removed from a floor cleaning unit and the air treatment assembly or a subcomponent thereof being removed or reinstalled in the surface cleaning apparatus. It will be appreciated that theclosure member 310 may be automatically moved upon the occurrence of an event. The actuation of the movement of the closure member may be controlled automatically by signals generated by the control system 370 of the surface cleaning apparatus 100 (e.g., in response to changes in pressure, changes in sensor values, or changes in operational modes). - Accordingly, the driving member may be mechanically or electromechanically or fluidically connected to the
closure member 310 to move the closure member upon the occurrence of the event. - The driving
member 630 may comprise aclosure member actuator 640, as exemplified inFIGS. 34 and 35 . Theclosure member actuator 640 may be any suitable actuator. Theclosure member actuator 640 may act only on theclosure member 310, e.g., it may be a separate actuator from the actuator for thesuction motor 322, may therefore be a dedicated actuator for controlling only theclosure member 310. - The
closure member actuator 640 may be a powered actuator. A powered actuator may be an electromechanical actuator, such as a motor or solenoid. A powered actuator may be coupled to a power supply of the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., a battery). A powered actuator may be a linear actuator. A powered actuator may be communicatively coupled to the control system to be directed thereby. Accordingly, upon actuation (e.g., a button being pushed, a soft control on a touch screen being touched or an event occurring, a signal may be sent to theclosure member actuator 640 whereupon theclosure member 310 is moved. - Alternately, an unpowered actuator may be used. The unpowered actuator may be any such actuator discussed herein such as an aneroid capsule responsive to pressure changes or a closure mechanical coupling (a mechanical linkage) 646 drivingly coupled to the manually
moveable toggle 642. The closuremechanical coupling 646 mechanically drivingly couples an upline apparatus 648 (e.g., any actuator disclosed herein) to theclosure member 310. Theupline apparatus 648 may be any actuator discussed elsewhere herein, and may be manually actuated by a user or may be actuated automatically upon the occurrence of an event. - The
closure member actuator 640 may itself comprise an on/off actuator 650 (see for exampleFIGS. 34 and 35 ). Optionally, the on/offactuator 650 may be a toggle such as a button, pivoting switch or slider. The toggle may be manually moveable (e.g., a depressible button, pivoting switch or slider), or electronically activated (e.g., a soft button, such as presented on a touchscreen). The on/offactuator 650 may be the manuallymoveable toggle 642. In some embodiments, the on/offactuator 650 is operable to actuate thesuction motor 322 when the on/offactuator 650 is set to on and which is operable to deenergize thesuction motor 322 when the on/offactuator 650 is set to off. Theclosure member 310 may move from the open position to the closed position in response to the on/offactuator 650 being set to off. Theclosure member 310 may move from the closed position to the open position in response to the on/off actuator being set to on. - As discussed with respect to
actuator 502, the on/offactuator 650 may be mechanically drivingly connected to theclosure member 310. In some embodiments, an on/offactuator 650 that is mechanically drivingly connected to theclosure member 310 is a manually moveable slider. In embodiments in which the on/offactuator 650 is mechanically drivingly connected to theclosure member 310, the drivingmember 630 may include the on/offactuator 650 and themechanical linkage 646. - Alternatively, or additionally, when the on/off
actuator 650 is transitioned to on or to off, a signal may be issued which causes an electromechanical member 640 (e.g., the moveable member actuator 502) to drive theclosure member 310 to the open position or the closed position, respectively. - Optionally, the
closure member 310 may move in response to the on/offactuator 650 after a predetermined time delay. For example, theclosure member 310 may be moved to the closed position after a closing time delay of between 0.1 seconds and 10 seconds, 1 seconds and 5 seconds, or 2 seconds and 4 seconds following the transition of the on/off actuator to off. Accordingly, the air flow produced by the suction motor may terminate or substantially terminate prior to the closure member moving to the closed position. Alternately or in addition, theclosure member 310 may move to the open position after the on/offactuator 650 is moved to on with a lesser opening time delay than the opening time delay. - Suction produced by the
suction motor 322 may moves the drivingmember 630 which moves theclosure member 310 from the closed position to the open position. Accordingly, the main on/off switch of the surface cleaning apparatus may be the on/offactuator 650. As exemplified inFIGS. 38 and 39 . the drivingmember 630 may include apiston 660 that is moveable between an open piston position and a closed piston position. The piston may be drivingly connected to (e.g., mechanically or fluidically connected to) the closure member such that the closure member is moved to the closed member position when the piston is in the closed piston position and is moved to the open member position when the piston is moved to the open piston position. Thepiston 660 may be moveable within acylinder 662. When thesuction motor 322 is on, the suction generated by thesuction motor 322 may drive thepiston 660 to move, e.g., within thecylinder 662. Thepiston 660 may be mechanically coupled to theclosure member 310 to move the closure member as the piston moves. The drivingmember 630 may include thepiston 660 and the closuremechanical linkage 646 between the piston and theclosure member 310. The piston may be biased (e.g., by biasing member 664) to return to the closed position. - Alternately or in addition, the driving
member 630 may include theexternal conduit 140. If an external conduit is removably insertable, then insertion of theexternal conduit 140 into thenozzle 180 may move theclosure member 310. The upstream end of theexternal conduit 140 may bear against theclosure member 310 as theexternal conduit 140 is inserted into the nozzle, pushing theclosure member 310 before it. For example, theclosure member 310 may move axially to close theair treatment chamber 210 automatically when theexternal conduit 140 is removed. Theair treatment inlet 230 may include an axially movingclosure member 310 which slides closed when theexternal conduit 140 is removed and slides axially inwardly due to engagement between the upstream end of theexternal conduit 140 and theclosure member 310 when theexternal conduit 140 is inserted. - As exemplified by
FIGS. 36 and 37 , the drivingmember 630 may comprise anengagement member 680 provided on the external conduit 140 (e.g., the end wall) and a drivingactuator 682 that is operatively connected to theclosure member 310 whereby upon insertion of theexternal conduit 140 into the dirty air inlet, the engagement member contacts the drivingactuator 682 which moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position. Theengagement member 680 maybe, e.g., the end cap of theexternal conduit 140 or a downstream end of the sidewall of theexternal conduit 140. The drivingactuator 682 may include, e.g., a mating engagement member that is drivingly connected to the closure member (e.g., a physical body projecting from the closure member) to be impacted by the engagement member. The drivingactuator 682 may include, e.g., a toggle communicatively coupled to theclosure member actuator 640, whereby the toggle is triggered by the engagement member to actuate theclosure member actuator 640. - Optionally, the
external conduit 140 includes a catch to engage theclosure member 310 to draw theclosure member 310 to the closed member position when theexternal conduit 140 is withdrawn. - Optionally, mounting the
surface cleaning apparatus 100 to thefloor cleaning unit 154 moves theclosure member 310 from the closed position to the open position, such as by theexternal conduit 140 being inserted into the dirty air inlet when the surface cleaning apparatus is mounted to the floor cleaning unit, or an electromechanical member being actuated upon the surface cleaning apparatus being mounted to the floor cleaning unit. - Optionally, the
closure member 310 may move to the open member position when theair treatment assembly 200 is coupled to themain body 120, and moves to the closed member position when theair treatment assembly 200 is removed. A mechanical or electromechanical member may move theclosure member 310 when themain body 120 and theair treatment assembly 200 are separated. The mechanical member may be, e.g., a physical catch or magnet on themain body 120 that engages the closure member 310 (e.g., a corresponding catch or magnet of the closure member) to drive the closure member to the open or closed position as theair treatment assembly 200 is joined to or removed from themain body 120. The electromechanical member may be, e.g., theclosure member actuator 640 which receives a signal to move theclosure member 310 in response to detection that theair treatment assembly 200 is being removed from or coupled to themain body 120. Optionally, theclosure member 310 is biased to the open member positions by a biasing member. Optionally, removing theair treatment assembly 200 from themain body 120 overcomes the force of the biasing member to move theclosure member 310 to the closed position. Optionally, theclosure member 310 is biased to the closed member positions by a biasing member. Optionally, coupling theair treatment assembly 200 to themain body 120 overcomes the force of the biasing member to move theclosure member 310 to the closed position. - The following is a description of an
air treatment chamber 210 wherein the chamberfirst end 214 is openable and a portion of theopposed end 216 is moveable (e.g., concurrently or subsequently). This aspect may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein. - In accordance with this aspect, the openable chamber
first end 214, which may be the forward end of the air treatment chamber or assembly, may be opened to enable the porous outlet member of the chamber (e.g., a vortex finder) to advance to a position wherein the porous member may be cleaned (e.g., to remove hair wrapped therearound) or removed for cleaning. The porous member may advance by itself or with other portions of the assembly, e.g., the rear (outlet) end of the assembly or chamber. The porous member may advance to a position proximate the open first end (the evacuation opening 410) or outwardly of the open first end, i.e., part or all of the porous member may advance to a position outwardly of the open first end. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 59 to 61 , at least a portion of an end of theair treatment chamber 210 is translatable generally parallel to the chamberlongitudinal axis 218, and will be referred to as an axiallymoveable end portion 680. The axially moveable end portion is moveable between a first position (FIG. 59 ) and a second position (FIG. 61 ) that is axially spaced from the first position. Optionally, the second position is forward of the first position. The axiallymoveable end portion 680 may act as a plunger, e.g., to move debris through the chamber. - Accordingly, at least a portion of the chamber
first end 214 may be moveable between a closed operating position (FIG. 55 ) in which the evacuation opening 410 is closed and an open position (FIG. 56 ) in which the evacuation opening 410 is opened. In the open position, the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may be open such that dirt may move out of thedirt collection region 300 through the evacuation opening 410. In the closed position, the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 is closed to inhibit movement of dirt out of thedirt collection region 300 through the evacuation opening 410. Accordingly, the open position of the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may be referred to as an open evacuation position. - The moveable portion of the chamber
first end 214 may comprise or consist of the front wall of the air treatment assembly (e.g., the chamber first end wall 222), a portion of the front wall of the air treatment assembly (e.g., movablefirst end portion 388, which may be a flap, seeFIG. 50 ) or part or all of the front wall of the air treatment assembly and part of the sidewall thereof. Part or all of theinlet conduit 170 may be part of the moveable portion of the chamber first end 214 (see for exampleFIG. 56 ). The moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may include thedirty air inlet 162, theinlet conduit 170 or a portion thereof, and/or theair treatment inlet 230 or a portion thereof. - Optionally, the moveable portion of the chamber
first end 214 is rotatably moveable. The moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may rotate forwardly (see for exampleFIG. 56 ). Accordingly, the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may be rotationally mounted at afirst end 700 thereof, and asecond end 702 thereof opposite to thefirst end 700 may rotate forwardly as the chamberfirst end wall 222 or the portion thereof is opened. The moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may be secured at arotational mount 704 to a fixed wall of the air treatment assembly, such as thechamber sidewall 220 or a further portion of the chamberfirst end wall 222. Accordingly, the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may pivot about an axis of therotational mount 704 between the open position and the closed position. - Alternately, or in addition, the moveable portion of the chamber
first end 214 may be translationally moveable (see for exampleFIG. 60 ). The moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may be mounted to a fixed wall of the air treatment assembly and/or the main body via a track, and may move along the track between the open and closed positions. The moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may move linearly between the open and closed positions. The moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may translate forwardly, as exemplified inFIGS. 59 to 61 . Translational movement is described further elsewhere herein. - Alternately, or in addition, the moveable portion of the chamber
first end 214 may be inflatable and deflatable. Moving between the open and closed positions may include, or consist of, inflating or deflating a member that is drivingly connected to the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214. When an inflatable member is inflated, the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may be closed, and when the inflatable member is deflated the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may be opened. - It will be appreciated that the moveable portion of the chamber
first end 214 may be moved by any suitable actuator and any actuator discussed herein may be sued. Accordingly, the surface cleaning apparatus may include a first end actuator to move the chamberfirst end 214, which may any of the actuators described herein or a dedicated actuator. For example, the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 is manually moveable, such as by a first end manuallymoveable member 670. This manually moveable member may extend to an exterior of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100, and may be a slider or depressible button or pivotal switch. The first end manuallymovable member 670 may be drivingly coupled to the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 to move the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214. The manually moveable member may be moved by a user or moved by the docking station when the surface cleaning apparatus is docked. It will be appreciated that the first end manuallymoveable member 670 may be any of the manually moveable members described herein (e.g., the manually movable toggle 500) or a dedicated member the movement of which only affects movement of the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214. - It will be appreciated that the moveable portion of the chamber
first end 214 may be moved directly by a user. For example, a user may grasp the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 and pull or push it. In such embodiments, the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may be referred to as a manually moveable member. - Alternately, the moveable portion of the chamber
first end 214 may be pneumatically moveable. The moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 may be arranged to be drawn between the open and closed positions by suction generated by thesuction motor 322 or a suction motor of thedocking station 390. Pneumatical movement is described further elsewhere herein. - Optionally, the moveable portion of the chamber
first end 214 may be moved upon or subsequent to the surface cleaning apparatus being docked at adocking station 390. For example, docking thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 with thedocking station 390 may move the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 from the closed operating position to the open position. Optionally, a portion of the docking station drivingly engage the surface cleaning apparatus to open the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 when thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is being docked. A mechanical linkage may be provided whereupon the docking station may push or pull the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 open. The moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 maybe biased to the closed operating position. Undocking thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 from thedocking station 390 may move the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 from the open position to the closed operating position. Alternately or in addition, a portion of thedocking station 390 may be coupled to the moveable portion of the chamberfirst end 214 to close the chamberfirst end 214 when thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is being undocked. For example, a catch on thedocking station 390 may pull a door shut or pull a component to a closed position as thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is pulled away from the docking station. - The axially
moveable end portion 680 may be at least a portion of the chambersecond end 216 and may also include at least a portion of the chamberfirst end 214. The chambersecond end 216 may be moveable after or with the opening of the chamberfirst end 214. Optionally, the chambersecond end 216 may not be moveable while the chamberfirst end 214 remains closed. - It will be appreciated that the
surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include two axiallymoveable end portions 680, i.e., at least a portion of the chamberfirst end 214 and at least a portion of the chambersecond end 216. For example, as exemplified inFIGS. 59-61 , the first and second ends 214, 216 may each translate forward. In embodiments in which the apparatus includes two axiallymoveable end portions 680, the portions may be secured together such that one can be moved by moving another. One of the portions may be drivingly connected to the other portion. The portions may be connected by a linkingmember 734. The linkingmember 734 may be a mechanical linkage. For example, the linkingmember 734 may include an arm, such as an arm of fixed length or a telescoping arm. The linkingmember 734 may include an electromechanical member. The electromechanical member of the linkingmember 734 may be responsive to movement of one position, and respond by moving the other simultaneously or sequentially (e.g., after a predetermined time delay or change in the separation distance 684). - Portions secured together may be fixed together with a
constant separation distance 684 between them (e.g., translate together as one body), or may be separated by avariable separation distance 684. For example, portions may be joined by a telescoping arm such that a range of separation distances are possible. - The axially
moveable end portion 680 may include the chambersecond end wall 224 or a portion thereof and/or theair treatment outlet 232 or a portion thereof. Theair treatment outlet 232 may include a porous member 422 (e.g., a screen or a pre-motor filter received in the air treatment outlet 232) and the axiallymoveable end portion 680 may include at least a portion of theporous member 422, and optionally the entire porous member. - If a pre-motor filter is provided, then the axially
moveable end portion 680 may include at least a portion of thepre-motor filter housing 334, e.g., a forward portion 686 of the pre-motor filter housing and a laterally encirclingwall 688. Optionally, the axiallymoveable end portion 680 may not include anend wall 690 of thepre-motor filter housing 334 that is at an end of the pre-motor filter housing which is farthest from the chamber first end 214 (e.g., a rearward end of thepre-motor filter housing 334, as exemplified). - Alternately, or in addition, the axially
moveable end portion 680 may include at least a portion of or the entirety of thesuction motor housing 324 and accordingly thesuction motor 322 may be moveable with the axiallymoveable end portion 680. - The axially
moveable end portion 680 may be moveably secured to a supportingsidewall 692 of theair treatment assembly 200 and/or themain body 120. As exemplified, the supportingsidewall 692 may include thechamber sidewall 220 and/or themain body sidewall 192. - The
surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include, as exemplified, atrack 730 along which the axiallymoveable end portion 680 moves. The axiallymoveable end portion 680 may slide along thetrack 730. Thetrack 730 may be alinear track 730. Thetrack 730 may be parallel to the supportingsidewall 692 of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. Thetrack 730 may be provided in the supportingsidewall 692. For example, thetrack 730 may include a member embedded in the supportingsidewall 692, or may include a channel formed in the supportingsidewall 692. Optionally, the supportingsidewall 692 and thetrack 730 are each axially extending. - The
track 730 may include a sealingmember 732 received between the axiallymoveable end portion 680 and a wall along which the axiallymoveable end portion 680 moves. The sealingmember 732 may be, e.g., a felt sealing member. The sealingmember 732 may separate the axiallymoveable end portion 680 from a wall (e.g., the chamber sidewall 220) along which the axially moveable end portion slides. The sealingmember 732 may be sandwiched between the axiallymoveable end portion 680 and thechamber sidewall 220 throughout the movement between the closed position and the open position. - It will be appreciated that the
track 730 may be a dedicated track along which an axiallymoveable end portion 680 moves, with a separate track provided for each axially moveable end portion. However, as exemplified, in some embodiments more than one axially moveable end portion is carried by acommon track 730. As exemplified, an axially moveablesecond end portion 680 b is coupled to the track directly while an axially moveablefirst end portion 680 a is coupled to the track indirectly (e.g., via the axially moveablefirst end portion 680 a). The axially moveablefirst end portion 680 a is an axiallymoveable end portion 680 that includes at least a portion of the chamberfirst end 214. The axially moveablesecond end portion 680 b is an axiallymoveable end portion 680 that includes at least a portion of the chambersecond end 216. - The track may include a
rail 710 between the axiallymoveable end portion 680 and the supportingsidewall 692. The axiallymoveable end portion 680 may ride along therail 710 as the axiallymoveable end portion 680 moves between the first and second positions. - In some embodiments, the
rail 710 is a telescoping rail, as exemplified. The telescoping rail may include at least afirst rail body 712 and asecond rail body 714. The second rail body may be moveably secured to thefirst rail body 712 and moveable between a retracted position generally coextensive with thefirst rail body 712 and an extended position extending past an end of thefirst rail body 712. Thefirst rail body 712 may be secured to one of the axiallymoveable end portion 680 and the supportingsidewall 692, while thesecond rail body 714 may be secured to the other of the axiallymoveable end portion 680 and the supportingsidewall 692. - Accordingly, it will be appreciated that the at least a portion of the
second end portion 680 b may move concurrently or sequentially (e.g., subsequent to) with the at least a portion of thefirst end portion 680a. The subsequent movement may be delayed by a predetermined time period. The predetermined time period may be, e.g., between 0.1 seconds and 10 seconds, between 0.1 seconds and 5 seconds, or between 0.1 seconds and 2 seconds. Additionally, or alternatively, the subsequent movement may be delayed by a predetermined change in theseparation distance 684. The predetermined change may be, e.g., between 0.1 times and 2 times the original separation distance, between 0.2 times and 1 time the original separation distance, or between 0.2 times and 0.5 times the original separation distance. A delay allows dirt in the air treatment chamber to decompress, and may loosen the dirt. For example, elongated dirt, such as hair. may decompress. - Optionally, the at least a portion of the
second end portion 680 b is moved by opening the at least a portion of thefirst end portion 680a, but theseparation distance 684 between the two is greater subsequent to the movement than prior to the movement. A greater separation distance provides further space for the dirt received therebetween to decompress. - The axially
moveable end portion 680 may be moved by any suitable driving member, including any discussed with moving the chamberfirst end 214 to the open position. - The
air treatment chamber 210 may be emptiable by opening the chamberfirst end 214 and moving at least a portion of the chambersecond end 216 axially towards the chamberfirst end 214. - The following is a description of moving a portion a fluid driven moveable member of the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., part or all of the
first end 214 and or the second opposed end 216) via fluid pressure, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the operable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein. - In accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 57 and 58 , a fluid drivenmoveable member 720 of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is moveable via fluid pressure between a first position and a second position. It will be appreciated that the fluid pressure may be air pressure (i.e., suction) generated by an air moving member of the surface cleaning apparatus or a docking station or exhaust air from a suction motor. - If a docking station is provided, then when the apparatus is docked, the fluid driven
moveable member 720, which is in the first position, may be received in the evacuation air flow path such that air flow through the evacuation air flow path will act on the fluid drivenmoveable member 720 when the fluid driven moveable member is in the first position to move the fluid drivenmoveable member 720 to a second or evacuation position. In other words, air flow through the evacuation air flow path may move the fluid driven member from the first position (i.e., towards the second position). Accordingly, the first position may be referred to as the operational, cleaning or use position. Such air flow may be produced by a suction motor in the surface cleaning apparatus, the docking station or both. - Alternately or in addition, air flow through the apparatus air flow path when the surface cleaning apparatus is not docked may act on the fluid driven
moveable member 720 to move the fluid driven member from the first position to the second. - It will be appreciated that the fluid driven
moveable member 720 may move (push or pull) part or all of thefirst end 214 and or the secondopposed end 216 axially, such as along arail 710 as discussed previously. - An air impermeable member may be moved to enable air flow to move the fluid driven
moveable member 720. For example, a valve or other closure member may be provided to close part of theair flow path 160 such that air flow may move the fluid drivenmoveable member 720. When it is desired to empty thedirt collection region 300, the air impermeable member may be moved to an evacuation position. In which air flow may act on the fluid drivenmoveable member 720 to move the fluid drivenmoveable member 720 and therefore part or all of thefirst end 214 and or the secondopposed end 216 may be moved. For example, the valve may be moved to close the vortex finder (e.g., it may be moved to close the outlet port at the downstream end of the vortex finder), e.g., by an actuator as discussed elsewhere herein or by air flow from the suction motor of the surface cleaning apparatus and/or the docking station drawing air in a reverse flow direction through the air treatment assembly thereby pushing or drawing the valve to close the port. When this occurs, the air flow path between the suction motor and the vortex finder may become sealed and form an evacuation air flow path and air flow may push the secondopposed end 216, and thefirst end 214 if linked thereto) axially forwardly to open the dirt collection region. - To enable the apparatus air flow path to be active (i.e., the surface cleaning apparatus is to be used to clean a surface), the air impermeable member (e.g., valve) is moved, (e.g., by air flow or a biasing member or an electromechanical member or the like) to an operational position (e.g., the valve does not close the outlet port of the vortex finder). It will be appreciated that the valve may be moveable axially.
- It will be appreciated that the fluid driven
moveable member 720 may include or consist of the chamberfirst end 214 and/or a moveable portion thereof and/or the chambersecond end 216 or a moveable portion thereof and the ends may be linked for movement as discussed previously. - Accordingly, the moveable portion of the chamber second end may move forwardly as dirt is sucked out of
dirt collection region 300 when thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is docked with thedocking station 390. - Optionally, the fluid driven
moveable member 720 is biased to the evacuation (dirt emptying) position. Air pressure may move the fluid drivenmoveable member 720 to the operating (surface cleaning) position. When suction is terminated, then the fluid drivenmoveable member 720 moves to the evacuation position. Alternately, the fluid drivenmoveable member 720 may be biased to the operating position. Suction may move the fluid drivenmoveable member 720 to the evacuation position. When suction is terminated, then the fluid drivenmoveable member 720 moves to the operating position. Alternately, the fluid drivenmoveable member 720 is not biased to either position. Suction from the air moving member of the evacuationair flow path 392, through the evacuationair flow path 392, may move the fluid drivenmoveable member 720 to the evacuation position. Suction from thesuction motor 322, through the apparatusair flow path 160, may move the fluid drivenmoveable member 720 to the operating position. - The following is a description of the positioning and mounting of the
user interface 360 on the handle, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the operable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein. - The user interface may be provided on the handle, e.g., an upper end of the handle or a lower end of the
handle 124, anenergy storage member 350, an energy storage member housing 381 (FIG. 5 ) configured to receive theenergy storage member 350, or a supporting body that overlies a portion of themain body 120 such as a rearwardly or upwardly facing portion of a body - in accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 62 to 68 theuser interface 360 may be provided at an upper end of thepistol grip handle 124. This location provides the user interface at a convenient location for a user of the interface. - The
user interface 360 may be located within an upper half, upper third, or upper quarter of a length of thehandle 124 along the handlelongitudinal axis 128 when the apparatusupper end 106 is above the apparatuslower end 108. - Alternately, the
user interface 360 may be located within a lower half, lower third, or lower quarter of a length of thehandle 124 along the handlelongitudinal axis 128 when the apparatusupper end 106 is above the apparatuslower end 108. - Optionally, the
user interface 360 is on a rear portion of the upper end of the pistol grip handle 124 when the apparatusrear end 104 is rearward of the apparatusfront end 102. - Optionally, the
user interface 360 may be above thehand grip portion 126 of thehandle 124. - Alternately, as exemplified in
FIGS. 69 and 70 theuser interface 360 may overly themain body housing 122, such as the portion of themain body housing 122 that houses thesuction motor 322. Accordingly, theuser interface 360 may overly or be rearward of thesuction motor housing 324, at a rear end of the main body. As exemplified, themain body housing 122 has arear end 756, and theuser interface 360 may overly therear end 756. Therear end 756 may be a rear end of thesuction motor housing 324. Accordingly, the user interface may be a separate member such that the user interface is not attached to the suction motor housing or the main body and may be attached to the handle but positioned overlying the motor housing, e.g., a rear end of the main body. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 69 and 70 , theuser interface 360 is at a rear end of themain body housing 122 and overlies a rear end of thesuction motor housing 324. Theuser interface 360 may be spaced from thesuction motor housing 324 by aseparation air gap 742. However, it will be appreciated that theuser interface 360 may alternatively, or additionally, be separated from themain body housing 122 by one or more other bodies, such as apost-motor filter 332 orpost-motor filter housing 340. - The
user interface 360 may include or be provided on a supportingbody 740. The supportingbody 740 is configured as a mount to receive theuser interface 360 at a desired location, e.g., overlying the main body housing 122 (e.g., overlying or rearward of thesuction motor housing 324, at a rear end of the main body). Accordingly, the supportingbody 740 may extend over (e.g., spaced from and facing, or facing and optionally abutting) themain body housing 122. As exemplified inFIGS. 69 and 70 , the supportingbody 740 is part of the rear end of the hand vacuum cleaner and is mounted rearward of thesuction motor housing 324. - In this example, the
user interface 360 may include a facingsurface 744 facing or directly facing ahousing facing surface 746 across thegap 742. Optionally, the facingsurface 744 and thehousing facing surface 746 are separated by a generally constant distance across the faces. - By using a supporting
body 740, theuser interface 360 may be rearward of the main body housing. Theuser interface 360 may overly the main bodyrear face 194 of themain body housing 122. The main bodyrear face 194 may form the housing facing surface. - Accordingly, as exemplified, the
user interface 360 faces rearwardly. In other words, the user interface includes a surface visible from rearward of the surface cleaning apparatus along the apparatus longitudinal axis. - Optionally, the
user interface 360 may form a rear face of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 as a whole. In other words, the surface cleaning apparatus may not include any further body rearwardly overlying a rear face of theuser interface 360. Optionally, theuser interface 360 forms a rearmost portion of the apparatusupper end 106. - As exemplified in
FIGS. 69 and 70 , thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 includes asupport arm 750 that retains the supportingbody 740 at the desired location. Thesupport arm 750 extends between afirst arm end 752 and asecond arm end 754. Thefirst arm end 752 may be secured or directly secured to the main body 120 (e.g., the main body housing 122), the suction motor housing and/or the handle. For example, the support arm may be a separate part that is secured (e.g., mounted to) themain body 120. Alternately or in addition, the support arm 750 (e.g., first arm end 752) may be secured to the handle, e.g., an upper end fop the handle. - The
second arm end 754 provides support for theuser interface 360 and may be secured or directly secured to theuser interface 360 and/or secured or directly secured to the supportingbody 740. Optionally, as exemplified, thesupport arm 750 may join lower ends of the supportingbody 740 and themain body housing 122. Accordingly, thesupport arm 750 enables thesupport body 740 to be mounted at an alternate location, such as a rear end of the main body. - As exemplified, the support arm may extend rearwardly from the
main body 120. Thesupport arm 750 may extend from the main bodyrear face 194, and may extend to the supportingbody 740. - Alternately or in addition, the
support arm 750 may extend from thepistol grip handle 124, such as theupper end 130 of the pistol grip handle 124 (i.e., above the hand grip portion). Thesupport arm 750 may extend rearwardly from theupper end 130 of thepistol grip handle 124. Accordingly, the support arm may be or may extend to a position that is rearward of the suction motor. - It will be appreciated that in some embodiments the
gap 742 may be contained within and/or exterior tocladding 758, which bridges thelateral edges 760 of the gap (Le., radially outward edges with respect to the apparatus longitudinal axis 110). Accordingly, thegap 742 may not be visible from an exterior of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100. Optionally, thecladding 758 holds the supportingmember 740 in position, e.g., it may be secured to the rear end of the main body (e.g., the motor housing) and/orupper end 130 of the handle, and thesupport arm 750 may not be included. - Optionally, the
user interface 360 overlying the main body housing does not include any interface toggles or controls 362. Theuser interface 360 overlying themain body housing 122 may include one or more information displays 364, without including interface toggles 362, such as to avoid running wires from that interface back through the motor housing. If controls are provided or a readout from sensors is required, then wires may extend along of through thesupport arm 750. - In some embodiments, as exemplified in
FIGS. 59 to 61 themain body 120 has acavity 770 provided at the apparatusrear end 104, and thesuction motor 322 is positioned in thecavity 770 and auser interface 360 is provided on or at the apparatusrear end 104. Thesuction motor housing 324 may also be in thecavity 770. Theuser interface 360 may accordingly overly thesuction motor 322 and/orsuction motor housing 324 in thecavity 770. - The
user interface 360 may be separated from thesuction motor 322 and/orsuction motor housing 324 by a portion of the cavity 770 (i.e., an air gap). The apparatusrear end 104 includes an apparatusrear wall 772, which may be a rear wall of thecavity 770. Theuser interface 360 may be provided on the apparatusrear wall 772. - Alternately, or in addition, as exemplified in
FIGS. 69 and 70 , thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may include anannular portion 780. Theannular portion 780 may be a ring-shaped body or a portion of an annular body (e.g., an annulus sector) that has a radial or generally radial outwardly facing surface. Theannular portion 780 may be integrally formed with themain body 120, or, as exemplified, an independently formed body directly or indirectly secured to themain body 120, e.g., by asupport arm 740 and or a supportingbody 740. - Optionally, the annular portion is part of the apparatus
rear end 104. - The
user interface 360 may be provided on the annular portion 780 (e.g., on the radial or generally radial outwardly facing surface). Theuser interface 360 may be secured to the annular portion or be part of the annular portion. - As exemplified in
FIG. 70 , theuser interface 360 may be curved to follow an annular surface of theannular portion 780. Theuser interface 360 may include asubstrate 782, such as a flexible panel. Thesubstrate 782 may be curved when mounted to theannular portion 780. - It will be appreciated that, in such an embodiment, the
user interface 360 may include one or more interface toggles 362 or controls and/or information displays 364 on thesubstrate 782. - As exemplified, the
user interface 360 may include aninformation display 364 having a display surface that faces radially outward. For example, theinformation display 364 may be a screen having a display surface facing radially outward (i.e., generally perpendicular to an annularlongitudinal axis 784 of the annular portion 780) and optionally upwardly. Theinformation display 364 may be, e.g., an illuminated icon with an illuminated surface facing radially outward. - Optionally, the
substrate 782 has a radially outward-facing surface on which the information display is provided. - The
user interface 360 may include a plurality of information displays facing radially outward. - Optionally, a
protective cover 786 overlies theinformation display 364. It will be appreciated that theuser interface 360 may also, or alternatively, include aninformation display 364 having a display surface that faces rearwardly. - The following is a description of a filter that is visible through and/or removeable through the
user interface 360, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein. - In accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 71 and 72 , thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 includes afilter 790 that is removeable from an installed position (FIG. 71 ) to a removed position (FIG. 72 ) outside themain body housing 122. Thefilter 790 is moveable between the installed and removed positions along aremoval path 792. As exemplified, theremoval path 792 may extend through theuser interface 360 between the installed position and the removed position. Accordingly, a rearwardly removable filter may be removable while theuser interface 360 remains in position as the filter is removed. Thefilter 790 may be, e.g., thepost-motor filter 332. - As exemplified, the
filter 790 may be a rearwardly removeable filter and theremoval path 792 may extend generally parallel to the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110, or may include at least a rearward component to a motion vector at each point along theremoval path 792. - When installed, the
filter 790 may be at the apparatusrear end 104. Thefilter 790 may be part of the apparatusrear end 104. In some embodiments, the apparatusrear end 104 includes a rear wall 772 (e.g., the main body rear wall 196), and therear wall 772 may be part of afilter housing 796 for the filter 790 (e.g., the post-motor filter housing 340), and may optionally remove with thefilter 790. - As exemplified, the
user interface 360 is provided at the apparatusrear end 104 and may be part of the apparatusrear end 104. - As discussed previously, the user interface may be on an annular member or an annulus sector or it may be part of an annular member or an annulus sector. As such, the
user interface 360 may be provided radially outward of thefilter 790 and/or thefilter housing 796 in the installed position, radially outward of the filter in a partially removed position, and/or radially outward of theremoval path 792. If theuser interlace 360 is has a central hollow portion (e.g., it may be annular), then theuser interface 360 may surround thefilter 790 and/or thefilter housing 796 in the installed position, radially outward of the filter in a partially removed position, and/or radially outward of theremoval path 792. - Optionally, the
user interface 360 is part of thefilter housing 796. - The following is a description of a radially-removable
post-motor filter 332, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the nested filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein. - In accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 73 and 74 , afilter 800 is removable radially outwardly with respect to the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110. The filter 800 (e.g., which may be the post-motor filter 332) may be removeable in a direction that is generally perpendicular to the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110. As exemplified, thefilter 800 is removeable between an installed position (FIG. 73 ) and a removed position (FIG. 74 ), and is removeable along aremoval path 802. Theremoval path 802 may be a radially extending path, as exemplified. Theremoval path 802 may be a laterally extendingpath 802. - The
filter 800 may overly at least a portion of thesuction motor 322 and/or thesuction motor housing 324. Optionally, thefilter 800 is seated on thesuction motor housing 324. - The
surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include a plurality of radially removeable filters 800 (e.g., two or more). The plurality of radiallyremoveable filters 800 may each be separately removeable or concurrently removably. Each of the plurality of radially removeable filters may separately overly the at least a portion of thesuction motor 322 and/or thesuction motor housing 324. Each of the plurality of radially removeable filters may separately be seated on thesuction motor housing 324. - One or more of the plurality of radially
removeable filters 800 may remove in a different direction to one or more other filters of the plurality of filters. - As exemplified, two
filters 800, each of which is shaped as an annulus sector (e.g., they may be semi-circular filters 800), are provided. Thefilters 800 are removeable in opposite directions. As exemplified, the removal path of each filter is generally horizontal (lateral) when the apparatusupper end 106 is above the apparatuslower end 108, and may be generally parallel to the apparatustransverse axis 114. It will be appreciated that if the position of the filters is rotated 90°, then the filters may be removable radially but one would remove upwardly and one would remove downwardly. - The following is a description of a filter that is at least partially nested within the
air treatment outlet 232, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, the user interface on the handle, the user interface overlying the main body housing, the user interface on an annular portion, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the ultraviolet disinfection, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein. - In accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 62 to 68 , a filter, which may be thepre-motor filter 330, is at least partially nested within theair treatment outlet 232. Nesting the filter may allow thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 to have a shorter axial length without shortening a pre-motor filter. - The
porous member 422 of theair treatment outlet 232 may be rigid, e.g., it may be a screen that is made of a mesh material. As exemplified, the screen may be conical or frusto-conical in shape. It will be appreciated that theair treatment outlet 232 may be any shaped which enables a filter to be at least partially nested therein. - The filter may itself be rigid. For example, a
pre-motor filter 330 may comprise apleated filter material 814. The pleated filter material includespleats 816, and thepleats 816 may extend in a forward/rearward direction. Thepleats 816 may extend generally parallel to the apparatuslongitudinal axis 110. Thepre-motor filter 330 may have ahollow interior 818. Thehollow interior 818 may be downstream of thepleated filter material 814. Thehollow interior 818 may have anoutlet end 820, and a suctionmotor inlet end 822 of thesuction motor 322 may face theoutlet end 820 of thehollow interior 818 when the filter is in an operational position. It will be appre3ciated that any filter material f any shape may be used. - The filter is at least partially nested in the
air treatment outlet 232, e.g., a vortex finder. The filter may extend part way into theair treatment outlet 232 or substantially the entre way into theair treatment outlet 232. As exemplified inFIG. 64 , the forward end of the filter is located at a forward end of a vortex finder. - It will also be appreciated that part or all of the filter may be nested into the
air treatment outlet 232. As exemplified inFIG. 64 , about half of the filter is nested in theair treatment outlet 232. As exemplified, the filter may include an unnested (rearward) end 812 opposite thenested end 810, wherein the unnested end being outside theair treatment chamber 210 and/or outside theair treatment outlet 232. Theunnested end 812 may have a larger diameter than would be practical within theair treatment outlet 232. It will be appreciated that 25%, 50%, 75% or more of the filter may be nested in theair treatment outlet 232. - In order to enable more of the filter to be nested in the
air treatment outlet 232, the filter may have a similar shape as theair treatment outlet 232 but with a smaller diameter. As exemplified, the filter is a rigid frusto-conical pre-motor filter. As theair treatment outlet 232 is frusto-conical, the filter may also be frusto-conical but with a diameter at a nested (forward) end 810 that is small enough to allow the air flow path to extend past thenested end 810 internal of theair treatment outlet 232. - As exemplified, the
air treatment outlet 232 and thenested end 810 of the filter are each axially inward of the air treatmentchamber inlet opening 234. - The following is a description of ultraviolet disinfection, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, and the dirt scoop, which are set out herein.
- In accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 75 and 76 , thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 includes an ultravioletlight source 830. The ultravioletlight source 830 is operable to generate ultraviolet light. - The ultraviolet
light source 830 may be arranged to direct the ultraviolet light onto an interior and/or exterior surface of thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 to disinfect the interior and/or exterior surface. For example, the light may be used to kill biological material on an interior surface that would cause an odour. The light may be used to kill biological material on an exterior surface that could be harmful to the user when the user uses the surface cleaning apparatus (e.g., the exterior surface may be a surface of the handle). - The ultraviolet
light source 830 may be arranged to direct the ultraviolet light into a light carrying structure 832 (such as a light pipe) to be carried by thelight carrying structure 832 to a distal location. For example, the source may be provided in the main body housing and the light carrying structure may carry the light to the handle and/or the interior of the air treatment chamber. - The
surface cleaning apparatus 100 may include at least one member that is transparent to ultraviolet light, and the ultraviolet light may be directed through the transparent member (inwardly, e.g., into an air treatment chamber, or outwardly, through a handle). For example, the transparent member may be a wall of thehandle 124, and light may be directed to the external surface of the UV transparent wall of thehandle 124 from within thehandle 124 to disinfect an external surface of thehandle 124. - The ultraviolet
light source 830 may be activated when thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 is docked at a docking station or placed in a storage position wherein a user is not holding the surface cleaning apparatus. - The following is a description of a dirt scoop, which may be used by itself or in combination with one or more of the rib arrester, the air inlet with a side opening, the variable area inlet downstream opening, the curved closure member, the axially moving closure member, the withdrawable closure member, the closure member moved by a driving member, the openable chamber first end, the axially moveable chamber end, moving using fluid pressure, positioning of the user interface, the filter removeable past the user interface, the radially-removeable post-motor filter, the nested filter, and the ultraviolet disinfection, which are set out herein.
- In accordance with this aspect, as exemplified in
FIGS. 75 and 76 thesurface cleaning apparatus 100 may include adirt scoop 840. Thedirt scoop 840 is moveable between an operational position (FIG. 75 ) and an evacuation position (FIG. 76 ) wherein as the dirt scoop moves between the operational position and the evacuation position, the dirt scoop physically engages dirt in the air treatment member and moves the dirt outwardly from the air treatment member. - As exemplified, in the operational position, the
dirt scoop 840 is located in theair treatment chamber 210. It will be appreciated that the dirt scoop may be of any shape and may extend any amount into the air treatment member. As exemplified, thedirt scoop 840 is a linearly extending member. - The
dirt scoop 840 may be mounted to a moveable carryingmember 842. As exemplified, thedirt scoop 840 is mounted to or provided as part of theair treatment inlet 230. Themoveable carrying member 842 may move when the evacuation opening 410 is opened. Themoveable carrying member 842 may be pivotally mounted, and may move about a pivot axis when the evacuation opening 410 is opened. Thedirt scoop 840 moves with the moveable carryingmember 842. - As the dirt scoop is moves with, e.g., the
air treatment inlet 230, it passes through part of thefree volume 470 of theair treatment chamber 210 and may help to dislodge dirt within the air treatment chamber. The dirt scoop may sweep through part or all of thefree volume 470 to dislodge dirt and move the dirt towards or out the evacuation opening 410. - As exemplified, the
dirt scoop 840 may extend between afirst end 850 and an oppositesecond end 852, with thefirst end 850 mounted to the moveable carryingmember 842 and thesecond end 852 following an arc-shapedpath 854 through the chamber. - As exemplified, the moveable carrying
member 842 may be theair treatment inlet 230. The dirt scoop may include a linearly extendingmember 846 extending into the air treatment chamber from the moveable carrying member. The dirt scoop may extend along a scooplongitudinal axis 844 between a first end and a second end opposite the first end. - The dirt scoop may be rigid or flexible.
- The
dirt scoop 840 may be positioned adjacent thechamber sidewall 220 in the operational position. Thedirt scoop 840 may be spaced from thechamber sidewall 220 by, e.g., less than 10 mm, less than 5 mm, or less than 1 mm in the operational position. The scooplongitudinal axis 844 may be generally parallel to thechamber sidewall 220 in the operation position. As such, the dirt scoop may be positioned out of the air flow path of air in the air treatment chamber (e.g., it may be flush with or recessed into a sidewall of the air treatment chamber. - As used herein, the wording “and/or” is intended to represent an inclusive—or. That is, “X and/or Y” is intended to mean X or Y or both, for example. As a further example, “X, Y, and/or Z” is intended to mean X or Y or Z or any combination thereof.
- While the above description describes features of example embodiments, it will be appreciated that some features and/or functions of the described embodiments are susceptible to modification without departing from the spirit and principles of operation of the described embodiments. For example, the various characteristics which are described by means of the represented embodiments or examples may be selectively combined with each other. Accordingly, what has been described above is intended to be illustrative of the claimed concept and non-limiting. It will be understood by persons skilled in the art that other variants and modifications may be made without departing from the scope of the invention as defined in the claims appended hereto. The scope of the claims should not be limited by the preferred embodiments and examples, but should be given the broadest interpretation consistent with the description as a whole.
-
- 1. A surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment chamber provided in the air flow path, the air flow chamber having an air treatment chamber air inlet and an air treatment chamber air outlet; and,
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path,
- wherein the air treatment chamber air inlet of the air flow chamber comprises a conduit having a sidewall that extends longitudinally in a flow direction from an inlet end to an outlet end, and the sidewall has a porous section provided therein.
- 2. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the porous section comprises mesh material. - 3. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the outlet end comprises an end wall and the sidewall has a side wall opening that is positioned upstream of the end wall. - 4. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 3 wherein the porous section is provided upstream of the end wall and is opposed to the side wall opening.
- 5. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 3 wherein the end wall is removably mountable on the outlet end.
- 6. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 3 wherein the porous section and the side wall opening have downstream ends that are located at the end wall.
- 7. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment chamber air inlet is positioned internal of the air treatment chamber. - 8. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the air treatment chamber air inlet is integrally formed with the air treatment chamber.
- 9. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the conduit is removably receivable in the dirty air inlet. - 10. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 9 wherein the outlet end comprises an end wall and the sidewall has a side wall opening that is positioned upstream of the end wall.
- 11. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 10 wherein the porous section is provided upstream of the end wall and is opposed to the side wall opening.
- 12. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 9 wherein the air treatment chamber air inlet comprises a longitudinally extending inlet passage having a passage sidewall with openings wherein, when the conduit is inserted into the longitudinally extending inlet passage, the porous section and the sidewall opening align with the openings of the longitudinally extending inlet passage.
- 13. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment chamber comprises a cyclone, the outlet end comprises an end wall and the sidewall has a side wall opening that is positioned upstream of the end wall and a tangential inlet extends downstream from the side wall opening. - 14. A surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment chamber provided in the air flow path, the air flow chamber having an air treatment chamber air inlet and an air treatment chamber air outlet; and,
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path,
- wherein the air treatment chamber air inlet of the air flow chamber comprises an axial extending conduit having a sidewall that extends longitudinally in a flow direction from an inlet end to an outlet end, and the sidewall has a sidewall opening provided therein whereupon, on exiting the sidewall opening, the air enters the air treatment chamber.
- 15. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 14 wherein the outlet end comprises an end wall.
- 16. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 15 wherein the sidewall opening is located adjacent the end wall.
- 17. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 14 wherein the conduit has a porous section.
- 18. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 17 wherein the porous section comprises mesh material.
- 19. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 17 wherein the outlet end comprises an end wall, the porous section is provided upstream of the end wall and is opposed to the side wall opening.
-
- 1. A surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment chamber provided in the air flow path, the air flow chamber having an air treatment chamber air inlet and an air treatment chamber air outlet; and,
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path,
- wherein the air treatment chamber air inlet of the air flow chamber comprises an axially extending conduit having a sidewall that extends longitudinally in a flow direction from an inlet end to an outlet end, the outlet end having an outlet port provided in the sidewall, wherein a cross-sectional area of the outlet port is variable.
- 2. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the outlet port comprises an axially extending opening in the sidewall, the axially extending opening has an axial length. - 3. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 2 wherein the sidewall terminates at a terminal end which is located at the outlet end and the axially extending opening extends to the terminal end of the sidewall. - 4. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 3 further comprising an end wall that is provided at the outlet end of the conduit, the end wall extends transverse to the flow direction.
- 5. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 4 wherein the axially extending opening extends to the end wall.
- 6. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 4 wherein the end wall is moveably axially whereby the axial length of the outlet port is varied.
- 7. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the cross-sectional area of the outlet port is varied based upon an air flow rate of air in the air flow path. - 8. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein, when the air flow rate is a first flow rate, the outlet port has a first cross-sectional area and when the air flow rate is a second flow rate that is lower than the first flow rate, the outlet port has a second cross-sectional area that is smaller than the first cross-sectional area. - 9. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 8 wherein the cross-section area is automatically varied based on the air flow rate.
- 10. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 8 wherein the surface cleaning apparatus comprises:
- (a) a floor cleaning unit comprising a surface cleaning head and upright support member moveably mounted between an upright storage position and a reclined cleaning position; and,
- (b) a portable surface cleaning unit comprising the air treatment chamber and the suction motor,
- wherein the portable cleaning unit is removably mountable to the floor cleaning unit whereby, when the portable cleaning unit is mounted to the floor cleaning unit, the surface cleaning apparatus is operable in an upright vacuum cleaner mode and, when the portable cleaning unit is removed from the floor cleaning unit, the portable cleaning unit is operable in an above floor cleaning mode, and
- wherein, when the surface cleaning apparatus is operated in the upright vacuum cleaner mode, the air flow rate is the second flow rate and when the portable cleaning unit is operated in the above floor cleaning mode, the air flow rate is the first flow rate.
- 11. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 10 wherein the cross-section area is automatically varied as an operating mode of the surface cleaning apparatus is changed from the upright vacuum cleaner mode to the above floor cleaning mode.
- 12. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein, when a first power level is provided to the suction motor, the outlet port has a first cross-sectional area and, when a second power level is provided to the suction motor wherein the second power level is lower than the first power level, the outlet port has a second cross-sectional area that is smaller than the first cross-sectional area. - 13. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 12 wherein the cross-section area is automatically varied based on the power level.
- 14. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 12 wherein the surface cleaning apparatus comprises:
- (a) a floor cleaning unit comprising a surface cleaning head and upright support member moveably mounted between an upright storage position and a reclined cleaning position; and,
- (b) a portable surface cleaning unit comprising the air treatment chamber and the suction motor,
- wherein the portable cleaning unit is removably mountable to the floor cleaning unit whereby, when the portable cleaning unit is mounted to the floor cleaning unit, the surface cleaning apparatus is operable in an upright vacuum cleaner mode and, when the portable cleaning unit is removed from the floor cleaning unit, the portable cleaning unit is operable in an above floor cleaning mode, and
- wherein, when the surface cleaning apparatus is operated in the upright vacuum cleaner mode, the suction motor has provided to it the second power level and when the portable cleaning unit is operated in the above floor cleaning mode, the suction motor has provided to it the first power level.
- 15. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 14 wherein the power level is automatically varied as an operating mode of the surface cleaning apparatus is changed from the upright vacuum cleaner mode to the above floor cleaning mode.
- The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the cross-sectional area of the outlet port is varied based on the size of dirt which is collected. - 16. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 16 wherein, when the dirt having a first size is collected, the outlet port has a first cross-sectional area and when the dirt having a second size that is smaller than the first size is collected, the outlet port has a second cross-sectional area that is smaller than the first cross-sectional area.
- 17. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 17 wherein the cross-sectional area of the outlet port is automatically varied based on the size of the dirt which is collected.
- 18. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 17 wherein the cross-sectional area of the outlet port is manually varied.
-
- 1. A surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment member provided in the air flow path, the air treatment member comprising an air treatment chamber having an air treatment chamber air inlet and an air treatment chamber air outlet, wherein the air treatment chamber air inlet comprises a portion in which air flows therethrough in a flow direction;
- (c) a closure member which is moveable in the flow direction between an open position in which, during operation of the surface cleaning apparatus, air flows through the air treatment chamber air inlet to the air treatment chamber, and a closed position in which air flow through the air treatment chamber air inlet is inhibited; and,
- (d) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path.
- 2. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the flow direction is axial. - 3. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment member has a first end and a second end, wherein the second end is spaced apart from the first end in the flow direction. - 4. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 3 wherein the air treatment chamber air inlet has an inlet end and an outlet end and the closure member moves in a direction opposite to the flow direction from the open position, through the inlet conduit, towards the inlet end of the conduit to the closed position.
- 5. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 4 wherein the inlet end of the inlet conduit has an inlet port and, in the closed position, the closure member abuts the inlet port.
- 6. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 4 wherein the inlet conduit has a sidewall that extends in the flow direction and the outlet end has an outlet port provided in the sidewall, the closure member comprises an end wall that extends transverse to the flow direction.
- 7. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 6 wherein the inlet conduit removably receives an upstream air flow conduit and insertion of the upstream air flow conduit into the inlet conduit moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position.
- 8. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the closure member is biased to the closed position.
- 9. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the closure member moves along a rail from the closed position to the open position - 10. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the surface cleaning apparatus comprises:- (a) a floor cleaning unit comprising a surface cleaning head; and
- (b) a portable surface cleaning unit comprising the air treatment chamber and the suction motor.
- wherein the portable cleaning unit is removably mountable to the floor cleaning unit whereby, when the portable cleaning unit is mounted to the floor cleaning unit, the surface cleaning apparatus is operable in a floor cleaner mode and, when the portable cleaning unit is removed from the floor cleaning unit, the portable cleaning unit is operable in an above floor cleaning mode, and wherein, mounting the portable cleaning unit to the floor cleaning unit moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position.
- 11. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 10 wherein the closure member is biased to the closed position.
- 12. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment member has a first end and a second end, wherein the second end is spaced apart from the first end in an axial direction, the air treatment member has an axial extending sidewall and the air treatment chamber air inlet is provided in the sidewall. - 13. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 12 wherein the sidewall of the air treatment member is curved in a plane transverse to the axial direction and the closure member moves in the axial direction between the open and closed positions.
- 14. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 13 wherein the closure member is curved in the plane transverse to the axial direction.
- 15. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising an on/off actuator which is operable to actuate the suction motor when the actuator is set to on and which is operable to deenergize the suction motor when the actuator is set to off, and the closure member moves from the open position to the closed position in response to the actuator being set to off. - 16. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 15 wherein on/off actuator is mechanically drivingly connected to the closure member.
- 17. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 15 wherein when the on/off actuator is transitioned to off, a signal is issued which causes an electromechanical member to drive the closure member to the closed position.
- 18. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein suction produced by the suction motor moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position. -
- 1. A surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet, the air flow path comprising an air treatment member;
- (b) the air treatment member comprising an air treatment chamber having a first end, a second end, a sidewall extending between the first and second ends, a central axis extending from the first end to the second end through a center of the air treatment chamber, an air treatment chamber air inlet and an air treatment chamber air outlet:
- (c) a closure member which is moveable between an open position in which at least a portion of the closure member is exterior to the air flow path whereby, during operation of the surface cleaning apparatus, air flows through the air treatment chamber air inlet to the air treatment chamber, and a closed position in which air flow through the air treatment chamber air inlet is inhibited: and,
- (d) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path.
- 2. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein, in the closed position, the at least a portion of the closure member closes a port in a wall of the air treatment chamber. - 3. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein, in the open position, the at least a portion of the closure member forms a portion of the wall of the air flow path. - 4. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 3 wherein the air treatment chamber has a first end and a second end, wherein the second end is spaced apart from the first end in an axial direction, the air treatment chamber has an axial extending sidewall, the sidewall has a port that communicates with the pocket and the port is closed by the closure member when the closure member is in the open position.
- 5. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment chamber has a first end and a second end, wherein the second end is spaced apart from the first end in an axial direction, the air treatment chamber has an axial extending sidewall, the sidewall has a port that communicates with the pocket and the port is closed by the closure member when the closure member is in the open position. - 6. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a pocket that is exterior to the air treatment chamber and, when the closure member is in the open position, the at least a portion of the closure member is positioned in the pocket. - 7. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a rotational axis whereby the closure member is rotatably moveable between the open position and the closed position, and the rotation axis is generally perpendicular to the central axis. - 8. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the closure member is planar.
- 9. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the air treatment chamber air inlet is provided at the first end of the air treatment chamber, the closure member has a first end comprising a rotational mount and a second opposed end, the closure member extends generally perpendicular to the central axis when in the closed position and the second opposed end of the closure member rotates towards the second end of the air treatment chamber as the closure member moves to the open position.
- 10. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the rotation axis is exterior to the air treatment chamber.
- 11. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a rotational axis whereby the closure member is rotatably moveable between the open position and the closed position, and the rotation axis is generally parallel to the central axis and spaced from the central axis in a direction transverse to the central axis. - 12. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 11 wherein the closure member is arcuate in shape.
- 13. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 11 wherein the closure member has a profile in a plane that is transverse to the central axis that is similar to a profile of the sidewall in the plane.
- 14. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 11 wherein the rotation axis is exterior to the air treatment chamber.
- 15. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising an on/off actuator which is operable to actuate the suction motor when the actuator is set to on and which is operable to deenergize the suction motor when the actuator is set to off, and the closure member moves from the open position to the closed position in response to the actuator being set to off. - 16. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 15 wherein on/off actuator is mechanically drivingly connected to the closure member.
- 17. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 15 wherein when the on/off actuator is transitioned to off a signal is issued which causes an electromechanical member to drive the closure member to the closed position.
- 18. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein suction produced by the suction motor moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position. - 19. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the surface cleaning apparatus comprises:- (a) a floor cleaning unit comprising a surface cleaning head; and
- (b) a portable surface cleaning unit comprising the air treatment chamber and the suction motor.
- wherein the portable cleaning unit is removably mountable to the floor cleaning unit whereby, when the portable cleaning unit is mounted to the floor cleaning unit, the surface cleaning apparatus is operable in a floor cleaner mode and, when the portable cleaning unit is removed from the floor cleaning unit, the portable cleaning unit is operable in an above floor cleaning mode, and wherein, mounting the portable cleaning unit to the floor cleaning unit moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position. 20. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment chamber comprises a cyclone chamber and the central axis is a cyclone axis of rotation.
-
- 1. A surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment member provided in the air flow path, the air treatment member comprising an air treatment chamber having a first end, a second end, a sidewall extending between the first and second ends, a central axis extending from the first end to the second end through a center of the air treatment chamber, an air treatment chamber air inlet and an air treatment chamber air outlet;
- (c) a closure member which is moveable between an open position in which, during operation of the surface cleaning apparatus, air flows through the air treatment chamber air inlet to the air treatment chamber, and a closed position in which air flow through the air treatment chamber air inlet is inhibited:
- (d) a driving member driving connected to the closure member; and.
- (e) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path
- wherein the closure member moves in a first direction from the open position to the closed position and in a second direction from the closed position to the open position, and the driving member is operable to move the closure member in at least one of the first and second directions.
- 2. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the driving member is operable to move the closure member in the first direction and in the second direction. - 3. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising an on/off actuator which is operable to actuate the suction motor when the actuator is set to on and which is operable to deenergize the suction motor when the actuator is set to off, and the driving member moves the closure member from the open position to the closed position in response to the actuator being set to off. - 4. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 3 wherein the driving member comprises a mechanical driving linkage whereby the on/off actuator is mechanically drivingly connected to the closure member mechanical driving linkage.
- 5. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 3 wherein the driving member comprises an electromechanical member whereby when the on/off actuator is transitioned to off, a signal is issued which causes an electromechanical member to drive the closure member to the closed position.
- 6. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 5 wherein the electromechanical member comprises a solenoid.
- 7. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 3 wherein the closure member moves from the closed position to the open position in response to the actuator being set to on.
- 8. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein suction produced by the suction motor moves the driving member which moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position. - 9. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the driving member comprises a piston.
- 10. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the closure member is biased to the closed position.
- 11. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the driving member comprises a rigid air flow conduit that is removably insertable into the dirty air inlet whereby insertion of the rigid air flow conduit moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position. - 12. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 11 wherein the closure member s biased to the closed position.
- 13. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein a rigid air flow conduit is removably insertable into the dirty air inlet and the driving member comprises an engagement member provided on the rigid air flow conduit and an actuator that is operatively connected to the closure member whereby upon insertion of the rigid air flow conduit into the dirty air inlet, the engagement member contacts the actuator which moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position. - 14. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 13 wherein the actuator comprises a mating engagement member that is drivingly connected to the closure member.
- 15. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 13 wherein the actuator comprises an electromechanical member.
- 15. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the surface cleaning apparatus comprises:- (a) a floor cleaning unit comprising a surface cleaning head; and
- (b) a portable surface cleaning unit comprising the air treatment chamber and the suction motor.
- wherein the portable cleaning unit is removably mountable to the floor cleaning unit whereby, when the portable cleaning unit is mounted to the floor cleaning unit, the surface cleaning apparatus is operable in a floor cleaner mode and, when the portable cleaning unit is removed from the floor cleaning unit, the portable cleaning unit is operable in an above floor cleaning mode, and
- wherein, mounting the portable cleaning unit to the floor cleaning unit moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position.
- 17. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 16 wherein the floor cleaning unit comprises a rigid air flow conduit that is removably insertable into the portable surface cleaning unit, and the driving member comprises the rigid air flow conduit.
- 18. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 17 wherein the driving member comprises an engagement member provided on the rigid air flow conduit and an actuator that is operatively connected to the closure member whereby upon insertion of the rigid air flow conduit into the portable surface cleaning unit, the engagement member contacts the actuator which moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position.
- 19. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 16 wherein the driving member comprises an engagement member provided on the floor cleaning unit and an actuator that is operatively connected to the closure member whereby upon mounting the portable cleaning unit to the floor cleaning unit, the engagement member contacts the actuator which moves the closure member from the closed position to the open position.
-
- 1. A hand surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) a cyclone provided in the air flow path, the cyclone comprising a cyclone chamber having a first end a second end, a sidewall extending between the first and second ends, a cyclone axis of rotation extending from the first end to the second end, a cyclone air inlet provided at the first end and a cyclone air outlet provided at the second end, the cyclone air outlet comprises an air impermeable portion and a porous portion; and,
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path wherein a rib, which is positioned between the cyclone air outlet and the sidewall, extends in a generally axial direction, and
- wherein the rib extends co-extensively along at least a portion of the cyclone chamber in which the impermeable portion is provided.
- 2. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein a plurality of ribs is provided and the ribs are angularly spaced apart around the cyclone air outlet. - 3. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the second end comprises a second end wall, and the rib extends inwardly into the cyclone chamber from the second end wall. - 4. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the second end comprises a second end wall, the impermeable portion extends inwardly into the cyclone chamber and has an inner end, the porous portion has an outward end located at the inner end of the impermeable portion, the porous portion extends further inwardly into the cyclone chamber from the inner end of the impermeable portion, the rib has a first side that is closer to the first end than the second end and the first side is positioned prior to the outward end. - 5. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 4 wherein the first end of the rib is curved.
- 6. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the rib extends co-extensive only with the porous portion. - 7. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the rib has a first side that is closer to the first end than the second end and the first end of the rib is cured. - 8. A surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet:
- (b) a cyclone provided in the air flow path, the cyclone comprising a cyclone chamber having a first end, a second end, a sidewall extending between the first and second ends, a cyclone axis of rotation extending from the first end to the second end, a cyclone air inlet and a cyclone air outlet provided at the second end: and,
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path
- wherein a rib, which is positioned between the cyclone air outlet and the sidewall, extends in a generally axial direction.
- 9. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 8 wherein a plurality of ribs is provided and the ribs are angularly spaced apart around the cyclone air outlet.
- 10. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 8 wherein the cyclone air outlet comprises an air impermeable portion and a porous portion, and the rib extends co-extensively along at least a portion of the cyclone chamber in which the impermeable portion is provided.
- 11. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 10 wherein the second end comprises a second end wall, the impermeable portion extends inwardly into the cyclone chamber and has an inner end, the porous portion has an outward end located at the inner end of the impermeable portion, the porous portion extends further inwardly into the cyclone chamber from the inner end of the impermeable portion, the rib has a first side that is closer to the first end than the second end and the first side is positioned prior to the outward end.
- 12. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 10 wherein the rib extends co-extensive only with the porous portion.
- 7. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 11 wherein the first end of the rib is curved.
- 14. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 12 wherein the first end of the rib is curved.
- 15. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 8 wherein the rib has a first side that is closer to the first end than the second end and the first end of the rib is curved.
- 16. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 15 wherein the second end comprises a second end wall, and the rib extends inwardly into the cyclone chamber from the second end wall.
- 17. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 8 wherein the second end comprises a second end wall, and the rib extends inwardly into the cyclone chamber from the second end wall.
- 18. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 8 wherein the cyclone air inlet is provided at the first end.
- 19. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 18 wherein the surface cleaning apparatus is a hand surface cleaning apparatus, the first end is a front end of the cyclone and the second end is a rear end of the cyclone.
-
- 1. A surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment member provided in the air flow path, the air treatment member comprising an air treatment chamber comprising an air treatment chamber housing having a central axis that extends from a first end of the air treatment chamber housing to an axially spaced apart second end of the air treatment chamber housing through a center of the air treatment chamber, a sidewall extending between the first and second ends, an air treatment chamber air inlet and an air treatment chamber air outlet provided at the second end, at least a portion of the first end of the air treatment chamber housing is moveable between a closed operating position and an open position in which a first end of the air treatment chamber is opened; and,
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path,
- wherein the air treatment chamber is emptyable by opening the first end of the air treatment chamber housing and moving at least a portion of the second end axially towards the first end of the air treatment chamber.
- 2. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the at least a portion of the second end is moved axially towards the first end of the air treatment chamber subsequent to the first end of the air treatment chamber housing being opened. - 3. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the at least a portion of the second end is moved axially towards the first end of the air treatment chamber as the first end of the air treatment chamber housing is opened. - 4. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment chamber air outlet comprises a porous member and the at least a portion of the second end comprises the porous member. - 5. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the second end comprises a second end wall and the at least a portion of the second end comprises a portion of the second end wall. - 6. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment chamber air outlet comprises a porous member and the second end comprises a second end wall and the at least a portion of the second end comprises the second end wall and the porous member. - 7. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a track and the at least a portion of the second end is slidable axially along the track. - 8. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the track has an associated felt sealing member.
- 9. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the track is provided in the sidewall.
- 10. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a pre-motor filter and the pre-motor filter is moveable with the at least a portion of the second end. - 11. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the first end of the air treatment chamber housing translates forwardly from the closed position to the open position. - 12. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the first end of the air treatment member housing is drivingly connected to the at least a portion of the second end by a linking member. - 13. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 12 wherein the linking member is a mechanical linkage.
- 14. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 12 wherein the linking member comprises an electromechanical member.
- 15. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein operation of the suction motor produces an air flow that moves the at least a portion of the second end. - 16. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the first end comprises a first end wall and the at least a portion of the first end of the air treatment chamber housing comprises the first end wall. - 17. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 16 wherein the surface cleaning apparatus is a hand vacuum cleaner and the dirty air inlet is moveable with the first end wall.
- 18. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 16 wherein the air treatment member further comprises an inlet conduit and the inlet conduit is moveable with the first end wall.
-
- 1. A surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment member provided in the air flow path, the air treatment member comprising an air treatment chamber comprising an air treatment chamber housing having a central axis that extends from a first end of the air treatment chamber housing to an axially spaced apart second end of the air treatment chamber housing through a center of the air treatment chamber, a sidewall extending between the first and second ends, an air treatment chamber air inlet and an air treatment chamber air outlet provided at the second end, an openable portion of the air treatment chamber housing is moveable between a closed operating position and an open position in which the air treatment chamber is opened; and,
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path.
- wherein the at least a portion of the second end is moveably mounted, and the at least a portion of the second end is moved as the air treatment chamber housing is opened.
- 2. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the openable portion of the air treatment chamber housing comprises at least a portion of the first end of the air treatment chamber housing. - 3. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 2 wherein at least a portion of the second end is moved axially towards the first end of the air treatment chamber as the air treatment chamber housing is opened. - 4. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein at least a portion of the second end is moved towards an open portion of the air treatment chamber as the air treatment chamber housing is opened. - 5. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment chamber air outlet comprises a porous member and the at least a portion of the second end comprises the porous member. - 6. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the second end comprises a second end wall and the at least a portion of the second end comprises a portion of the second end wall. - 7. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment chamber air outlet comprises a porous member and the second end comprises a second end wall and the at least a portion of the second end comprises the second end wall and the porous member. - 8. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a track and the at least a portion of the second end is slidable axially along the track. - 9. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 8 wherein the track has an associated felt sealing member.
- 10. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 8 wherein the track is provided in the sidewall.
- 11. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a pre-motor filter and the pre-motor filter is moveable with the at least a portion of the second end. - 12. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the first end of the air treatment chamber housing translates forwardly from the closed position to the open position. - 13. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the openable portion of the air treatment chamber housing is drivingly connected to the at least a portion of the second end by a linking member. - 14. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 13 wherein the linking member is a mechanical linkage.
- 15. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 13 wherein the linking member comprises an electromechanical member.
- 16. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein operation of the suction motor produces an air flow that moves the at least a portion of the second end. - 17. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the surface cleaning apparatus is a hand vacuum cleaner and the dirty air inlet is moveable with the openable portion. - 18. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment member further comprises an inlet conduit and the inlet conduit is moveable with the openable portion. -
- 1. A surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment member provided in the air flow path, the air treatment member comprising an air treatment chamber comprising an air treatment chamber housing having a central axis that extends from a first end of the air treatment chamber housing to an axially spaced apart second end of the air treatment chamber housing through a center of the air treatment chamber, a sidewall extending between the first and second ends, an air treatment chamber air inlet and an air treatment chamber air outlet provided at the second end, at least a portion of the first end of the air treatment chamber housing is moveable between a closed operating position and an open position in which a first end of the air treatment chamber is opened, wherein at least a portion of the first end of the air treatment chamber housing translates forwardly from the closed position to the open position; and,
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path.
- 2. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the first end comprises a first end wall and the at least a portion of the first end of the air treatment chamber housing comprises the first end wall. - 3. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 2 wherein the surface cleaning apparatus is a hand vacuum cleaner and the dirty air inlet is moveable with the first end wall. - 4. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 2 wherein the air treatment member further comprises an inlet conduit and the inlet conduit is moveable with the first end wall. - 5. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein at least a portion of the second end is moveably mounted, and the at least a portion of the second end is moved as the air treatment chamber housing is opened - 6. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 5 wherein the at least a portion of the second end is moveable axially.
- 7. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 5 wherein the at least a portion of the second end is moved subsequent to the first end of the air treatment chamber housing translating forwardly.
- 8. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 5 wherein the at least a portion of the second end is moved as the first end of the air treatment chamber housing translates forwardly.
- 9. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 5 wherein the air treatment chamber air outlet comprises a porous member and the at least a portion of the second end comprises the porous member.
- 10. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 5 wherein the second end comprises a second end wall and the at least a portion of the second end comprises a portion of the second end wall.
- 11. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 5 wherein the air treatment chamber air outlet comprises a porous member and the second end comprises a second end wall and the at least a portion of the second end comprises the second end wall and the porous member.
- 12. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 5 further comprising a track and the at least a portion of the second end is slidable axially along the track.
- 13. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 12 wherein the track has an associated felt sealing member.
- 14. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 12 wherein the track is provided in the sidewall.
- 15. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 5 further comprising a pre-motor filter and the pre-motor filter is moveable with the at least a portion of the second end.
- 16. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 5 wherein the first end of the air treatment member housing is drivingly connected to the at least a portion of the second end by a linking member.
- 17. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 16 wherein the linking member is a mechanical linkage.
- 18. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 16 wherein the linking member comprises an electromechanical member.
- 19. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 5 wherein operation of the suction motor produces an air flow that moves the at least a portion of the second end.
-
- 1. A surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment member provided in the air flow path, the air treatment member comprising an air treatment chamber comprising an air treatment chamber housing having a central axis that extends from a first end of the air treatment chamber housing to an axially spaced apart second end of the air treatment chamber housing through a center of the air treatment chamber, a sidewall extending between the first and second ends, an air treatment chamber air inlet and an air treatment chamber air outlet provided at the second end, an openable portion of the air treatment chamber housing is moveable between a closed operating position and an open position in which the air treatment chamber is opened; and,
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path.
- wherein at least a portion of the second end is moveably mounted, and wherein operation of the suction motor produces an air flow that moves the at least a portion of the second end.
- 2. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the openable portion of the air treatment chamber housing comprises at least a portion of the first end of the air treatment chamber housing. - 3. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 2 wherein at least a portion of the second end is moved axially towards the first end of the air treatment chamber as the air treatment chamber housing is opened. - 4. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the at least a portion of the first end of the air treatment chamber housing is translatable forwardly from the closed position to the open position. - 5. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein at least a portion of the second end is moved towards an open portion of the air treatment chamber as the air treatment chamber housing is opened. - 6. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment chamber air outlet comprises a porous member and the at least a portion of the second end comprises the porous member. - 7. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the second end comprises a second end wall and the at least a portion of the second end comprises a portion of the second end wall. - 8. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment chamber air outlet comprises a porous member and the second end comprises a second end wall and the at least a portion of the second end comprises the second end wall and the porous member. - 9. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a track and the at least a portion of the second end is slidable axially along the track. - 10. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 10 wherein the track has an associated felt sealing member.
- 11. The surface cleaning apparatus of clause 10 wherein the track is provided in the sidewall.
- 12. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a pre-motor filter and the pre-motor filter is moveable with the at least a portion of the second end. - 13. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the suction motor is actuated to produce the air flow that moves the at least a portion of the second end upon the operable portion opening. - 14. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the suction motor is actuated to produce the air flow that moves the at least a portion of the second end upon the surface cleaning apparatus docking at a docking station. - 15. The surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the suction motor is actuated to produce the air flow that moves the at least a portion of the second end upon the air treatment member docking at a docking station. - A hand surface cleaning apparatus having a front end and a rear end, the hand surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
-
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet:
- (b) an air treatment member provided in the air flow path:
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path; and
- (d) a user interface that is spaced from and overlies the rear end of the hand surface cleaning apparatus.
- 2. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a support arm, the support arm has a user interface support that is spaced from and overlies the rear end of the hand surface cleaning apparatus. - 3. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 2 wherein the user interface support faces rearwardly. - 4. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 2 further comprising an air gap provided between a rear end of a main body of the hand surface cleaning apparatus and the user interface support. - 5. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 4 further comprising a fan and suction motor housing and the rear end is a rear end of the fan and suction motor housing.
- 6. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the support arm extends rearwardly from the rear end. - 7. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a pistol grip handle that is provided on a lower end of the hand surface cleaning apparatus and the support arm extends rearwardly from the pistol grip handle. - 8. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the support arm extends rearwardly from an upper end of the pistol grip handle.
- 9. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 further comprising an energy storage member provided at a lower end of the pistol grip handle.
- 10. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the user interface provides information about at least one operating mode of the hand surface cleaning apparatus. - 11. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising an energy storage member and the user interface provides information about a charge level of the energy storage member. - 12. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the user interface includes at least one control of the hand surface cleaning apparatus. - 13. A hand surface cleaning apparatus having a front end and a rear end, the hand surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment member provided in the air flow path;
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path;
- (d) a pistol grip handle, wherein an upper end of the pistol grip handle is mounted to a lower end of the hand surface cleaning apparatus; and,
- (e) a user interface provided on the handle, wherein the user interface provides information about at least one operating mode of the hand surface cleaning apparatus.
- 14. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 13 wherein the user interface includes at least one control of the hand surface cleaning apparatus.
- 15. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 13 further comprising an energy storage member provided at a lower end of the pistol grip handle.
- 16. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 15 wherein the user interface is provided at an upper end of the pistol grip handle.
- 17. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 13 further comprising an energy storage member and the user interface provides information about a charge level of the energy storage member.
- 18. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the user interface provides information about at least one operating mode of the hand surface cleaning apparatus. - 19. A hand surface cleaning apparatus having a front end and a rear end, the hand surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment member provided in the air flow paths.
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path;
- (d) a pistol grip handle, wherein an upper end of the pistol grip handle is mounted to a lower end of the hand surface cleaning apparatus; and,
- (e) a user interface provided on the handle, wherein the user interface is provided at an upper end of the pistol grip handle.
- 20. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 19 wherein the user interface includes at least one control of the hand surface cleaning apparatus.
- 21. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 19 further comprising an energy storage member provided at a lower end of the pistol grip handle.
- 22. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 19 further comprising an energy storage member and the user interface also provides information about a charge level of the energy storage member.
-
- 1. A hand surface cleaning apparatus having a front end and a rear end, the hand surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment member provided in the air flow path;
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path;
- (d) a filter provided at the rear end of the hand surface cleaning apparatus; and
- (e) a user interface provided at the rear end of the hand surface cleaning apparatus,
- wherein the filter is removable rearwardly.
- 2. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the user interface remains in position when the filter is removed. - 3. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the rear end comprises a rear wall and the rear wall is part of a filter housing. - 4. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the user interface is positioned radially outwardly of the filter. - 5. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a filter housing and the user interface is positioned radially outwardly of the filter housing. - 6. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 further comprising a filter housing and the user interface is part of the filter housing. - 7. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the rear end of the hand vacuum cleaner comprises an annular portion and the user interface is provided on the annular portion. - 8. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the user interface comprises an annulus sector of the annular portion.
- 9. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the user interface comprises a display surface that faces radially outwardly.
- 10. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the user interface comprises a display surface that faces rearwardly.
- 11. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the user erface comprises a display surface that faces radially outwardly. - 12. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the user interface comprises a display surface that faces rearwardly. - 13. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the user interface provides information about at least one operating mode of the hand surface cleaning apparatus. - 14. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 13 wherein the user interface includes at least one control of the hand surface cleaning apparatus.
- 15. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 13 further comprising an energy storage member and the user interface also provides information about a charge level of the energy storage member.
- 16. A hand surface cleaning apparatus having a front end and a rear end, the hand surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet:
- (b) an air treatment member provided in the air flow path;
- (c) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path;
- (d) a filter provided at the rear end of the hand surface cleaning apparatus; and
- (e) a user interface provided at the rear end of the hand surface cleaning apparatus,
- wherein the rear end of the hand vacuum cleaner comprises an annular portion and the user interface is provided on the annular portion.
- 17. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 16 wherein the user interface comprises an annulus sector of the annular portion.
- 18. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 16 wherein the user interface comprises a display surface that faces radially outwardly.
- 19. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 16 wherein the user interface comprises a display surface that faces rearwardly.
- 20. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 16 wherein the user interface provides information about at least one operating mode of the hand surface cleaning apparatus.
- 21. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 20 wherein the user interface includes at least one control of the hand surface cleaning apparatus.
- 22. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 20 further comprising an energy storage member and the user interface also provides information about a charge level of the energy storage member.
-
- 1. A hand surface cleaning apparatus having a front end and a rear end, the hand surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet;
- (b) an air treatment chamber provided in the air flow path, the air treatment chamber comprising a front end, a rear end, an air treatment chamber air inlet and an air treatment chamber air outlet, the air treatment chamber air outlet comprising a rigid porous member
- (c) a rigid frustoconical premotor filter that is at least partially nested in the porous member, the premotor filter comprises a pleated filter material; and,
- (d) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path.
- 2. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the air treatment chamber comprises a cyclone having a cyclone axis of rotation wherein the cyclone axis of rotation extends through the front and rear ends of the hand vacuum cleaner. - 3. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the pleats extend in a forward/rearward direction. - 4. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the pre-motor filter has a hollow interior which is downstream of the pleated filter material, the hollow interior has an outlet end and an inlet end of the suction motor faces the outlet end of the hollow interior. - 5. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the rigid porous member comprises a screen. - 6. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of
clause 1 wherein the screen is conical or frustoconical in shape. - 7. A hand surface cleaning apparatus having a front end and a rear end, the hand surface cleaning apparatus comprising:
- (a) an air flow path from a dirty air inlet to a clean air outlet:
- (b) an air treatment chamber provided in the air flow path, the air treatment chamber comprising a front end, a rear end, an air treatment chamber air inlet and an air treatment chamber air outlet, the air treatment chamber air outlet comprising a porous member:
- (c) a pre-motor filter that is at least partially nested in the porous member; and,
- (d) a motor and fan assembly provided in the air flow path.
- 8. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the air treatment chamber comprises a cyclone having a cyclone axis of rotation wherein the cyclone axis of rotation extends through the front and rear ends of the hand vacuum cleaner.
- 9. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the pre-motorfilter comprises a pleated filter material.
- 10. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 9 wherein the pleats extend in a forward/rearward direction.
- 11. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the pre-motor filter has a hollow interior, the hollow interior has an outlet end and an inlet end of the suction motor faces the outlet end of the hollow interior.
- 12. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the porous member is rigid.
- 13. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 7 wherein the porous member comprises a screen.
- 14. The hand surface cleaning apparatus of clause 13 wherein the screen is conical or frustoconical in shape.
Claims (18)
Priority Applications (5)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US17/988,594 US20230148814A1 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2022-11-16 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
US18/126,268 US20230225575A1 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2023-03-24 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
US18/378,638 US20240032753A1 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2023-10-10 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
US18/378,602 US20240032752A1 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2023-10-10 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
PCT/CA2023/051528 WO2024103171A1 (en) | 2022-11-16 | 2023-11-15 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
Applications Claiming Priority (18)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US15/642,781 US10722086B2 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2017-07-06 | Handheld surface cleaning apparatus |
US16/254,918 US10828649B2 (en) | 2019-01-23 | 2019-01-23 | Cyclonic air treatment member and surface cleaning apparatus including the same |
US201962818856P | 2019-03-15 | 2019-03-15 | |
US201962825148P | 2019-03-28 | 2019-03-28 | |
US16/447,308 US10966583B2 (en) | 2019-01-23 | 2019-06-20 | Surface cleaning apparatus, cyclonic air treatment member and surface cleaning apparatus including the same |
US16/806,726 US11219906B2 (en) | 2019-01-23 | 2020-03-02 | Surface cleaning apparatus, cyclonic air treatment member and surface cleaning apparatus including the same |
US16/818,438 US11529033B2 (en) | 2019-03-15 | 2020-03-13 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
US16/823,191 US11666193B2 (en) | 2020-03-18 | 2020-03-18 | Surface cleaning apparatus with removable air treatment member assembly |
US16/823,203 US11766156B2 (en) | 2020-03-18 | 2020-03-18 | Surface cleaning apparatus with removable air treatment member assembly |
US16/823,216 US11445878B2 (en) | 2020-03-18 | 2020-03-18 | Surface cleaning apparatus with removable air treatment member assembly |
US16/822,708 US11730327B2 (en) | 2020-03-18 | 2020-03-18 | Surface cleaning apparatus with removable air treatment assembly |
US16/900,465 US11445875B2 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2020-06-12 | Handheld surface cleaning apparatus |
US17/342,410 US11950752B2 (en) | 2020-03-18 | 2021-06-08 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
US17/342,299 US11737621B2 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2021-06-08 | Handheld surface cleaning apparatus |
US17/458,217 US11771281B2 (en) | 2020-03-18 | 2021-08-26 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
US17/471,041 US11524306B2 (en) | 2019-01-23 | 2021-09-09 | Surface cleaning apparatus, cyclonic air treatment member and surface cleaning apparatus including the same |
US17/694,362 US11745190B2 (en) | 2019-01-23 | 2022-03-14 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
US17/988,594 US20230148814A1 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2022-11-16 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
Related Parent Applications (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/818,438 Continuation-In-Part US11529033B2 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2020-03-13 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
US17/342,299 Continuation-In-Part US11737621B2 (en) | 2009-03-13 | 2021-06-08 | Handheld surface cleaning apparatus |
US17/458,217 Continuation-In-Part US11771281B2 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2021-08-26 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
US17/694,362 Continuation-In-Part US11745190B2 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2022-03-14 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US18/126,268 Continuation-In-Part US20230225575A1 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2023-03-24 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20230148814A1 true US20230148814A1 (en) | 2023-05-18 |
Family
ID=86325252
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US17/988,594 Pending US20230148814A1 (en) | 2017-07-06 | 2022-11-16 | Surface cleaning apparatus |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US20230148814A1 (en) |
-
2022
- 2022-11-16 US US17/988,594 patent/US20230148814A1/en active Pending
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20240032752A1 (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
US10433686B2 (en) | Configuration of a surface cleaning apparatus | |
US11889962B2 (en) | Robotic vacuum cleaner and docking station for a robotic vacuum cleaner | |
EP1594386B1 (en) | Hand held vacuum cleaner | |
US7329294B2 (en) | Dirt container for a surface cleaning apparatus and method of use | |
AU2008295643B2 (en) | Vacuum cleaner | |
US11930987B2 (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
US20120222252A1 (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
CN106659339A (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
US11534043B2 (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
US20230200608A1 (en) | Robotic vacuum cleaner with dirt enclosing member and method of using the same | |
GB2519968A (en) | Surface cleaning Apparatus | |
US20230148814A1 (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
US20240180379A1 (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
WO2024103171A1 (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
US20230348169A1 (en) | Non-cyclonic momentum separator and a surface cleaning apparatus | |
US20240172905A1 (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
US20240172909A1 (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
JP2010029270A (en) | Vacuum cleaner | |
US20220273149A1 (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
WO2024113045A1 (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
US11980334B2 (en) | Surface cleaning apparatus | |
JP2010029239A (en) | Vacuum cleaner | |
CA2730444C (en) | Bleed air valve of a surface cleaning apparatus | |
KR20230040176A (en) | Cleaner system and controlling method thereof |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: OMACHRON INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INC., CANADA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:CONRAD, WAYNE ERNEST;REEL/FRAME:061802/0720 Effective date: 20221114 |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: SHARKNINJA OPERATING LLC, MASSACHUSETTS Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:INNES, DANIEL;REEL/FRAME:063247/0692 Effective date: 20230227 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: OMACHRON INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INC., CANADA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:SHARKNINJA OPERATING LLC;REEL/FRAME:063265/0907 Effective date: 20230405 |